Sony DIGITAL BETACAM DVW 970 User Manual
DIGITAL CAMCORDER  
DVW-970/970P  
The supplied CD-ROM includes operation manuals for the DVW-970/  
970P Digital Camcorder (English, Japanese, French, German, Italian,  
Spanish and Chinese versions) in PDF format.  
For more details, see “1-4 Using the CD-ROM Manual” on page 15.  
TM  
OPERATION MANUAL [English]  
1st Edition  
AVERTISSEMENT  
WARNUNG  
Afin d’éviter tout risque d’incendie ou  
d’électrocution, ne pas exposer cet  
appareil à la pluie ou à l’humidité.  
Um Feuergefahr und die Gefahr eines  
elektrischen Schlages zu vermeiden, darf  
das Gerät weder Regen noch Feuchtigkeit  
ausgesetzt werden.  
Afin d’écarter tout risque d’électrocution,  
garder le coffret fermé. Ne confier  
l’entretien de l’appareil qu’à un personnel  
qualifié.  
Um einen elektrischen Schlag zu  
vermeiden, darf das Gehäuse nicht  
geöffnet werden. Überlassen Sie  
Wartungsarbeiten stets nur qualifiziertem  
Fachpersonal.  
Pour les utilisateurs aux Etats-Unis et au Canada.  
• RECYCLAGE DES ACCUMULATEURS AUX IONS DE  
LITHIUM  
Les accumulateurs aux ions de lithium  
sont recyclables.  
Vous pouvez contribuer à préserver  
l’environnement en rapportant les piles  
usées dans un point de collection et  
recyclage le plus proche.  
Für Kunden in Europa  
Dieses Produkt besitzt die CE-Kennzeichnung und erfüllt die  
EMV-Richtlinie (89/336/EWG) der EG-Kommission.  
Angewandte Normen:  
• EN55103-1: Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit  
(Störaussendung)  
• EN55103-2: Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit  
(Störfestigkeit),  
für die folgenden elektromagnetischen Umgebungen:  
E1 (Wohnbereich), E2 (kommerzieller und in beschränktem  
Maße industrieller Bereich), E3 (Stadtbereich im Freien) und  
E4 (kontrollierter EMV-Bereich, z.B. Fernsehstudio).  
Pour plus d’informations sur le recyclage des  
accumulateurs, téléphonez au numéro gratuit  
1-800-822-8837 (Etats-Unis et Canada uniquement), ou  
visitez http://www.rbrc.org/  
Avertissment: Ne pas utiliser des accumulateurs aux ions  
de lithium qui sont endommagés ou qui fuient.  
Für Kunden in Deutschland  
Pour les clients européens  
Wenn Sie das Gerät entsorgen wollen, wenden Sie sich bitte  
an das nächste Sony-Kundendienstzentrum. Der eingebaute  
Akku muss als chemischer Sondermüll entsorgt werden,  
Ce produit portant la marque CE est conforme à la Directive  
sur la compatibilité électromagnétique (EMC) (89/336/CEE)  
émise par la Commission de la Communauté européenne.  
La conformité à cette directive implique la conformité aux  
normes européennes suivantes :  
• EN55103-1 : Interférences électromagnétiques (émission)  
• EN55103-2 : Sensibilité électromagnétique (immunité)  
Ce produit est prévu pour être utilisé dans les environnements  
électromagnétiques suivants :  
E1 (résidentiel), E2 (commercial et industrie légère),  
E3 (urbain extérieur) et E4 (environnement EMC contrôlé, ex.  
studio de télévision).  
3
ATTENZIONE  
ADVERTENCIA  
Per evitare il pericolo di incendi o scosse  
elettriche, non esporre l’apparecchio alla  
pioggia o all’umidità.  
Para evitar el riesgo de incendios o  
electrocución, no exponga la unidad a la  
lluvia ni a la humedad.  
Per evitare scosse elettriche, non aprire  
l’apparecchio.  
Per le riparazioni, rivolgersi solo a  
personale qualificato.  
Para evitar descargas eléctricas, no abra el  
aparato. Solicite asistencia técnica  
únicamente a personal especializado.  
Para los clientes de Europa  
Este producto cumple con las directivas de compatibilidad  
electromagnética (89/336/CEE) de la Comisión Europea.  
El cumplimiento de estas directivas implica la conformidad  
con los siguientes estándares europeos:  
• EN55103-1: Interferencia electromagnética (Emisión)  
• EN55103-2: Susceptibilidad electromagnética (Inmunidad)  
Este producto está ha sido diseñado para utilizarse en los  
entornos electromagnéticos siguientes:  
Per i clienti in Europa  
Questo prodotto recante il marchio CE è conforme sia alla  
direttiva sulla compatibilità elettromagnetica (EMC) (89/336/  
CEE) emesse dalla Commissione della Comunità Europea.  
La conformità a queste direttive implica la conformità alle  
seguenti normative europee:  
• EN55103-1: Interferenza elettromagnetica (Emissione)  
• EN55103-2: Sensibilità ai disturbi elettromagnetici  
(Immunità)  
E1 (zona residencial), E2 (zona comercial e industrial ligera),  
E3 (exteriores urbanos), y E4 (entorno con EMC controlada,  
p. ej., estudio de televisión).  
Questo prodotto è destinato all’uso nei seguenti ambienti  
elettromagnetici:  
E1 (residenziali), E2 (commerciali e industriali leggeri), E3  
(esterni urbani) e E4 (ambienti EMC controllati, ad esempio  
studi televisivi).  
4
5
Table of Contents  
Chapter 1 Overview  
1-1 Features......................................................................... 11  
1-1-1 Camera Features .............................................................11  
1-1-2 VTR Features..................................................................12  
1-1-3 Other Features.................................................................12  
1-2 Example of System Configuration .............................. 14  
1-3 Precautions ................................................................... 15  
1-4 Using the CD-ROM Manual .......................................... 15  
1-4-1 CD-ROM System Requirements ....................................15  
1-4-2 Preparations ....................................................................15  
1-4-3 Reading the CD-ROM Manual.......................................15  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
2-1 Power Supply ................................................................ 17  
2-2 Accessory Attachments............................................... 18  
2-3 Audio Functions............................................................ 19  
2-4 Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions ........... 22  
2-5 Menu Operating Section............................................... 27  
2-6 Time Code System........................................................ 29  
2-7 Warnings and Indications ............................................ 31  
2-8 Warnings and Indications on the Display Panel........ 32  
2-9 Indicators in the Viewfinder......................................... 34  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
3-1 About Cassette.............................................................. 35  
3-1-1 Loading and Unloading a Cassette .................................35  
3-1-2 Preventing Accidental Erasure........................................36  
3-2 Recording ...................................................................... 37  
3-2-1 Basic Procedures.............................................................37  
3-2-2 Continuous Recording ....................................................38  
3-2-3 Recording Essence Marks...............................................39  
3-2-4 Starting a Shoot with a Few Seconds of Pre-Stored Picture  
Data (Picture Cache Function: with CBK-MB01) .........42  
3-2-5 Shooting Picture at Intervals (Interval Rec Function: with  
CBK-MB01) ...................................................................44  
Table of Contents  
6
3-2-6 Continuous Recording on Previous Cut..........................51  
3-2-7 Searching for the Last Recorded Portion and Turning in  
Recording Pause Mode (End Search Function)..............52  
3-3 Checking Recording and Playback..............................53  
3-3-1 Checking the Last Two Seconds of the Recording —  
Recording Review...........................................................53  
3-3-2 Checking the Recording on the Color Video Monitor —  
Playback in Color............................................................53  
3-4 Freezing a Picture During Playback.............................54  
3-5 Setting the Stand-by off Timer During Rec-Pause .....55  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4-1 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance.56  
4-1-1 Adjusting the Black Balance...........................................56  
4-1-2 Adjusting the White Balance ..........................................57  
4-2 Setting the Electronic Shutter ......................................59  
4-2-1 Shutter Modes .................................................................59  
4-2-2 Selecting the Shutter Mode and Shutter Speed...............60  
4-3 Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Ad-  
justment..........................................................................62  
4-4 Adjusting the Audio Level ............................................64  
4-4-1 Manually Adjusting the Audio Input Level of the AUDIO  
IN CH1/CH2 Connectors................................................64  
4-4-2 Manually Adjusting the Audio Level of the Front  
Microphone.....................................................................65  
4-4-3 Input level of audio channels CH-3 and CH-4................66  
4-5 Setting the Time Data....................................................67  
4-5-1 Setting the Time Code.....................................................67  
4-5-2 Saving the Actual Time in the Time Code......................67  
4-5-3 Setting the User Bits........................................................68  
4-5-4 Synchronizing the Time Code.........................................68  
Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings  
5-1 Menu Organization and Operation...............................70  
5-1-1 Menu Organization..........................................................70  
5-1-2 Basic Menu Operations...................................................71  
5-1-3 Editing the USER Menu..................................................73  
5-2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen....................77  
5-2-1 Layout of the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen.77  
5-2-2 Selecting the Display Items.............................................79  
Table of Contents  
7
5-2-3 Display Modes and Setting Change Confirmation/  
Adjustment Progress Messages ......................................80  
5-2-4 Setting the Marker Display.............................................81  
5-2-5 Setting the Viewfinder....................................................81  
5-2-6 Recording Shot Data Superimposed on the Color Bars..82  
5-2-7 Setting the Shot ID..........................................................83  
5-2-8 Displaying the Status Confirmation Windows ...............84  
5-2-9 Confirming the Image of the Return Video Signal in the  
Viewfinder......................................................................86  
5-3 Adjustments and Settings from Menus ...................... 87  
5-3-1 Setting Gain Values for the GAIN Selector Positions....87  
5-3-2 Selecting the Output Signals...........................................88  
5-3-3 Setting the Color Temperature Manually .......................88  
5-3-4 Specifying an Offset for the Auto White Balance  
Setting.............................................................................89  
5-3-5 Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches .................90  
5-3-6 Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock...................92  
5-3-7 Selecting the Lens File....................................................93  
5-3-8 Selecting the Aspect Ratio..............................................93  
5-3-9 Setting the CCD Scan Mode...........................................94  
5-3-10 Using UMID Data.........................................................96  
5-4 Resetting USER Menu Settings to the Standard Set-  
tings ............................................................................... 99  
Chapter 6 Saving and Loading User Setting Data  
6-1 Saving and Loading User Files.................................. 100  
6-1-1 Handling the “Memory Stick” ......................................100  
6-1-2 Saving USER Menu Data (User File) to the “Memory  
Stick” ............................................................................101  
6-1-3 Loading Saved Data from a “Memory Stick”...............103  
6-2 Saving and Loading Scene Files............................... 104  
6-2-1 Saving a Scene File.......................................................104  
6-2-2 Loading a Scene File.....................................................106  
6-2-3 Resetting the Settings of the Camcorder to the Standard  
Settings Saved in the Reference File ............................108  
6-3 Jumping to a File-Related Menu Page When Inserting a  
“Memory Stick”........................................................... 108  
Chapter 7 Setting Up the Camcorder  
7-1 Power Supply .............................................................. 110  
Table of Contents  
8
7-1-1 Using a Battery Pack.....................................................110  
7-1-2 Avoiding Breaks in Operation Due to an Exhausted  
Battery...........................................................................110  
7-1-3 Using an AC Adaptor....................................................111  
7-1-4 Using the Anton Bauer Ultralight System ....................111  
7-2 Adjusting the Viewfinder.............................................112  
7-2-1 Adjusting the Viewfinder Position................................112  
7-2-2 Adjusting the Viewfinder Focus and Screen.................112  
7-2-3 Detaching the Viewfinder .............................................113  
7-2-4 Detaching the Eyepiece.................................................113  
7-3 Mounting the Lens.......................................................114  
7-4 Adjusting the Flange Focal Length............................115  
7-5 Audio Input System.....................................................115  
7-5-1 Using the Supplied Microphone....................................115  
7-5-2 Using an External Microphone .....................................116  
7-5-3 Attaching a UHF Portable Tuner (for a UHF Wireless  
Microphone System).....................................................117  
7-5-4 Connecting Line Input Audio Equipment.....................119  
7-6 Tripod Mounting ..........................................................119  
7-7 Attaching/Detaching the Shoulder Strap...................120  
7-8 Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position ........................121  
7-9 Putting on the Rain Cover (Not Supplied).................121  
7-10 Connecting the Remote Control Unit.......................122  
Chapter 8 Maintenance  
8-1 Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting...................124  
8-1-1 Preparations for Testing ................................................124  
8-1-2 Testing the Camera .......................................................124  
8-1-3 Testing the VTR............................................................126  
8-2 Maintenance.................................................................128  
8-2-1 Cleaning the Video Heads.............................................128  
8-2-2 Cleaning the Viewfinder ...............................................128  
8-3 Operation Warnings ....................................................129  
Appendixes  
Specifications .....................................................................131  
General.....................................................................................131  
Video Camera Section .............................................................131  
VTR Section ............................................................................132  
Recommended Additional Equipment.....................................132  
Table of Contents  
9
Menu List ............................................................................ 134  
OPERATION Menu ................................................................134  
PAINT Menu...........................................................................140  
MAINTENANCE Menu .........................................................145  
FILE Menu ..............................................................................153  
DIAGNOSIS Menu .................................................................155  
About a “Memory Stick”.................................................... 156  
Index.................................................................................... 158  
Table of Contents  
10  
1
Overview  
Chapter  
Camera signal processing for high quality  
video  
• The 14-bit A/D converter provides stable high-quality  
images and reliability.  
1-1 Features  
1)  
• The high-performance electronic shutter allows you to  
The DVW-970/970P is a camcorder, in which a color  
1)  
2
select extended clear scan mode (ECS ) and high  
video camera using / -inch high-definition CCDs of a  
3
2)  
vertical resolution mode (EVS ), to obtain clear, high-  
16:9 aspect ratio and a recorder of the Digital BETACAM  
format are combined integrally. The camera’s CCDs have  
approximately 1,000,000 picture elements (pixels) (the  
number of effective pixels: approximately 500,000).  
Its high imaging quality is established by the combination  
quality video.  
1) ECS: Extended Clear Scan  
2) EVS: Super Enhanced Vertical Definition System  
2)  
of Power HAD EX CCDs and advanced digital signal  
Shooting functions to cope with different  
processing technologies. In addition to resistance to  
vibration, dust, and moisture of the Betacam-series  
camcorders, this unit has various functions that make it  
shooting conditions  
1
• A slow shutter function (up to / second) is provided as  
2
3)  
4)  
a standard feature. This allows noiseless shooting under  
very poor lighting conditions and a variety of expressive  
possibilities, such as shots of moving subjects which are  
smoothed out by afterimages.  
• Owing to the scene file function, you can easily recall  
sets of adjustment values from the built-in memory, to  
match the particular lighting conditions.  
ideal as a tool for ENG and EFP .  
1) The DVW-970 is for the NTSC broadcast system. The DVW-970P is for  
the PAL broadcast system. The description given in this manual applies to  
both models, any differences being clearly noted in the text.  
2) Abbreviation of “Power Hole-Accumulated Diode.” “Power HAD” is a  
registered trademark of Sony Corporation.  
3) ENG: Electronic News Gathering  
4) EFP: Electronic Field Production  
1)  
• The ATW function provides automatic white balance  
adjustment in response to changing lighting conditions.  
TM 2)  
• The TruEye  
process yields distortion-free video,  
1-1-1 Camera Features  
even with high intensity colors.  
• The TURBO GAIN button enables an instantaneous  
boost of the video gain to the maximum 48 dB.  
2
/ -inch Power HAD EX CCDs  
3
1) ATW: Auto Tracing White balance  
2) TruEye: “TruEye” is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation.  
2
The high sensitivity, low smear / -inch Power HAD EX  
3
CCDs provide high image quality which is at the top of its  
class.  
• The unit is switchable between a 16:9 aspect ratio wide  
image and 4:3 standard aspect ratio.  
• You can select an interlaced scan mode or progressive  
scan mode (30 fps (frames per second) for the DVW-  
970, 25 fps for the DVW-970P).  
• With the optional CBK-FC01 Pull Down Board  
installed, a 24 fps progressive scan video can be  
Wide range of menu settings  
The menus provide the following operations, among  
others:  
• Status display, message, and marker display settings  
• Camera adjustment settings  
• Switch function assignment  
1)  
2)  
• “Memory Stick” operations  
recorded subjected to pull-down (24P mode), providing  
imaging quality close to that of film (DVW-970 only).  
1) More precisely, 29.97 fps  
2) More precisely, 23.98 fps  
You can also assign any settings to the USER menu, to  
create customized menus.  
Features  
11  
     
1) LTC: Longitudinal Time Code  
2) VITC: Vertical Interval Time Code  
Saving and recalling settings in a “Memory  
Stick”  
Using an optional “Memory Stick” , you can save menu  
settings for particular shooting conditions, for recall as  
required.  
1)  
Audio functions  
• A slot-in UHF portable tuner WRR-855A/855B (not  
supplied) can be attached.  
• Four channels of 20-bit digital audio can be recorded, as  
well as four channels of 16-bit digital audio.  
1) “Memory Stick” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
High-functionality viewfinder  
The 2-inch monochrome viewfinder allows accurate  
focusing.  
The switch settings, automatic black balance and white  
balance items, status, warnings and so on appear on the  
viewfinder screen.  
• When an audio cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH-  
1/CH-2 connectors (XLR 3-pin), the audio signals input  
to the XLR 3-pin connectors are recorded regardless of  
the AUDIO IN switch setting. This function is called the  
XLR connection automatic detection function.  
• The AUDIO OUT connector (XLR 5-pin) allows the  
camcorder to output signals as stereo audio.  
Remote control connectors  
By connecting an optional RM-B150/B750 or similar  
remote control unit, you can control the camera settings of  
this unit externally.  
Other VTR functions  
• Recording continuity from the very next frame is  
ensured.  
• It is possible to automatically rewind and review the last  
2 seconds of the recording on the tape for a quick check  
immediately after shooting.  
• A 4-times-normal speed search function provides quick  
positioning of the tape.  
1-1-2 VTR Features  
• The camcorder searches for the most recently recorded  
cut and records the new cut over it. This function is  
called the RE-TAKE function.  
• The camcorder searches for the point most recently  
recorded on the tape and automatically switches to  
paused recording mode (REC pause). This function is  
called the End Search function.  
Digital BETACAM format  
• Use of the Digital BETACAM format provides superior  
S/N, frequency range, waveform characteristics, and  
reproducibility of details for high quality video and  
audio.  
• A long recording time of approximately 40 minutes for  
the DVW-970 and 48 minutes for the DVW-970P is  
achieved.  
1-1-3 Other Features  
Metadata for easier and more comfortable  
operation  
It is possible to record recording-start markers and good-  
shot markers on the tape while shooting, and search  
automatically for required cuts when editing.  
Proper balancing design  
A new shoulder-pad system that enables position  
adjustment in the front-to-rear direction with no need to  
use a tool ensures proper balance when using the unit.  
Time Code operations inevitable in  
broadcasting  
• LTC and VITC recording and LTC playback can be  
performed.  
• The built-in time code generator can be synchronized  
with an external generator.  
Instant operation assignable switches  
Function-assignable switches are provided on the side  
panel. Assigning the functions most useful to you, by  
selecting them on the menu pages, will create a smooth  
shooting environment.  
1)  
2)  
• A lithium battery is the back-up power supply for the  
built-in time code generator enabling the time code to be  
held for approximately 5 years without being charged  
(with the camcorder power supply).  
• The time code can be displayed in the LCD window  
screen even when the power is off. The automatic power  
shut-off function allows you to set the time when the  
time code display disappears.  
Function extension interface and optional  
boards  
• An extension connector can be attached to the battery  
attachment on the rear panel, to allow various camera  
adapters to be fitted.  
• Use of the following optional boards permits you to  
expand the functions.  
Features  
12  
   
CBK-MB01 Picture Cache Board:  
Installing the board allows the camcorder to record up to  
several seconds of the picture before the REC button is  
pressed (Picture Cache Function) and to shoot pictures at  
intervals (Interval Rec).  
CBK-FC01 Pull Down (24P) Board (for the DVW-  
970 only):  
With the board installed, a 24 fps progressive scan video  
can be recorded subjected to 2-3 pull-down.  
CBK-SD01 SDI Output Board:  
Installing the board enables SDI signal output from the  
VIDEO OUT connectors.  
Features  
13  
1-2 Example of System Configuration  
The diagram below shows a typical configuration of the  
camcorder for ENG and EFP.  
For more information about the fittings, connections, or  
use of additional equipment and accessories, see “Chapter  
7 Setting Up the Camcorder” as well as the operation  
manuals for the connected equipment.  
AC power supply  
Viewfinder-related equipment  
Product  
Model name  
AC-550/550CE  
AC-DN10  
Name / Purpose Magnification  
Part No.  
AC Adaptor  
AC Adaptor  
Fog-proof filter  
Lens assembly  
Lens assembly  
Lens assembly  
—
1-547-341-11  
A-8262-537-A  
A-8262-538-A  
A-8267-737-A  
A-8314-798-A  
–2.8 D to +2.0 D  
–3.6 D to –0.8 D  
–3.6 D to +0.4 D  
–2.4 D to +0.5 D  
Battery  
Product  
Model name  
Lens assembly  
Battery Charger  
Battery Pack  
BC-M150/M50  
(3 × magnification)  
BP-GL65/GL95/L60S  
BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket  
Wireless video/audio transmission  
Wireless Camera WLL-CA50  
Transmitter  
Extension board  
Product  
Audio input signals  
Model name  
External microphone ECM-672 or similar microphone  
CAC-12 Microphone Holder  
1)  
Pull Down (24P) Board CBK-FC01  
SDI Output Board  
CBK-SD01  
CBK-MB01  
Picture Cache Board  
Analog audio equipment  
CCXA-53 audio cable  
1) For the DVW-970 only  
WRR-860/862 UHF Portable Tuner  
WRR-855-series UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit  
Audio output  
Control signals  
XLR 5-pin connector for stereo microphone  
(service part)  
RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit  
Video output  
“Memory Stick” (see page 156)  
Video monitor for color image check during  
shooting  
Example of System Configuration  
14  
   
1-3 Precautions  
1-4 Using the CD-ROM  
Manual  
Use and Storage  
The supplied CD-ROM includes versions of the Operation  
Manual for the DVW-970/970P in English, Japanese,  
French, German, Italian, Spanish, and Chinese.  
Do not subject the unit to severe shocks  
The internal mechanism may be damaged or the body  
warped.  
After use  
Always turn off the power.  
1-4-1 CD-ROM System  
Requirements  
Before storing the unit for a long period  
The following are required to access the supplied CD-  
ROM disc.  
Remove the battery pack.  
• Computer: PC with Intel Pentium CPU  
—Installed memory: 64 MB or more  
—CD-ROM drive: ×8 or faster  
• Monitor: Monitor supporting resolution of 800 × 600 or  
higher  
Use and storage locations  
Store in a level, ventilated place. Avoid using or storing the  
unit in the following places.  
• Places subject to temperature extremes  
• Very damp places  
• Places subject to severe vibration  
• Near strong magnetic fields  
• Operating system: Microsoft Windows XP Professional  
or Windows XP Home Edition  
• In direct sunlight or close to heaters for extended periods  
When these requirements are not met, access to the CD-  
ROM disc may be slow, or not possible at all.  
To prevent electromagnetic interference from  
portable communications devices  
The use of portable telephones and other communications  
devices near this unit can result in malfunctions and  
interference with audio and video signals.  
It is recommended that the portable communications  
devices near this unit be powered off.  
1-4-2 Preparations  
One of the following programs must be installed on your  
computer in order to use the operation manuals contained  
on the CD-ROM disc.  
• Adobe Acrobat Reader Version 4.0 or higher  
• Adobe Reader Version 6.0 or higher  
Note on laser beams  
Laser beams may damage the CCDs. If you shoot a scene  
that includes a laser beam, be careful not to let the laser  
beam be directed into the lens of the camera.  
Note  
If Adobe Reader is not installed, you can download it from  
the following URL:  
Use at a high temperature  
http://www.adobe.com/  
If the unit is used at a high temperature, white flecks may  
appear on the screen.  
1-4-3 Reading the CD-ROM Manual  
To read the operation manual contained on the CD-ROM  
disc, do the following.  
1
2
Insert the CD-ROM disc in your CD-ROM drive.  
A cover page appears automatically in your browser.  
If it does not appear automatically in the browser,  
double-click the index.htm file on the CD-ROM disc.  
Select and click the operation manual that you want to  
read.  
Precautions / Using the CD-ROM Manual  
15  
         
This opens the PDF file of the operation manual.  
Note  
If you lose the CD-ROM disc or become unable to read its  
content, for example because of a hardware failure, you  
can do one of the following.  
• You can purchase a new CD-ROM disc to replace one  
that has been lost or damaged. Contact your Sony service  
representative.  
• You can purchase printed versions of the operation  
manuals (English version). Contact your Sony service  
representative.  
When ordering, be sure to specify the part number of the  
manual you want.  
Part No.  
Models covered  
3-869-913-0X  
DVW-970/970P  
• Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel  
Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and  
other countries.  
• Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other  
countries.  
• Adobe, Acrobat, and Adobe Reader are trademarks of  
Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or  
other countries.  
Using the CD-ROM Manual  
16  
Locations and Functions  
of Parts and Controls  
2
Chapter  
2-1 Power Supply  
a Battery attachment  
b DC IN connector  
c POWER switch  
d LIGHT switch  
a Battery attachment  
auto interval recording mode, the video light is  
automatically turned on immediately before recording  
starts.  
Attach a battery pack, BP-GL65, BP-GL95, or BP-L60S.  
Furthermore, by attaching an AC-DN10 AC Adaptor, you  
can operate the camcorder from AC power.  
MANUAL: You can turn the video light on or off  
manually, using its own switch.  
b DC IN connector (XLR type, 4-pin, male)  
To operate the camcorder using an AC power supply,  
connect an AC-550/550CE AC Adaptor with the DC  
output cable supplied with the adaptor.  
To use an external battery, connect its DC output cable to  
the DC IN connector.  
c POWER switch  
This switch turns the main power supply on and off.  
d LIGHT switch  
This determines how a video light connected to the LIGHT  
connector is turned on and off.  
AUTO: When the switch on the video light is in the on  
position, putting the camcorder in recording mode  
turns the video light on automatically. When using the  
Power Supply  
17  
             
2-2 Accessory Attachments  
a Shoulder strap posts  
b Light shoe  
c LIGHT connector  
d Lens mount  
e Lens locking lever  
f Lens mount cap  
g LENS connector  
i Shoulder pad  
h Tripod mount  
Lens cable clamp  
a Shoulder strap posts  
Attach the supplied shoulder strap to these posts.  
h Tripod mount  
When using the camcorder on a tripod, attach the tripod  
adaptor (optional).  
For details, see “7-7 Attaching/Detaching the Shoulder  
Strap” on page 120.  
i Shoulder pad  
You can move the shoulder pad forwards or backwards by  
raising up the shoulder pad locking lever. Do this to ensure  
the best balance when shooting with the camcorder on  
your shoulder.  
b Light shoe  
Attach an optional accessory such as a video light to this  
shoe.  
c LIGHT connector (2-pin, female)  
For details, see “7-8 Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position”  
on page 121.  
Connect the cable of an Anton Bauer Ultralight System  
attached to the light shoe. The system operates with lights  
powered by 12 V, with a maximum power consumption of  
50 W.  
d Lens mount (special bayonet mount)  
Use this for mounting the lens.  
e Lens locking lever  
After inserting the lens in the lens mount, rotate the lens  
mount ring with this lever to lock the lens in position.  
f Lens mount cap  
Remove this cap by pushing up the lens locking lever.  
When no lens is mounted, keep this cap fitted for  
protection from dust.  
g LENS connector (12-pin)  
Fit the lens cable to this connector. Contact your Sony  
representative for more information about the lens you can  
use.  
Accessory Attachments  
18  
                     
2-3 Audio Functions  
h Built-in speaker  
a Microphone  
d EARPHONE jack (rear)  
b MIC IN connector  
g ALARM volume control  
f MONITOR volume control  
c MIC LEVEL control  
e MONITOR switch and CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch  
d EARPHONE jack (front)  
Audio functions (1)  
a Microphone  
This is a super-cardioid directional monaural microphone  
with an external power supply (+48 V) system.  
MONITOR switch  
b MIC IN (microphone input) connector (XLR type,  
3-pin, female)  
Connect the supplied microphone to this connector. A  
microphone other than the supplied one may also be  
connected as long as it can operate with the power (+48 V)  
supplied from this connector.  
By fitting a 5-pin connector (service part number: A-1053-  
453-A), you can also use a stereo microphone.  
CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch  
MONITOR switch and CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch  
CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch:  
This determines the pair of audio channels selected with  
the MONITOR switch.  
CH-1/2 position: channels 1 and 2  
c MIC (microphone) LEVEL control  
This control adjusts the audio level of the microphone  
connected to the MIC IN connector.  
CH-3/4 position: channels 3 and 4  
The signals output from the AUDIO OUT connector and  
EARPHONE jacks and the audio level meter in the display  
window also depend on the setting of this switch.  
d EARPHONE jacks (minijacks)  
You can monitor the E-E sound during recording and  
playback sound during playback. Plugging an earphone  
into the jack automatically cuts off the built-in speaker.  
When an alarm is indicated, you can hear the alarm sound  
through the earphone.  
1)  
MONITOR switch:  
This selects the audio monitor channels output to the  
earphone or speaker, depending on the setting of the CH-  
1/2 / CH-3/4 switch.  
1) E-E: Abbreviation of “Electric-to-Electric.” In E-E mode, video and audio  
signals input to the camcorder are output after passing through internal  
electric circuits only. This can be used to check input signals.  
e MONITOR switch and CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch  
These switches together determine the channel selection  
for audio monitor output.  
Audio Functions  
19  
               
g ALARM volume control  
This control adjusts the speaker or earphone alarm volume.  
At the minimum position, no sound can be heard.  
CH-1/2/CH-3/4 MONITOR Audio output  
switch  
switch  
position  
position  
CH-1/2  
CH-1  
MIX  
Audio channel 1  
Mix sound of channels 1 and 2  
Audio channel 2  
CH-2  
CH-3  
MIX  
CH-3/4  
Audio channel 3  
Mix sound of channels 3 and 4  
Audio channel 4  
Minimum  
Maximum  
CH-4  
ALARM volume control  
f MONITOR volume control  
h Built-in speaker  
This control adjusts the speaker or earphone volume for  
sounds other than the alarm sound. At the minimum  
position, no sound can be heard.  
The speaker can be used to monitor E-E sound during  
recording, and playback sound during playback. The  
speaker also sounds alarms to reinforce visual warnings.  
If you connect an earphone to the EARPHONE jack, the  
speaker is automatically muted.  
See “8-3 Operation Warnings” on page 129 for  
information about alarms.  
i LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls  
j AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 switches  
CUE IN  
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
k AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4 switches  
l CUE IN switch  
m AUDIO OUT connector  
n AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors  
and LINE/MIC/+48V ON switches  
o DC OUT 12V connector  
Audio functions (2)  
i LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) (audio channel-1 and  
channel-2 recording level) controls  
These controls adjust the audio levels of channels 1 and 2  
j AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 (audio channel-1 and  
channel-2 adjustment method selection) switches  
These switches select the audio level adjustment method  
for each of audio channels 1 and 2.  
when the AUDIO SELECT switches are set to MANUAL.  
AUTO: Select this setting for automatic adjustment.  
MANUAL: Select this setting for manual adjustment.  
Audio Functions  
20  
         
k AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4 (audio input  
selection) switches  
CH-1/CH-2 switches  
These switches select the audio input signals to be  
recorded on audio channels 1 and 2.  
FRONT: The input signal source is the microphone  
connected to the MIC IN connector.  
REAR: The input signal source is the audio equipment  
connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors.  
WIRELESS: The input signal source is a WRR-855A/  
855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit (option).  
CH-3/CH-4 switches  
These switches select the audio input signals to be  
recorded on audio channels 3 and 4.  
F (front): The input signal source is the microphone  
connected to the MIC IN connector.  
R (rear): The input signal source is the audio equipment  
connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors.  
W (wireless): The input signal source is a WRR-855A/  
855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit (not supplied).  
l CUE IN (cue track input) switch  
This switch selects the input signal to be recorded on the  
cue track.  
CH-1: Signal selected by the AUDIO IN CH-1 switch  
MIX: Mixed signals selected by the AUDIO IN CH-1 and  
CH-2 switches  
CH-2: Signal selected by the AUDIO IN CH-2 switch  
m AUDIO OUT (audio output) connector (XLR type,  
5-pin, male)  
This connector outputs the audio signals recorded on audio  
channels 1 and 2 or audio channels 3 and 4.  
The MONITOR CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switches allow you to  
select the audio signal to be monitored.  
n AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 (audio channel-1 and  
channel-2 input) connectors (XLR type, 3-pin, female)  
and LINE/MIC/+48 V ON (line input/microphone  
input/external power supply +48V ON) switches  
These are audio input connectors for channels 1 and 2 to  
which you can connect audio equipment or a microphone.  
The LINE/MIC/+48V ON switches select the audio source  
of the audio input signals connected to each of these  
connectors.  
LINE: Line input audio equipment  
MIC: Microphone with an internal power supply  
+48V ON: Microphone with an external power supply  
system  
o DC OUT 12 V (DC power output) connector (4-pin,  
female)  
This connector supplies power for a WRR-860A/862A/  
862B UHF Portable Tuner (option). Do not connect any  
equipment other than the UHF portable tuner.  
Audio Functions  
21  
           
2-4 Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions  
g Viewfinder  
h Diopter adjustment ring  
a TALLY indicator  
Eyecup  
b BRIGHT control  
c CONTRAST control  
d PEAKING control  
e ZEBRA switch  
f TALLY switch  
j Viewfinder left-right positioning ring  
k Camera operator tally indicator  
i Viewfinderfront-rear  
positioning lever  
l Viewfinder stopper  
m LOCK knob  
Shooting and recording/playback functions (1)  
a TALLY indicator  
ON: The zebra pattern is displayed and stays.  
OFF: No zebra pattern is displayed.  
MOMENT: The zebra pattern is displayed and stays for 5  
to 6 seconds.  
The zebra pattern is factory set to indicate picture areas  
where the video level is approximately 70%.You can use  
the setup menu to change the setting so that areas where  
the video level is 100% and above are also displayed at the  
same time.  
Setting the TALLY switch to HIGH or LOW enables this  
indicator. The indicator lights during recording on the  
VTR. Like the REC indicator in the viewfinder, it flashes  
to indicate a problem. You can set the indicator brightness  
with the TALLY switch.  
b BRIGHT (brightness) control  
This control adjusts the picture brightness on the  
viewfinder screen. It has no effect on the camera output  
signal.  
1) The zebra pattern aids in manual iris adjustment by indicating areas of the  
picture where the video level is approximately 70% and 100% and above.  
c CONTRAST control  
This control adjusts the picture contrast on the viewfinder  
screen. It has no effect on the camera output signal.  
For information about how to change the zebra pattern  
setting in the setup menu, see “5-2-5 Setting the  
Viewfinder” on page 81.  
d PEAKING control  
f TALLY switch  
This control adjusts the sharpness of the picture on the  
viewfinder screen to make focusing easier. It has no effect  
on the camera output signal.  
This switch controls the TALLY indicator, setting its  
brightness (HIGH or LOW) or turning it off.  
HIGH: The TALLY indicator brightness is high.  
OFF: The TALLY indicator is disabled.  
LOW: The TALLY indicator brightness is low.  
e ZEBRA switch  
This switch controls the zebra pattern on the viewfinder  
1)  
screen.  
Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions  
22  
             
g Viewfinder  
j Viewfinder left-right positioning ring  
Loosen this ring to move the viewfinder sideways.  
The viewfinder lets you view the image in black and white  
while shooting, recording or playing back. It also displays  
various warnings and messages related to the settings or  
operating conditions of the camcorder, a zebra pattern,  
k Camera operator tally indicator  
This indicator lights while the camcorder is recording.  
Slide the window open when you shoot with your eye away  
from the viewfinder. This indicator flashes when the  
battery level is running low or the disc is almost full.  
1)  
2)  
safety zone marker , and center marker  
.
1) The safety zone marker is a rectangle indicating the effective picture area.  
2) The center marker indicates the center of the picture with a crosshair.  
For details, see “5-2-4 Setting the Marker Display” on  
page 81.  
l Viewfinder stopper  
Pull up this stopper to detach the viewfinder from the  
camera.  
h Diopter adjustment ring  
Use this ring to adjust the viewfinder image for your  
vision.  
m LOCK knob  
To adjust the viewfinder position in the front-rear  
direction, loosen this knob and the viewfinder front-rear  
positioning lever. After adjustment, retighten this knob and  
the viewfinder front-rear positioning lever.  
i Viewfinder front-rear positioning lever  
To adjust the viewfinder position in the front-rear  
direction, loosen this lever and the LOCK knob. After  
adjustment, retighten this lever and the LOCK knob.  
u TURBO GAIN button  
n FILTER selector  
o ASSIGN 1/2 switches  
t WHITE BAL switch  
p SHUTTER selector  
s OUTPUT/DCC selector  
q AUTO W/B BAL switch  
r GAIN selector  
Shooting and recording/playback functions (2)  
n FILTER selector  
FILTER selector (outer knob) setting CC filter selection  
Use this selector to select the most appropriate filter to  
match the light source illuminating the subject.  
When this selector is used with the display mode set to 3,  
the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for about  
3 seconds. (e.g.: ND: 1, CC: B)  
The relationships between the selector settings and filter  
selections as well as examples of filters for different  
shooting conditions are as follows:  
1)  
A
Cross filter  
B
C
D
3200K  
4300K  
6300K  
1) A type of special effect filter, which generates a cross of light on a  
highlighted portion.  
FILTER selector (inner knob) setting ND filter selection  
1
2
Clear  
1
/4 ND  
1
3
4
/16 ND  
1
/64 ND  
Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions  
23  
               
s OUTPUT/DCC (output signal/dynamic contrast  
control) selector  
This selector switches the video signal that is output to the  
VTR, viewfinder, and video monitor, between the  
following two.  
Shooting condition  
CC filter  
ND filter  
Sunrise and sunset; inside B (3200K)  
studio  
1 (clear)  
1
Clear skies  
C (4300K) or  
D (6300K)  
2 ( /4 ND) or  
1
BARS: Outputs the color bar signal.  
3 ( /16 ND)  
CAM: Outputs the video signal from the camera. When  
Cloudy or raining  
D (6300K)  
1 (clear) or  
1)  
this is selected, you can switch DCC on and off with  
1
2 ( /4 ND)  
this selector.  
1
Very bright conditions such C (4300K) or  
as snow, at high altitudes, D (6300K)  
or at the seashore  
3 ( /16 ND) or  
1) DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control)  
1
4 ( /64 ND)  
Against a very bright background with the iris opening adjusted to the  
subject, objects in the background will be lost in the glare. The DCC  
function will suppress the high intensity and restore much of the lost detail  
and is particularly effective in the following cases.  
•Shooting people in the shade on a sunny day  
o ASSIGN 1/2 switches  
You can assign the desired functions to each of the  
ASSIGN 1 switch (push button) and ASSIGN 2 switch  
(sliding) on the FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu.  
•Shooting a subject indoors, against a background through a window  
•Any high contrast scene  
For details, see “5-3-5 Assigning Functions to Assignable  
Switches” on page 90.  
BARS, DCC OFF  
A color bar signal is output and the  
DCC circuit does not operate. For  
example, use the setting for the  
following purposes.  
• Adjusting the video monitor  
• Recording the color bar signal  
p SHUTTER selector  
Set this selector to ON to use the electronic shutter. Push it  
down to SELECT to switch the shutter speed or mode  
setting within the range previously set with the setup  
menu.  
When this selector is operated, the new setting appears on  
the setting change/adjustment progress message display  
area for about 3 seconds.  
CAM, DCC OFF  
The video signal from the camera is  
output, and the DCC circuit does not  
operate.  
For details about the shutter speed and mode settings, see  
“4-2 Setting the Electronic Shutter” on page 59.  
CAM, DCC ON  
The video signal from the camera is  
output, and the DCC circuit operates.  
q AUTO W/B BAL (automatic white/black balance  
adjustment) switch  
OUTPUT/DCC selector  
This switch activates the white balance and black balance  
automatic adjustment functions.  
t WHITE BAL (white balance memory) switch  
This switch controls the white balance setting.  
PRST (preset): Adjusts the color temperature  
corresponding to the position of the FILTER selector.  
Use the PRST setting when you have no time to adjust  
the white balance.  
A or B: When the AUTO W/B BAL switch is pushed to  
WHT, the white balance is automatically adjusted  
according to the current position of the FILTER  
selector, and the adjusted value is stored in either  
memory A or memory B. (There are two memories for  
each filter, allowing a total of eight adjustments to be  
stored.) When this switch is set to A or B, the  
camcorder automatically adjusts itself to the stored  
value corresponding to the current settings of this  
switch and the FILTER selector.  
WHT: Automatic adjustment of the white balance. If the  
WHITE BAL switch is set to A or B, the white balance  
setting is stored in the corresponding memory. The  
memory stores a separate white balance setting for each  
filter setting.  
BLK: Automatic adjustment of the black set and black  
balance.  
r GAIN selector  
This selector switches the gain of the video amplifier to  
match the lighting conditions during shooting. The gains  
corresponding to the L, M, and H settings can be selected  
from the setup menu. The factory settings are L = 0 dB, M  
= 9 dB, and H = 18 dB.  
When this selector is adjusted, the new setting appears on  
the setting change/adjustment progress message display  
area of the viewfinder screen for about 3 seconds.  
You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch even when  
1)  
ATW is in use.  
1) ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance)  
The white balance of the picture being shot is adjusted automatically for  
varying lighting conditions.  
For details about setting the gain values, see “5-3-1  
Setting Gain Values for the GAIN Selector Positions” on  
page 87.  
Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions  
24  
           
B (ATW): When this switch is set to B and on the  
FUNCTION 2 page of the OPERATION menu,  
“WHITE B CH” is set to “ATW”, ATW is activated.  
u TURBO GAIN button  
When shooting under extremely poor lighting conditions,  
press the button once to boost the video gain to the value  
preset on the GAIN SW page of the USER menu (up to 48  
dB). To stop boosting the gain, press the button once more.  
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting appears on  
the setting change/adjustment progress message display  
area of the viewfinder screen for about 3 seconds.  
You can assign the ATW ON/OFF function to the ASSIGN  
1 switch (push button) on the FUNCTION 1 page of the  
USER menu.  
For details, see “5-3-5 Assigning Functions to Assignable  
Switches” on page 90.  
v VIDEO OUT connector  
w TEST OUT connector  
x REMOTE connector  
Shooting and recording/playback functions (3)  
v VIDEO OUT connector (BNC type)  
composite, and the setting returns to composite whenever  
the unit is powered on.  
Depending on menu settings, menus, time code, and shot  
data can be superimposed on the image on the monitor.  
This connector outputs a composite video signal (standard  
level, 75-ohm terminated) for a video monitor. With a  
video monitor connected to this connector, you can  
monitor the picture being shot by the camera or the picture  
played back by the VTR. To choose between the composite  
video signal output and SDI signal output, use the menu.  
When synchronizing the time code of an external VTR  
with that of the camcorder, connect this connector to the  
GENLOCK IN connector of the external VTR.  
By installing the CBK-SD01 extension board (not  
supplied), you can output an SDI signal (supporting  
embedded audio and the EDH function) from this  
connector.  
For details on how to select the test output signal, refer to  
the Maintenance Manual.  
x REMOTE connector (8-pin)  
Connect the RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit, which  
makes it possible to control the VTR and camera remotely.  
For details on how to select the output signal, see “5-3-2  
Selecting the Output Signals” on page 88.  
w TEST OUT connector (BNC type)  
This connector outputs the video signal (standard level, 75-  
ohm terminated) for a video monitor. The output signal can  
be selected from composite or RGB. The factory setting is  
Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions  
25  
       
y VTR START button  
z VTR SAVE/STBY connector  
wj EJECT button  
wk REW button and indicator  
wl F FWD button and indicator  
e; PLAY button and indicator  
ea STOP button  
Shooting and recording/playback functions (4)  
y VTR START button  
MODE page of the MAINTENANCE menu. The STBY  
OFF TIMER item also allows you to select the length of  
time until the camcorder turns to power saving mode.  
Press this button to start recording. Press it again to stop  
recording. The effect is exactly the same as that of the VTR  
button on the lens.  
When the REC SWITCH function is assigned to the  
ASSIGN 1 switch (push button), you can use the switch as  
the REC START button.  
For detailed information, see “3-5 Setting the Stand-by off  
Timer During Rec-Pause” on page 55.  
wj EJECT button  
Press this button to eject or load a cassette.  
z VTR SAVE/STBY (standby) switch  
This switch controls the VTR power mode during pauses  
in recording.  
SAVE: Power saving mode. When you press the VTR  
START button, there is a short delay before recording  
starts, but power consumption in this mode is less than  
in standby mode, so that battery life is extended. When  
the switch is set to SAVE, the SAVE indicator in the  
viewfinder lights.  
wk REW (rewind) button and indicator  
Press this button to rewind the tape. The indicator lights  
during rewinding.  
wl F FWD (fast forward) button and indicator  
Press this button to fast forward the tape. The indicator  
lights during fast forward.  
STBY: Standby mode. Recording starts as soon as you  
press the REC START button.  
e; PLAY button and indicator  
Press this button to view the recorded picture in the  
viewfinder or on the color video monitor. The indicator  
lights during playback.  
The 4 times normal speed search function is provided to  
make it far quicker to find a desired location of the tape.  
Press the REW button or F FWD button during playback  
to view the 4 times normal speed search picture.  
Notes  
• Avoid allowing the camcorder to remain in STBY  
(standby) mode for a long time.  
• Even if the switch is set to the STBY position, the  
camcorder can automatically turn to power saving mode  
if the tape does not run for a certain period. In such a  
case, the VTR SAVE indicator in the viewfinder lights.  
This function is effective when a setting other than OFF  
is selected for the STBY OFF TIMER item on the VTR  
ea STOP button  
Press this button to stop the tape.  
Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions  
26  
             
2-5 Menu Operating Section  
a “Memory Stick” compartment  
c STATUS ON/SEL / OFF switch  
d MENU ON/OFF switch  
e CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch  
Cover  
b MENU knob  
Menu operation section  
a “Memory Stick” compartment  
b MENU knob  
Use this knob to change the page selection or a setting  
within the menu.  
Press: If you press this knob when the arrow (b) is placed  
at the page title on the menu, the arrow changes to a  
question mark (?) and you can change the page by  
turning this knob.  
When the arrow mark is placed at a position other than  
the page title, you can change the setting of the current  
item by pressing and turning this knob.  
Turn: Turn this knob to change the page or change item  
settings.  
ACCESS indicator  
MEMORY STICK OPEN button  
c STATUS ON/SEL / OFF (menu display on/page  
selection/display off) switch  
To enable this switch, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to  
f
OFF.  
Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF.  
ON/SEL: Each time this switch is pushed upward, a  
window to confirm the menu settings and status of the  
camcorder appears on the viewfinder screen. The  
window consists of three pages, which are switched  
each time the switch is pushed upward. Each page is  
displayed for about 10 seconds.  
“Memory Stick”  
Eject button  
OFF: To clear the page immediately after display, push  
this switch down to the OFF position.  
You can select the pages to be displayed on the menu.  
Open the cover of the “Memory Stick” compartment by  
pressing the MEMORY STICK OPEN button and insert  
the “Memory Stick.”  
For details, see “5-2-8 Displaying the Status Confirmation  
Windows” on page 84.  
To remove, press the eject button.  
During data writing/loading to/from the “Memory Stick,”  
the ACCESS indicator lights or flashes.  
d MENU ON/OFF switch  
To use this switch, open the cover.  
For details, see “6-1-1 Handling the “Memory Stick”” on  
page 100.  
Menu Operating Section  
27  
               
This switch is used to display the menu on the viewfinder  
screen or the test signal screen.  
Closing the cover automatically sets this switch to OFF.  
ON: Displays the menu on the viewfinder screen or the test  
signal screen, at the last accessed page. When the menu  
is used for the first time, the first page is displayed.  
OFF: Removes the menu from the viewfinder screen or the  
test signal screen.  
e CANCEL/PRST (preset) / ESCAPE switch  
To enable this switch, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to  
ON.  
Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF.  
CANCEL/PRST: Pushing this switch up to this position  
displays the message to confirm whether the previous  
settings are cancelled or settings are reset to their initial  
values, depending on the menu operating condition.  
Pushing this switch up to this position again cancels the  
previous settings or resets the settings to their initial  
values.  
ESCAPE: Use this switch when the menu page, which has  
a hierarchical structure, is opened. Each time the switch  
is pushed to this position, the page returns to one stage  
higher in the hierarchy.  
Menu Operating Section  
28  
 
2-6 Time Code System  
a GENLOCK IN connector  
b TC IN connector  
c TC OUT connector  
Time code functions (1)  
a GENLOCK IN connector (BNC type)  
• This connector accepts a reference signal when the  
camera is to be genlocked or when the time code is to be  
synchronized with external equipment. Use the items GL  
H PHASE, GL SC PHASE and GL SC 0/180 SEL on the  
GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu to  
adjust the genlock H-phase (phase of horizontal sync  
signal) and the sub-carrier phase.  
• This connector also accepts a return video signal.  
You can display the return video signal in the viewfinder  
screen while holding the RET button down with  
“RETURN VIDEO” set to “ON” on the GENLOCK  
page of the OPERATION menu.  
b TC IN (time code input) connector (BNC type)  
To synchronize the time code of this unit to an external  
time code, input the reference time code to this connector.  
c TC OUT (time code output) connector (BNC type)  
To synchronize the time code of an external VTR to that of  
the camcorder, connect this connector to the reference time  
code input connector of the external VTR.  
Time Code System  
29  
       
d HOLD button  
e RESET button  
f DISPLAY switch  
g ADVANCE button  
h SHIFT button  
i PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch  
j F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch  
CUE IN  
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
k DATA DISPLAY switch  
Time code functions (2)  
d HOLD (display hold) button  
PRESET: Records time code with a preset initial value.  
Pressing this button instantly freezes the time data  
displayed in the counter display section. (The time code  
generator continues running.) Pressing this button again  
releases the hold. You can use this button, for example, to  
determine the exact time of a particular shot.  
REGEN: Records time code continuous with the existing  
time code recorded on the tape. Regardless of the  
setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch, the  
camcorder operates in R-RUN mode.  
CLOCK: Records time code synchronized to the internal  
clock. Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-  
RUN switch, the camcorder operates in F-RUN mode.  
When the HOLD button is activated, the time data is  
displayed in the following format:  
For more information, see “To make the time code  
consecutive” on page 67.  
For details of the counter display, see “2-8 Warnings and  
Indications on the Display Panel” on page 32.  
j F-RUN/SET/R-RUN (free run/set/recording run)  
switch  
This switch selects the operating mode for the internal time  
code generator.  
e RESET button  
Pressing this button resets the time data displayed on the  
counter display section to “00:00:00:00” or the user bit  
data to “00000000.”  
F-RUN: Time code keeps advancing, regardless of the  
operating state of the VTR. Use this setting when  
aligning the time code with real time or when  
synchronizing the time code with an external time  
code.  
f DISPLAY (LCD display) switch  
CTL: Control signal  
SET: Set the switch to this position to set the time code or  
user bits.  
TC: Time code  
DATA: The item selected by the DATA DISPLAY switch.  
R-RUN: The time code value advances only during  
recording. Use this setting to have a consecutive time  
code on the tape.  
For details, see “Time code display” on page 33.  
g ADVANCE button  
For setting the time code, user bits, or real time, each press  
of this button increments the flashing digit selected by the  
SHIFT button.  
For details, see “4-5-1 Setting the Time Code” on page 67  
and “4-5-3 Setting the User Bits” on page 68.  
k DATA DISPLAY switch  
U-BIT: To display the user bit value  
SHOT-TIME: To display the date and time from the shot  
data  
h SHIFT button  
For setting the time code, user bits, or real time, this button  
selects the digit to be changed. The selected digit flashes.  
SHOT-NO: Not used  
i PRESET/REGEN (regeneration)/CLOCK switch  
This switch selects whether to set a new time code or to  
follow the already recorded time code.  
Time Code System  
30  
               
2-7 Warnings and Indications  
Besides the viewfinder, speaker and earphones, the  
indicators and displays described in this section also  
provide you with information such as the operating state of  
the camcorder and warnings.  
a TALLY indicator  
b DISPLAY switch  
c TALLY switch  
d BACK TALLY indicator  
e BACK TALLY switch  
f LIGHT switch  
g WARNING indicator  
h Display panel  
i REAR TALLY indicator  
Warning and indication functions  
a TALLY indicator  
c TALLY switch  
Setting the TALLY switch on the viewfinder to HIGH or  
LOW enables this indicator. It lights when the VTR starts  
recording. Like the REC indicator in the viewfinder, it also  
flashes to provide warnings. The brightness of this  
indicator when it is lit can be switched with the TALLY  
switch.  
This switch controls the TALLY indicator as follows:  
HIGH: The TALLY indicator brightness is high.  
OFF: The TALLY indicator is disabled.  
LOW: The TALLY indicator brightness is low.  
d BACK TALLY indicator  
When the BACK TALLY switch is set to ON, this indicator  
b DISPLAY switch  
has the same function as the TALLY indicator.  
This switches the indications on the viewfinder screen on  
or off.  
ON: The indications appear on the viewfinder screen.  
OFF: The indications do not appear on the viewfinder  
screen.  
e BACK TALLY switch  
This switch enables or disables the BACK TALLY and  
REAR TALLY indicators.  
ON: The BACK TALLY and REAR TALLY indicators are  
enabled.  
Note  
OFF: The BACK TALLY and REAR TALLY indicators  
are disabled.  
Setting the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON displays the  
menu on the viewfinder screen even if the DISPLAY  
switch is set to OFF.  
f LIGHT switch  
This switch turns on/off the display panel light.  
Warnings and Indications  
31  
             
g WARNING indicator  
This indicator lights up or flashes when there is a fault in  
the VTR.  
2-8 Warnings and  
Indicationsonthe Display  
Panel  
For details, see “8-3 Operation Warnings” on page 129.  
h Display panel  
This displays VTR-related warnings, battery status, tape  
status, audio levels, time data, and so on.  
Tape status, battery status and audio level  
For details, see “2-8 Warnings and Indications on the  
Display Panel” on page 32.  
Audio channel level meter:  
When the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch is set  
to CH-1/2, the audio channel level 1 is  
displayed.  
When the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch is set  
to CH-3/4, the audio channel level 3 is  
displayed.  
i REAR TALLY indicator  
When the BACK TALLY switch is set to ON, this indicator  
has the same function as the TALLY indicator.  
Audio channel level meter:  
When the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4  
switch is set to CH-1/2, the  
audio channel level 2 is  
displayed.  
When the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4  
switch is set to CH-3/4, the  
audio channel level 4 is  
displayed.  
Battery status indicator  
Fully charged  
Nearly dead: “BATT” flashes.  
Dead battery (battery must be charged):  
“BATT” and “E” flash.  
Tape status indicator  
Full (at beginning)  
Close to end: “TAPE” flashes.  
End (tape must be replaced): “TAPE”  
and “E” flash.  
Tape status, battery status, and level indicators  
Warnings and Indications on the Display Panel  
32  
             
Relationships between the DISPLAY switch and  
DATA DISPLAY switch settings and the time  
counter displays  
VTR operation status and status indicators  
Except during setting of the time code, the time counter  
display is determined by the position of the DISPLAY  
switch and DATA DISPLAY switch.  
Lights during playback  
For details of setting the time code menu operation, see “4-  
5-1 Setting the Time Code” on page 67.  
Switch settings related to time code and displayed  
information  
Warning indication  
RF: Lights if the recording heads are clogged.  
SERVO: Lights if the servo motor fails.  
HUMID: Lights if condensation is on the drum.  
SLACK: Lights if the tape is not winding properly.  
DISPLAY  
DATA DISPLAY Displayed information  
switch position switch position  
CTL  
TC  
Any position  
Any position  
U-BIT  
CTL  
For details, see “8-3 Operation Warnings” on page 129.  
Time code  
User bits  
DATA  
VTR operation and status indicators  
SHOT-TIME  
Data and time from shot  
data  
Time code display  
SHOT-NO  
Not used (currently zero  
is displayed.)  
Lights in playback mode.  
Lights when VITC is selected for the time code.  
Lights in non-drop frame mode. (DVW-970 only)  
Lights when the camcorder is synchronized  
with an external time code.  
Lights when the time code generator  
is on hold.  
Lights when the time code, CTL or  
real time is displayed.  
1)  
Lights when the HOLD button is pressed.  
Time counter display: Shows the time code,  
CTL, user bit data, and real time.  
1) When the HOLD button is pressed to hold the time code value,  
the time code is displayed in the format shown below. When the  
HOLD button is pressed again to release the hold, the time code  
is displayed in the normal format.  
Time code display  
Warnings and Indications on the Display Panel  
33  
     
• The FILTER selector is set to other than ND:1/CC:B.  
• The reference value of auto iris override is not the  
standard value.  
2-9 Indicators in the  
Viewfinder  
e Spare indicator  
This is a spare indicator. Setting the REC TALLY item to  
“BOTH” on the FUNCTION 3 page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu makes it possible to use this as a  
REC indicator.  
Several indicators are provided above and below the  
viewfinder screen to indicate the current state and  
adjustments of the camera.  
f SAVE indicator  
This indicator lights when the VTR SAVE/STBY switch is  
set to SAVE, putting the VTR into power save mode.  
a TALLY indicator  
b REC indicator  
c BATT indicator  
Viewfinder screen  
d
indicator  
e Spare indicator  
f SAVE indicator  
Indicators on the viewfinder  
a TALLY (green tally) indicator  
This indicator lights when the camcorder is in Picture  
Cache mode. Also, this indicator lights when a green tally  
signal is received from the camera control unit.  
It flashes in Interval Rec mode.  
b REC (recording, red tally) indicator  
This indicator lights red when recording starts and remains  
lit during recording. It also lights when a red tally signal is  
received from the camera control unit and flashes to give a  
warning.  
For details, see “8-3 Operation Warnings” on page 129.  
c BATT (battery) indicator  
This indicator starts flashing when the battery connected to  
the camcorder is nearly exhausted, and stays lit when the  
battery is completely exhausted.  
The battery power level at which the indicator starts  
flashing can be set on the BATTERY page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu.  
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
d
(warning) indicator  
This indicator lights when any of the following conditions  
occurs with the corresponding item set to ON on the “!”  
LED page of the USER menu.  
• The gain is set to other than 0 dB.  
• The SHUTTER selector is set to ON.  
• The WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST.  
• ATW is enabled.  
• The lens extender is used.  
Indicators in the Viewfinder  
34  
               
3
Recording and Playback  
Chapter  
3-1 About Cassette  
Cassette  
compartment lid  
This section describes the procedure for loading and  
unloading a cassette.  
See Specifications “VTR Section” on page 132 for  
information about the cassettes you can use in the  
camcorder.  
3-1-1 Loading and Unloading a  
Cassette  
3
Check that there is no slack in the tape. Then slide in  
the cassette until it clicks into position and close the  
cassette lid completely by pressing near the engraved  
PUSH.  
Loading a cassette  
Insert the cassette.  
1
Turn on the POWER switch.  
Window outwards  
Cassette  
holder  
Push and close the lid.  
POWER switch  
HUMID indicator  
Notes  
• To insert the tape correctly, make sure to stand the grip  
of the camcorder.  
• When inserting the tape, be careful that you don’t hit the  
tape against the tape holder.  
Note  
If the interior of the VTR section is damp, the HUMID  
indicator will light. If this happens, wait until the  
indicator goes off before going on to step 2.  
2
Press the EJECT button.  
The cassette compartment lid will open.  
About Cassette  
35  
         
Checking the tape for slack  
Pressing in the reels lightly, turn them gently with your  
fingers in the directions shown below. If the reels will not  
move, there is no slack.  
3-1-2 Preventing Accidental Erasure  
The following procedure prevents cassettes from being  
recorded inadvertently.  
Push the plug in.  
To reuse the cassette,  
return the plug to its  
original position.  
Checking the tape for slack  
Preventing accidental erasure  
Unloading a cassette  
With the power supply on, press the EJECT button to open  
the cassette compartment lid. Then take out the cassette. If  
you are not going to insert another cassette, close the  
cassette lid.  
It is possible to take out the cassette and close the cassette  
compartment lid unless the battery voltage drops below  
about 10.5 V. Do not repeat this unloading operation.  
Unloading a cassette manually  
If the battery voltage drops below about 10.5 V, take out  
the cassette manually as illustrated below.  
Cassette  
compartment lid  
1Turn the power off.  
2Open this rubber cover.  
3Pushing on the screw  
inside with a screwdriver,  
turn the screw clockwise  
until the cassette lid  
opens.  
Unloading a cassette manually  
You need not return the screw to its original position after  
taking out the cassette. Although the cassette compartment  
lid is not locked, turning on the power makes the cassette  
lid operable again.  
About Cassette  
36  
     
From adjusting the black balance and  
white balance to stopping recording  
After turning on the power and loading a cassette, set the  
switches and selectors as shown below and begin  
operation.  
3-2 Recording  
3-2-1 Basic Procedures  
AUDIO SELECT  
CH-1/CH-2: AUTO  
This section describes the basic procedures for shooting  
and recording.  
DISPLAY: ON  
Before a shooting session, ensure that the camcorder is  
functioning properly.  
Iris: AUTO  
For details, see “8-1 Testing the Camcorder Before  
Shooting” on page 124.  
Zoom: AUTO  
From turning on the camcorder to loading  
a cassette  
Proceed as follows:  
OUTPUT/DCC: CAM, DCC ON  
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN:  
F-RUN or R-RUN  
(set as needed)  
Switch and selector settings before shooting  
3
4
1
Shooting  
Proceed as follows:  
2
2
1,2  
2
3,5  
Basic procedure for shooting: from power supply  
to cassette loading  
1
2
Attach a fully charged battery pack.  
For details, see “7-1 Power Supply” on page 110.  
4
5,6  
Set the POWER switch to ON. Check that the HUMID  
indicator does not appear and that the battery power  
level is sufficient.  
Basic procedure for shooting: from adjusting the black  
balance and white balance to stopping recording  
If HUMID indicator appears, wait until it disappears.  
1
2
Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to BLK to adjust the  
black balance.  
Note  
After turning off the power, check whether the drum is  
dry (even if the HUMID indicator is off) when the  
turning on the power again.  
For details of black balance adjustment, see “4-1-1  
Adjusting the Black Balance” on page 56.  
Select the CC filter and ND filter to match the lighting  
conditions, and adjust the white balance.  
3
4
Check that there are no obstructions near the cassette  
lid. Then press the EJECT button to open the cassette  
lid.  
When the white balance settings are already in  
memory  
Set the WHITE BAL switch to A or B.  
After checking the points below, load the cassette and  
close the cassette lid.  
When the white balance setting is not in memory  
and you do not have enough time to adjust the white  
balance  
• The cassette is not write-protected.  
• There is no slack in the tape.  
Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.  
Recording  
37  
   
This automatically adjusts the white balance as  
follows, depending on the setting of the FILTER knob.  
3-2-2 Continuous Recording  
B: 3200K  
C: 4300K  
D: 6300K  
If the camcorder is in the recording pause mode, simply  
pressing the VTR START button on the camcorder or the  
VTR button on the lens continues recording exactly from  
the next frame.  
In other cases, you first need to position the tape at an  
appropriate point.  
For details, see “4-1-2 Adjusting the White Balance”  
on page 57.  
3
4
Aim the camera at the subject and adjust the focus and  
zoom.  
When the camcorder is in Recording  
Pause mode  
Pressing the VTR START button on the camcorder or the  
VTR button on the lens continues recording at exactly the  
next frame. However, the time taken before recording  
starts depends on the setting of the VTR SAVE/STBY  
switch.  
• If the VTR SAVE/STBY switch is in the SAVE position,  
it takes about 4 seconds before recording starts.  
• If the VTR SAVE/STBY switch is in the STBY position,  
recording starts immediately. However, just after the  
switch position is changed from SAVE to STBY, it takes  
about 4 seconds before recording starts.  
If necessary, set the electronic shutter for an  
appropriate mode and speed.  
For details, see “4-2 Setting the Electronic Shutter” on  
page 59.  
5
To start recording, press the VTR START button or the  
VTR button on the lens.  
If the recording start/stop function is assigned to the  
ASSIGN 1 switch, this switch functions as VTR  
START button.  
For details, see “5-3-5 Assigning Functions to  
Assignable Switches” on page 90.  
If you turn off the power during a recording  
pause  
During recording, the REC indicator lights in the  
viewfinder. Perform zooming and focus control, if  
necessary.  
2
6
To stop recording, press the VTR START button or the  
VTR button on the lens again.  
The REC indicator in the viewfinder goes off.  
Cassette control buttons  
During recording, the cassette control buttons (EJECT,  
REW, F FWD, PLAY, STOP) have no effect.  
1
3
Note  
Continuous recording after turning off the power  
during a recording pause  
When crash-recording without doing continuous recording  
on a recorded tape, or when recording with the RE-TAKE  
function, the timecode recorded previously may be  
displayed for a few seconds when playing back the first  
part of the cut.  
1
2
Turn on the power again.  
Press the RET button on the lens.  
If an analog composite signal is input to the  
GENLOCK IN connector, make sure that RETURN  
VIDEO is set to OFF on the GENLOCK page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu.  
The camcorder positions the tape at the appropriate  
point. Note, however, that this function works only for  
continuously recorded material or consecutively  
joined segments totaling at least 3 seconds in length.  
3
Press the VTR START button on the camcorder or the  
VTR button on the lens to start recording.  
Recording  
38  
   
Continuous recording in other cases  
Note  
After rewinding or fast forward, after removing the  
cassette, or on a tape that has been partially recorded, you  
can obtain a continuous recording by following the  
procedure below.  
The End Search function also allows you to continue  
recording on the partially recorded tape.  
For good shot marks (shot mark 1 and shot mark 2) and  
recording start mark among available essence marks, you  
can select recording in the LTC-UBIT area and/or  
recording in the system area as required to maintain  
compatibility with conventional systems.  
For details, see “3-2-7 Searching for the Last Recorded  
Portion and Turning in Recording Pause Mode (End  
Search Function)” on page 52.  
Settings for recording essence marks to  
the system area  
Settings on the ESSENCE MARK and ESSENCE  
MARK2 pages of the MAINTENANCE menu determine  
which essence marks are to be recorded on the system area  
of tape.  
1,2  
3
Follow the procedures below:  
4
Continuous recording after rewinding or fast forward,  
after removing the cassette,  
or on a tape that has been partly recorded  
1
2
Looking in the viewfinder, press the PLAY button to  
start playback.  
Press the STOP button at the desired point to begin  
recording. To continue from the end of recording  
already on the tape, press the STOP button  
immediately after the end of the previous recording  
(within 0.5 seconds).  
Cover  
MENU knob  
MENU ON/OFF switch  
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON while pushing  
the MENU knob.  
3
4
Press the RET button.  
The tape will rewind and will be positioned at the  
desired point to continue recording.  
The TOP menu appears.  
Press the VTR START button on the camcorder or the  
VTR button on the lens to start recording.  
3-2-3 Recording Essence Marks  
Various essence marks, such as shot marks, can be  
recorded on tape. Recording essence marks for scenes  
containing important images and sounds enables quick  
access to the marked points. This increases editing  
efficiency.  
There are essence marks that are automatically recorded by  
starting recording or firing the flash and those you can  
manually record when necessary.  
2
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
MAINTENANCE.  
Push the MENU knob.  
When the MAINTENANCE menu is first used, the  
CONTENTS page appears.  
Or if you have used the MAINTENANCE menu  
already, the page that was on the screen when the last  
menu operation ended appears.  
Recording  
39  
         
4
When the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the  
MENU knob to move the b mark to ESSENCE  
MARK then push the MENU knob.  
For details on the display setting, see “5-2 Status  
Display on the Viewfinder Screen” (page 77).  
5
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item  
When any page of the MAINTENANCE menu is  
displayed, turn the MENU knob until the ESSENCE  
MARK or ESSENCE MARK2 page appears, then  
push the MENU knob.  
to be set.  
M10 ESSENCE MARK  
LTC UB-MARKER  
REC START MARK  
SHOTMARK 1  
:
:
:
:
SET  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
SHOTMARK 2  
ESSENCE MARK page  
SHOT TIME DISP  
:
MD:HM  
?M10 ESSENCE MARK  
LTC UB-MARKER  
REC START MARK  
SHOTMARK 1  
:
:
:
:
SET  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
SHOTMARK 2  
6
7
Push the MENU knob.  
SHOT TIME DISP  
:
MD:HM  
The b mark to the left of the item changes to the z  
mark, and the z mark to the left of the setting changes  
to the ? mark.  
ESSENCE MARK2 page  
?M11 ESSENCE MARK2  
Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counter clockwise  
until the desired setting appears.  
To record the mark on tape, select ON.  
To not record the mark, select OFF.  
OVER AUDIO LIMIT:  
GAIN CHG MARK  
FILTER CHG MARK :  
SHUTTER CHG MARK:  
WHITE CHG MARK  
FLASH MARK  
FLASH MARK LEVEL:  
ON  
:
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
10  
:
:
E.MARK SD LINE  
:
17  
Note  
Whether or not to record good shot marks (shot mark  
1 and shot mark 2) and recording start mark in the  
system area is determined by the ON/OFF settings of  
the corresponding items regardless of the LTC UB-  
MARKER setting on the ESSENCE MARK page.  
The following items on these pages are for setting the  
corresponding essence marks:  
Mark  
Condition  
REC START MARK To be recorded when recording  
starts.  
8
9
Push the MENU knob.  
SHOT MARK 1/2  
To be recorded when the RET  
button on the lens is manually  
operated.  
Perform settings for the remaining marks, repeating  
steps 5 to 8.  
OVER AUDIO  
LIMIT  
To be recorded when the audio  
level exceeds 0 dBFS.  
10When you set FLASH MARK to ON, select the  
threshold value (1 to 20) of the luminance level change  
for recording the mark.  
GAIN CHG MARK To be recorded when the gain  
value changes.  
FILTER CHG  
MARK  
To be recorded when the filter is  
changed.  
11Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF to end the  
SHUTTER CHG  
MARK  
To be recorded when the shutter  
speed changes.  
menu operation.  
WHITE CHG  
MARK  
To be recorded when the white  
balance changes.  
Settings for recording good shot marks  
and recording start mark to the LTC-UBIT  
area  
Good shot marks (shot mark 1 and shot mark 2) and  
recording start mark can also be recorded to the LTC-UBIT  
area of tape.  
FLASH MARK  
To be recorded when the  
luminance suddenly changes,  
such as when the flash is  
exposed or the unit is moved  
indoors from outdoors.  
You can check whether any of the essence marks that  
are automatically recorded (OVER AUDIO LIMIT,  
GAIN CHG MARK, FILTER CHG MARK,  
SHUTTER CHG MARK, WHITE CHG MARK,  
FLASH MARK) has been recorded, by setting the  
display for recorded essence marks ON.  
Follow the procedures below:  
Recording  
40  
   
5
Turn the MENU knob to move the bmark to LTC UB-  
MARKER.  
M10 ESSENCE MARK  
LTC UB-MARKER  
REC START MARK  
SHOTMARK 1  
:
:
:
:
SET  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
SHOTMARK 2  
SHOT TIME DISP  
:
MD:HM  
6
7
Push the MENU knob.  
The b mark to the left of LTC UB-MARKER changes  
to the z mark, and the z mark to the left of the setting  
changes to the ? mark.  
Cover  
MENU knob  
MENU ON/OFF switch  
Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise  
until the desired setting appears.  
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON while pushing  
the MENU knob.  
The setting changes in the order of SET y ALL y  
OFF.  
The TOP menu appears.  
M10 ESSENCE MARK  
LTC UB-MARKER  
REC START MARK  
SHOTMARK 1  
:?  
:
:
SET  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
SHOTMARK 2  
:
SHOT TIME DISP  
:
MD:HM  
Item  
Contents  
SET  
Determines whether to record REC  
START MARK, SHOT MARK 1, and  
SHOT MARK 2 in accordance with the  
ON/OFF setting fot that item.  
2
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
MAINTENANCE.  
Push the MENU knob.  
ALL  
Records all of REC START MARK, SHOT  
MARK 1, and SHOT MARK 2.  
When the MAINTENANCE menu is first used, the  
CONTENTS page appears.  
OFF  
Does not record any marks.  
Or if you have used the MAINTENANCE menu  
already, the page that was on the screen when the last  
menu operation ended appears.  
If you select SET, go to step 8.  
If you select ALL or OFF, go to step 9.  
4
When the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the  
MENU knob to move the b mark to ESSENCE  
MARK then push the MENU knob.  
8
9
Set the mark(s) to be recorded to ON.  
1 Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the  
mark to be set.  
When any page of the MAINTENANCE menu is  
displayed, turn the MENU knob until the ESSENCE  
MARK page appears, then push the MENU knob.  
2 Turn the MENU knob clockwise or  
counterclockwise until the desired setting appears.  
To record the mark on the tape, select ON.  
To not record the mark, select OFF.  
ESSENCE MARK page  
?M10 ESSENCE MARK  
3 Perform settings for the remaining marks,  
LTC UB-MARKER  
REC START MARK  
SHOTMARK 1  
:
:
:
:
SET  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
repeating steps 1 and 2.  
SHOTMARK 2  
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF to end the  
menu operation.  
SHOT TIME DISP  
:
MD:HM  
Recording  
41  
 
Shot mark recording  
Setting the Picture Cache time/Picture  
Cache mode  
To record in Picture Cache mode, you need to turn on  
Picture Cache mode and set the picture data storage time  
(Picture Cache time) using the USER menu.  
The Picture Cache time and VTR SAVE/STBY switch  
settings determine the number of seconds of picture data  
that will be stored in memory and recorded when you press  
the VTR START button or VTR button on the lens.  
The following table shows the approximate number of  
seconds worth of picture data (counting back from the time  
you begin recording) that will be recorded from memory.  
However, when changing from SAVE to STBY, or under  
the special situations explained in the notes on this page,  
the actual amount of data recorded may be shorter.  
When SHOT MARK 1 and SHOT MARK 2 are set to ON  
on the ESSENCE MARK page, good shot marks (shot  
mark 1 and shot mark 2) are recorded when you press the  
RET button of the lens. (If LTC UP-MARKER is set to  
OFF, the marks are recorded only in the system area. If  
LTC UP-MARKER is set to ALL, the marks are recorded  
in the LTC UBIT area even when SHOT MARK 1 and  
SHOT MARK 2 are set to OFF.)  
To record a shot mark 1: Press the RET button on the lens  
once.  
On the viewfinder screen, z and the time code of the  
marked point are displayed for about 3 seconds.  
To record a shot mark 2: Press the RET button on the lens  
twice.  
Picture Cache time setting and recording start point  
On the viewfinder screen, X and the time code of the  
marked point are displayed for about 3 seconds.  
Picture Cache  
time  
Recording start point  
VTR STBY mode VTR SAVE mode  
For detailed information on shot mark operations, refer to  
the manual supplied with your VTR.  
8 (seconds)  
6 (seconds)  
5 (seconds)  
4 (seconds)  
3 (seconds)  
2 (seconds)  
1 (seconds)  
0 (seconds)  
About 8 seconds About 4 seconds  
before  
About 6 seconds About 4 seconds  
before before  
About 5 seconds About 4 seconds  
before before  
About 4 seconds About 4 seconds  
before before  
About 3 seconds About 3 seconds  
before before  
About 2 seconds About 2 seconds  
before before  
About 1 seconds About 1 seconds  
before before  
About 0 seconds About 0 seconds  
before before  
before  
Note  
When you perform the setting to confirm the image of the  
return video signal in the viewfinder (see page 86), shot  
mark 1 and shot mark 2 cannot be recorded by operating  
the RET button of the lens.  
Recording start mark recording  
When REC START MARK set to ON on the ESSENCE  
MARK page, a recording start mark is recorded at the  
beginning of recording. (If LTC UP-MARKER is set to  
OFF, the mark is recorded only in the system area. If LTC  
UP-MARKER is set to ALL, the mark is recorded in the  
LTC UBIT area even when REC START MARK is set to  
OFF.)  
Notes  
For detailed information on recording start mark  
operations, refer to the manual supplied with your VTR.  
• After selecting the Picture Cache mode, immediately  
changing the Picture Cache time or performing playback  
or recording review, the picture data stored in memory  
before this operation are made to be unrecordable. This  
means that when you press the VTR START button or  
VTR button on the lens, the previously stored picture  
data will not be recorded.  
• During playback or recording review, the picture data is  
not stored in the MSDW-903s memory. Picture data  
corresponding to the duration of playback or recording  
review will not be in memory and will not be recorded to  
tape.  
3-2-4 Starting a Shoot with a Few  
Seconds of Pre-Stored Picture Data  
(Picture Cache Function: with CBK-  
MB01)  
By installing the optional CBK-MB01 extension board in  
the camcorder, the camcorder is able to constantly store a  
few seconds (up to 8 seconds) worth of the most current  
picture and sound data in the boards memory.  
Thus, when you press the VTR START button or the VTR  
button on the lens, the recording starts with the data stored  
a few seconds before.  
Setting procedure  
To turn Picture Cache mode on, proceed as follows:  
Recording  
42  
             
U03 FUNCTION1  
TURBO SW  
TURBO  
CACHE/INTVAL REC  
6
Turn the MENU knob until “CACHE” appears.  
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes in  
the following sequence: OFF y CACHE y A. INT  
y M. INT.  
When “CACHE” appears, the camcorder is in Picture  
Cache mode, where picture, sound, and time code are  
constantly saved in memory. The TALLY indicator  
(green) in the viewfinder is on while picture data is  
being stored in memory.  
Cover  
MENU knob  
MENU ON/OFF switch  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
U03 FUNCTION1  
The last accessed menu page appears on the  
viewfinder screen.  
TURBO SW  
TURBO  
CACHE  
CACHE/INTVAL REC  
CACHE REC TIME  
Turn the MENU knob until the FUNCTION 1 page  
appears.  
When the question mark  
appears at the left corner of  
the title page, you can  
switch the pages.  
Turn the MENU knob  
clockwise or  
counterclockwise to display  
the desired page. The DF/  
NDF item on the  
FUNCTION 1 page appears  
only for the DVW-970.  
U03 FUNCTION1  
7
8
Press the MENU knob.  
The z mark on the left of “CACHE/INTVAL REC”  
changes to a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the  
setting changes to a z mark. In this case, you can  
select another item.  
TURBO SW  
TURBO  
CACHE/INTVAL REC  
Turn the MENU knob to move the bmark to “CACHE  
REC TIME.”  
U03 FUNCTION1  
3
4
Press the MENU knob.  
A b mark appears on the left of the currently selected  
TURBO SW  
TURBO  
CACHE  
item and a z mark appears on the left of the setting.  
CACHE/INTVAL REC  
CACHE REC TIME  
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
“CACHE/INTVAL REC.”  
U03 FUNCTION1  
9
Press the MENU knob.  
The b mark on the left of “CACHE REC TIME”  
changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the  
setting changes to a ? mark.  
TURBO SW  
TURBO  
CACHE/INTVAL REC  
10Turn the MENU knob until the desired Picture Cache  
time appears.  
5
Press the MENU knob.  
As you turn the MENU knob, the Picture Cache time  
changes in the following sequence: 0SEC y 1SEC  
y 2SEC y 3SEC y 4SEC y 5SECy  
6SECy 8SEC.  
The b mark on the left of “CACHE/INTVAL REC”  
changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the  
setting changes to a ? mark.  
Recording  
43  
11Press the MENU knob.  
stop the recording by pressing the VTR START button or  
the VTR button on the lens.  
The z mark on the left of “CACHE REC TIME”  
changes to a b mark and the ? mark changes to a z  
mark.  
When power is lost during recording  
• When the power is turned off during recording, the  
camera will switch off by itself after the tape has run for  
a few seconds.  
12To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF.  
• If you remove the battery, pull out the DC cable, or cut  
power to the AC adaptor during recording, actual  
recording of picture data ends the instant the tape is  
stopped. However, a certain amount of recorded picture  
data, equal to that recorded during the Picture Cache  
time, will be lost, because it has not yet been recorded on  
the tape before the tape stops. For this reason, make sure  
you do not change the battery while recording.  
The menu disappears, and the display indicating the  
current status of the camcorder appears along the top  
and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
Settings made in Picture Cache mode are maintained until  
changed.  
You can turn Picture Cache mode on and off by assigning  
the Picture Cache ON/OFF function to one of the  
assignable switches (ASSIGN 1/2 and TURBO GAIN),  
and pressing the switch.  
When the tape runs out during recording  
Please note that if the tape runs out and the camcorder  
stops during recording, a certain amount of recorded  
picture data, equal to that recorded during the Picture  
Cache time, will be lost, because it has not yet been  
recorded on the tape.  
For detailed information on the assignable switches, see  
“5-3-5 Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches” on  
page 90.  
Camcorder operations in Picture Cache mode  
The recording procedure in Picture Cache time is basically  
the same as that for normal recording. However, note the  
following differences.  
• When you record in Picture Cache mode, the picture you  
shoot is recorded to tape after the Picture Cache time  
elapses. For this reason, the tape does not stop  
3-2-5 Shooting Picture at Intervals  
(Interval Rec Function: with CBK-  
MB01)  
Inserting an optional CBK-MB01 extension board in the  
camcorder enables the camcorder to record pictures at  
various intervals. There are two kinds of Interval Rec  
mode:  
immediately when you press the VTR START button.  
After the VTR START button is pressed, all tape  
operation buttons (EJECT, REW, F FWD, PLAY, and  
STOP) stop functioning until the Picture Cache time has  
elapsed. During this time, if you press the VTR START  
button or the VTR button on the lens, recording starts  
again as if there were no pause in recording.  
• The time the tape stops after the VTR START button is  
pressed equals the Picture Cache time set. However, if  
you start recording within the set Picture Cache time  
immediately after selecting the Picture Cache mode,  
changing the Picture Cache time or performing playback  
or recording review, the picture data for the duration of  
the Picture Cache time will not be stored in memory.  
Thus, the time the tape stops after the STOP button is  
pressed becomes shorter than the Picture Cache time.  
• The time code stops advancing while time data is being  
set (when the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set to SET).  
For this reason, if you start recording immediately after  
switching to F-RUN or R-RUN (i.e., to a position other  
than SET), you may overwrite a portion of the previously  
recorded time code.  
Auto Interval Rec  
In Auto Interval Rec mode, pictures are automatically shot  
a frame at a time at the specified interval and stored in  
memory. To use this function you must set the total time  
for shooting (TAKE TOTAL TIME) and the length of time  
for recording on the tape (REC TIME).  
Manual Interval Rec  
There are two modes of Manual Interval Rec:  
• Single Trigger mode  
Setting the number of frames to be recorded at one  
shooting (NUMBER OF FRAME) enables the  
camcorder to record the number of frames preset each  
time the VTR START button or the VTR button on the  
lens is pressed.  
• Continuous Trigger mode  
Pictures are automatically shot by preset frames at preset  
intervals by pressing the VTR START button or the VTR  
button on the lens.  
• Positions of essence marks, such as shot marks, may be  
shifted depending on the Picture Cache time setting.  
• Menu operation for the Picture Cache time setting is  
disabled during recording. To change the setting, once  
In Auto Interval Rec and Continuous Trigger mode of  
Manual Interval Rec, by setting the PRE-LIGHTING  
function to ON, the light connected to the LIGHT  
Recording  
44  
       
connector automatically turns on before recording starts.  
This allows you to record pictures under stable light and  
color temperature conditions.  
U03 FUNCTION1  
TURBO SW  
TURBO  
Auto Interval Rec mode settings  
CACHE/INTVAL REC  
To make settings before shooting  
To record in Auto Interval Rec mode, you need to turn on  
Auto Interval Rec and set the total time from start to finish  
of shooting (TAKE TOTAL TIME) and the length of time  
for recording on the tape (REC TIME), using the USER  
menu.  
5
6
Press the MENU knob.  
The b mark on the left of “CACHE/INTVAL REC”  
changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the  
setting changes to a ? mark.  
Notes  
U03 FUNCTION1  
• To make settings for Auto Interval Rec mode, set “TAKE  
TOTAL TIME” first, then “REC TIME.”  
• To turn on the light automatically before recording starts,  
set the LIGHT switch to AUTO.  
TURBO SW  
TURBO  
CACHE/INTVAL REC  
To turn on Auto Interval Rec mode, proceed as follows:  
Turn the MENU knob until A. INT appears.  
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes in  
the following sequence: OFF y CACHE y A. INT  
y M. INT.  
When A. INT appears, the camcorder is in Auto  
Interval Rec mode. The TALLY indicator (green) in  
the viewfinder flashes (one flash/second) while the  
camcorder is in this mode. Also, TAKE TOTAL  
TIME, REC TIME and PRE-LIGHTING appear.  
MENU knob  
MENU ON/OFF switch  
U03 FUNCTION1  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
TURBO SW  
TURBO  
The last accessed menu page appears on the  
viewfinder screen.  
CACHE/INTVAL REC  
TAKE TOTAL TIME  
REC TIME  
A.INT  
5M  
5SEC  
OFF  
PRE-LIGHTING  
Turn the MENU knob until the FUNCTION 1 page  
appears.  
7
8
Press the MENU knob.  
When the question mark  
appears at the left corner of  
the title page, you can  
switch the pages.  
Turn the MENU knob  
clockwise or  
counterclockwise to display  
the desired page. The DF/  
NDF item on the  
FUNCTION 1 page appears  
only for the DVW-970.  
U03 FUNCTION1  
The z mark on the left of “CACHE/INTVAL REC”  
changes to a b mark and the ? mark of the setting  
changes to a z mark.  
TURBO SW  
TURBO  
CACHE/INTVAL REC  
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “TAKE  
TOTAL TIME.”  
U03 FUNCTION1  
TURBO SW  
TURBO  
3
4
Press the MENU knob.  
CACHE/INTVAL REC  
TAKE TOTAL TIME  
REC TIME  
A.INT  
5M  
5SEC  
OFF  
A b mark appears on the left of the currently selected  
item and a z mark appears on the left of the setting.  
PRE-LIGHTING  
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
9
Press the MENU knob.  
“CACHE/INTVAL REC.”  
Recording  
45  
 
The b mark on the left of “TAKE TOTAL TIME”  
changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the  
setting changes to a ? mark.  
15Press the MENU knob.  
The z mark on the left of “REC TIME” returns to a b  
mark and the ? mark returns to a z mark.  
10Turn the MENU knob until the desired setting of  
16Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “PRE-  
“TAKE TOTAL TIME” appears.  
LIGHTING.”  
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting of TAKE  
TOTAL TIME changes in the following sequence:  
U03 FUNCTION1  
5M y 10M y 15M y 20M y 30M y 40M  
y 50M y 1H y 2H y 3H y 4H y 5H y  
7H y 10H y 15H y 20H y 30H y 40H y  
50H y 70H y 100H.  
Here M means minutes (5M is 5 minutes) and H means  
hours (1H is one hour).  
TURBO SW  
TURBO  
CACHE/INTVAL REC  
TAKE TOTAL TIME  
REC TIME  
A.INT  
5M  
5SEC  
OFF  
PRE-LIGHTING  
17Press the MENU knob.  
11Press the MENU knob.  
The bmark on the left of “PRE-LIGHTING” changes  
to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
The z mark on the left of “TAKE TOTAL TIME”  
changes to a b mark and the ? mark changes to a z  
mark.  
18Turn the MENU knob until the desired time to turn on  
12Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “REC  
the light before starting to record appears.  
TIME.”  
As you turn the MENU knob, the PRE-LIGHTING  
time changes in the following sequence: OFF y  
2SEC y 5SEC y 10SEC.  
U03 FUNCTION1  
TURBO SW  
TURBO  
Notes  
CACHE/INTVAL REC  
TAKE TOTAL TIME  
REC TIME  
A.INT  
5M  
5SEC  
OFF  
• Set the LIGHT switch on the camcorder to AUTO to  
turn on the light before recording.  
PRE-LIGHTING  
The light switch must also be set to ON. With these  
settings, the light turns on and off automatically.  
(However, the light remains on continuously if the  
off time is less than 5 seconds.)  
• When the LIGHT switch is set to MANUAL and the  
light switch is set to ON, the light remains on  
continuously.  
13Press the MENU knob.  
The bmark on the left of “REC TIME” returns to a z  
mark and the z mark of the setting returns to a ? mark.  
14Turn the MENU knob until the desired time to be  
recorded on the tape appears.  
19Press the MENU knob.  
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting of REC  
TIME changes in the following sequence:  
5SEC y 10SEC y 15SEC y 20SEC y 30SEC  
y 40SEC y 50SEC y 1MIN y 2MIN y  
.......38MIN y 39MIN y 40MIN.  
The z mark on the left of “PRE-LIGHTING” returns  
to a b mark and the ? mark returns to a z mark.  
20To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF.  
Here SEC means seconds (5SEC is 5 seconds) and  
MIN means minutes (1MIN is one minute).  
The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen and the  
message AUTO INTERVAL **M**S indicating Auto  
Interval Rec mode appears along the bottom of the  
viewfinder.  
You cannot set a REC TIME that is more than one  
thirtieth of TAKE TOTAL TIME.  
For example: When TAKE TOTAL TIME is set to 1H,  
the maximum value of REC TIME is 2 MIN. (60  
minutes divided by 30 gives 2 minutes.)  
The time setting displayed when you turn the MENU  
knob changes within the available setting times.  
Be sure to set REC TIME after setting TAKE TOTAL  
TIME.  
**M**S indicates the shooting interval. For example,  
when TAKE TOTAL TIME is set to 1H and REC TIME is  
set to 30 SEC, the message AUTO INTERVAL 00M04S  
appears. The shooting interval is 4 seconds.  
The display indicating the current status of the camcorder  
appears along the top and bottom of the viewfinder.  
Recording  
46  
• Set CACHE/INTVAL REC to OFF on the FUNCTION  
1 page.  
Note  
The settings for Auto Interval Rec mode are maintained  
until changed. However, if you switch off the camcorder  
power, Auto Interval Rec mode is cleared except for the  
TAKE TOTAL TIME, REC TIME and PRE-LIGHTING  
settings. To use the Auto Interval Rec function again after  
switching on the power, perform steps 1 to 6.  
Time required for shooting and time required for  
recording on the tape  
Auto Interval Rec mode is effective for shooting objects  
that move very slowly. To use this function, you need to set  
the total time for shooting (TAKE TOTAL TIME) and the  
length of time for recording on the tape (REC TIME).  
The time required for shooting is the time required to  
capture the very slowly moving subject, and the camcorder  
must be arranged so that during this time the subject is  
always in the frame.  
Recording in Auto Interval Rec mode  
Proceed as follows:  
Note  
When you use cassettes on which nothing is recorded, such  
as brand new cassettes, be sure to record color bars for  
more than 2 seconds at the beginning of a cassette.  
The tape recording time indicates the running time of the  
completed recording. The camcorder calculates the time-  
lapse interval from these two times.  
1
After performing the basic procedures for shooting  
and recording, following the instructions in “3-2-1  
Basic Procedures” (page 37), secure the camcorder so  
that it will not move.  
Total time for shooting (TAKE TOTAL TIME)  
Shooting interval  
2
Press the VTR START button on the camcorder or the  
VTR button on the lens.  
The camcorder starts recording in Auto Interval Rec  
mode. When you use the PRE-LIGHTING function,  
recording starts after the light is switched on.  
The actual recording to disc begins when the  
camcorder has saved about five seconds of video in  
memory, so disc access is intermittent.  
Time for recording on the tape (REC TIME)  
While recording in Auto Interval Rec mode, the  
TALLY indicator (green) in the viewfinder flashes (4  
flashes/second) and the message “AUTO INTERVAL  
**M**S” flashes on the viewfinder screen.  
When the camcorder is capturing the picture in  
memory, the REC indicator in the viewfinder lights.  
After the length of time for recording on the tape (REC  
TIME) has elapsed, the camcorder automatically stops  
recording.  
Notes on Auto Interval Rec operation  
Note the following points.  
Time code  
In Auto Interval Rec mode, the internal time code  
generator runs in R-RUN mode regardless of how the F-  
RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set.  
The actual time of the shooting is saved in the user bits.  
When you need to set the internal clock, use the TIME  
DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu.  
To continue auto interval recording  
For details, see “5-3-6 Setting the Date/Time of the  
Internal Clock” on page 92.  
Press the VTR START button on the camcorder or the  
VTR button on the lens again.  
The camcorder starts recording in Auto Interval Rec mode  
again.  
Audio  
Audio signals are not recorded in Auto Interval Rec mode.  
To interrupt auto interval recording  
Press the VTR START button or the VTR button on the  
lens. The camcorder stops recording.  
However, the tape may run for recording picture data  
already stored in memory.  
Cassette control buttons  
While recording in Auto Interval Rec mode, you cannot  
use the cassette control buttons (EJECT, REW, F FWD,  
PLAY and STOP). To use these buttons, stop recording by  
pressing the VTR START button or the VTR button on the  
lens.  
To end auto interval recording  
You can exit Auto Interval Rec mode using the following  
two methods:  
• Set the POWER switch to OFF.  
Menu operation  
While recording in Auto Interval Rec mode, you cannot  
change the settings of CACHE/INTVAL REC, TAKE  
Recording  
47  
TOTAL TIME and REC TIME. To change the settings,  
stop recording by pressing the VTR START button or the  
VTR button on the lens.  
“TRIGGER INTERVAL” and “PRE-LIGHTING”  
appear.  
3
4
Press the MENU knob.  
When the camcorder power is switched off during  
recording in Auto Interval Rec mode  
The z mark on the left of “CACHE/INTVAL REC”  
changes to a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the  
setting changes to a z mark.  
• When you set the POWER switch to OFF, the camcorder  
will switch off by itself after the tape has run for a few  
seconds to record the picture data stored in memory.  
• If you remove the battery, unplug the DC cable, or cut  
power to the AC adaptor during auto interval recording,  
picture data stored before recording stops (a maximum  
of 5 seconds) may be lost. Take care when changing the  
battery.  
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
“NUMBER OF FRAME.”  
U03 FUNCTION1  
ASSIGN SW <1>  
ASSIGN SW <2>  
TURBO SW  
DF/NDF  
END SEARCH  
:
:
:
:
:
ATW  
OFF  
TURBO  
DF  
OFF  
When tape runs out during auto interval recording  
CACHE/INTVAL REC: M.INT  
Note that picture data (a maximum of 5 seconds) shot and  
stored before the tape stops is not recorded if the tape runs  
out and the camcorder stops.  
NUMBER OF FRAME :  
TRIGGER INTERVAL:  
1
5MIN  
OFF  
PRE-LIGHTING  
:
5
6
7
8
Press the MENU knob.  
Manual Interval Rec mode  
The b mark on the left of “NUMBER OF FRAME”  
changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the  
setting changes to a ? mark.  
Manual Interval Rec has the following two modes.  
Single Trigger mode: Each time the VTR START button  
or VTR button on the lens is pressed, the camcorder  
captures to memory a single shot consisting of the  
specified number of video frames.  
Continuous Trigger mode: Once the VTR START button  
or VTR button on the lens is pressed, the camcorder  
captures consecutive shots to memory at the specified  
interval, with each shot consisting of the specified  
number of video frames.  
Turn the MENU knob until the desired number of  
frames to be recorded in each shot appears.  
As you turn the MENU knob, the number changes in  
the following sequence: 1 y 2 y 4 y 8.  
Press the MENU knob.  
The z mark on the left of “NUMBER OF FRAME”  
returns to a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the  
setting returns to a z mark.  
Setting Single Trigger mode of Manual  
Interval Rec  
Proceed as follows:  
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
“TRIGGER INTERVAL.”  
1
Carry out steps 1 to 5 of the procedure “To make  
settings before shooting” (page 45), to select CACHE/  
INTVAL REC on the FUNCTION 1 page.  
U03 FUNCTION1  
ASSIGN SW <1>  
ASSIGN SW <2>  
TURBO SW  
DF/NDF  
END SEARCH  
:
:
:
:
:
ATW  
OFF  
TURBO  
DF  
OFF  
2
Turn the MENU knob until “M. INT” appears.  
CACHE/INTVAL REC: M.INT  
U03 FUNCTION1  
NUMBER OF FRAME :  
TRIGGER INTERVAL:  
1
5MIN  
OFF  
ASSIGN SW <1>  
ASSIGN SW <2>  
TURBO SW  
DF/NDF  
END SEARCH  
:
:
:
:
:
ATW  
OFF  
TURBO  
DF  
OFF  
PRE-LIGHTING  
:
9
Press the MENU knob.  
CACHE/INTVAL REC:? M.INT  
NUMBER OF FRAME :  
TRIGGER INTERVAL:  
PRE-LIGHTING  
1
5MIN  
OFF  
The b mark on the left of “TRIGGER INTERVAL”  
changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the  
setting changes to a ? mark.  
:
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes in  
the following sequence: OFF y CACHE y A. INT  
y M. INT.  
10Turn the MENU knob to display M.  
When M. INT appears, the camcorder is in Manual  
Interval Rec mode and the TALLY indicator (green) in  
the viewfinder flashes. “NUMBER OF FRAME,”  
Recording  
48  
     
2
Push the VTR START button on the camcorder or the  
VTR button on the lens.  
U03 FUNCTION1  
ASSIGN SW <1>  
ASSIGN SW <2>  
TURBO SW  
DF/NDF  
END SEARCH  
:
:
:
:
:
ATW  
OFF  
TURBO  
DF  
OFF  
The camcorder starts recording in Single Trigger mode  
of Manual Interval Rec. The TALLY indicator (green)  
in the viewfinder flashes (2 flashes/second) and the  
message MANU INTERVAL *FRAME flashes on the  
viewfinder screen.  
CACHE/INTVAL REC: M.INT  
NUMBER OF FRAME :  
TRIGGER INTERVAL:?  
PRE-LIGHTING  
1
M
OFF  
:
Each time you press the VTR START button or the  
VTR button, the camcorder captures and stores the  
picture data of the preset number of frames. The REC  
indicator in the viewfinder is on while the camcorder  
is capturing the picture in the memory. The camcorder  
stores picture data (about 5 seconds worth) in memory,  
and then actually records the stored picture data on the  
tape. The tape runs intermittently.  
If you turn the MENU knob clockwise or  
counterclockwise, the number changes in the  
following sequence: M y 1SEC y 2SEC........12H  
y 24H.  
When M appears, the TALLY indicator (green) flashes  
(2 flashes/second) and PRE-LIGHTING disappears.  
11Press the MENU knob.  
To stop recording in Single Trigger mode  
The z mark on the left of “TRIGGER INTERVAL”  
returns to a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the  
setting returns to a z mark.  
You can stop recording in Single Trigger mode of Manual  
Rec Interval using the following two methods. However,  
the tape may continue to run to record the picture data  
stored in the memory at the instant the tape stopped.  
• Press the EJECT button.  
12To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF.  
• Set the POWER switch to OFF.  
The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen and  
the message MANU INTERVAL *FRAME, indicating  
the single trigger mode of the Manual Interval Rec  
mode, appears along the bottom of the viewfinder.  
*FRAME indicates the number of frames set in step 6.  
The display indicating the current status of the  
camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the  
viewfinder.  
Setting Continuous Trigger mode of  
Manual Interval Rec  
1
2
Follow the procedure in steps 1 to 9 in “Setting Single  
Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec” on page 48.  
Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise  
to display the desired trigger interval.  
Note  
The settings for Single Trigger mode of Manual Interval  
Rec are maintained until changed. However, if you switch  
the camcorder power off, all Manual Interval Rec mode  
settings are cleared except for the NUMBER OF FRAME  
setting and the single trigger mode selection. To use Single  
Trigger mode of the Manual Interval Rec function again  
after switching on the power, perform steps 1 and 2.  
U03 FUNCTION1  
ASSIGN SW <1>  
ASSIGN SW <2>  
TURBO SW  
DF/NDF  
END SEARCH  
:
:
:
:
:
ATW  
OFF  
TURBO  
DF  
OFF  
CACHE/INTVAL REC: M.INT  
NUMBER OF FRAME :  
TRIGGER INTERVAL:? 1SEC  
PRE-LIGHTING OFF  
1
:
Recording in Single Trigger mode of  
Manual Interval Rec  
Follow the procedure below to shoot a picture in Single  
Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec.  
If you turn the MENU knob clockwise or  
counterclockwise, the number changes in the  
following sequence: M y 1SEC y 2SEC y  
3SEC y 4SEC y 5SEC y 6SEC y 7SEC y  
8SEC y 9SEC y 10SEC y 15SEC y 20SEC  
y 30SEC y 40SEC y 50SEC y 1MIN y  
2MIN y 3MIN y 4MIN y 5MIN y 6MIN y  
7MIN y 8MIN y 9MIN y 10MIN y 15MIN  
y 20MIN y 30MIN y 40MIN y 50MIN y  
1H y 2H y 3H y 4H y 6H y 12H y 24H.  
Note  
When you use cassettes on which nothing is recorded, such  
as brand new cassettes, be sure to record color bars for  
more than 2 seconds at the beginning of a cassette.  
1
After performing the basic procedure for shooting and  
recording following the instructions in “3-2-1 Basic  
Procedures” on page 37, secure the camcorder so that  
it will not move.  
When a trigger interval time other than M is displayed,  
the camcorder is in Continuous Trigger mode of  
Manual Interval Rec. The TALLY indicator (green)  
flashes (1 flash/second).  
Recording  
49  
3
4
Push the MENU knob.  
*SEC indicates the trigger interval preset and  
*FRAME indicates the number of frames preset.  
The display indicating the current status of the  
camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the  
viewfinder.  
The ? mark on the left of setting returns to a z mark,  
and the z mark on the left of “TRIGGER  
INTERVAL” returns to an b mark.  
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to PRE-  
Note  
LIGHTING.  
The settings for Continuous Trigger mode of Manual  
Interval Rec are maintained until changed. However, if you  
switch the camcorder power off, all Manual Interval Rec  
mode settings are cleared except for the NUMBER OF  
FRAME, TRIGGER INTERVAL, and PRE-LIGHTING  
settings. To use Continuous Trigger mode of Manual  
Interval Rec again after switching on the power, perform  
steps 1 and 2 in “Setting Single Trigger mode of Manual  
Interval Rec” on page 48.  
U03 FUNCTION1  
ASSIGN SW <1>  
ASSIGN SW <2>  
TURBO SW  
DF/NDF  
END SEARCH  
:
:
:
:
:
ATW  
OFF  
TURBO  
DF  
OFF  
CACHE/INTVAL REC: M.INT  
NUMBER OF FRAME :  
TRIGGER INTERVAL:  
1
1SEC  
OFF  
PRE-LIGHTING  
:
5
6
Push the MENU knob.  
Recording in Continuous Trigger mode of  
Manual Interval Rec  
Follow the procedure below to shoot pictures in  
Continuous Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec.  
The b mark on the left of “PRE-LIGHTING” changes  
to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise  
until the desired time interval at which to turn on the  
light before recording starts appears.  
Note  
When you use cassettes on which nothing is recorded, such  
as brand new cassettes, be sure to record color bars for  
more than 2 seconds at the beginning of a cassette.  
If you turn the MENU knob clockwise or  
counterclockwise, the PRE-LIGHTING time changes  
in the following sequence: OFF y 2SEC y 5SEC  
y 10SEC.  
1
After performing the basic procedures for shooting  
and recording following the instructions in “3-2-1  
Basic Procedures” on page 37, secure the camcorder  
so that it will not move.  
Notes  
• To turn on the light automatically before recording  
starts by setting the PRE-LIGHTING item to ON, be  
sure to set the LIGHT switch to AUTO. Also, set the  
switch of the light connected to the LIGHT  
connector to ON.  
The light automatically turns on and off in  
Continuous Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec.  
However, if the duration the light should be off is  
less than 5 seconds, the light is on continuously.  
• When the LIGHT switch is set to MANUAL and the  
switch of the light is set to ON, the light is always on.  
2
Push the VTR START button on the camcorder or the  
VTR button on the lens.  
The camcorder starts recording in Continuous Trigger  
mode of Manual Interval Rec, and the flashing cycle of  
the TALLY indicator (green) changes from 1 flash/  
second to 4 flashes/second, and the message  
INTERVAL *SEC *FRAME flashes on the viewfinder  
screen.  
When you use the PRE-LIGHTING function, the light  
turns on when you press the VTR START button. After  
the preset PRE-LIGHTING time has elapsed, the  
camcorder captures the picture in the memory. The  
camcorder stores picture data (about 5 seconds worth)  
in memory, and then actually records the stored picture  
data on the tape. Thus, the tape runs intermittently. The  
REC indicator in the viewfinder is on while the  
camcorder is capturing the picture in the memory.  
7
8
Push the MENU knob.  
The ? mark on the left of setting returns to a z mark  
and the z mark on the left of PRE-LIGHTING returns  
to an b mark.  
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
To stop recording in Continuous Trigger mode of  
Manual Interval Rec  
You can stop recording in Continuous Trigger mode of  
Manual Interval Rec using the following two methods.  
However, the tape may continue to run to record the picture  
data stored in the memory at the instant the tape stopped.  
The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen and  
the message INTERVAL *SEC *FRAME, indicating  
Continuous Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec,  
appears along the bottom of the viewfinder.  
Recording  
50  
• Press the VTR START button or the VTR button on the  
lens.  
• Set the POWER switch to OFF.  
• If you remove the battery, unplug the DC cable, or cut the  
power to the AC adaptor during manual interval  
recording, picture data stored before recording stops (a  
maximum of 10 seconds) may be lost. Take care when  
changing the battery.  
Notes on Manual Interval Rec operation  
Take note of the following points which are common to  
Single Trigger mode and Continuous Trigger mode.  
Differences are clearly noted, if any.  
When tape runs out during recording in Manual  
Interval Rec mode  
Note that picture data (a maximum of 5 seconds) at the  
instant the tape stopped is not recorded if the tape runs out  
and the camcorder stops.  
Time code  
In Manual Interval Rec mode, the internal time code  
generator runs in R-RUN mode regardless of how the F-  
RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set. Also, in Continuous  
Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec, the actual time of  
the shooting is saved in the user bits.  
3-2-6 Continuous Recording on  
Previous Cut  
Audio  
By assigning the RE-TAKE function to the ASSIGN 1  
switch, you can use the ASSIGN 1 switch to position the  
tape at the most recent cut, clear it and record the new cut.  
Audio signals are not recorded in Manual Interval Rec  
mode.  
Cassette control buttons  
For detailed information, see “5-3-5 Assigning Functions  
to Assignable Switches” on page 90.  
While recording in Single Trigger mode of Manual  
Interval Rec (the green TALLY indicator in the viewfinder  
flashes (2 flashes/second)), you cannot use the cassette  
control buttons (REW, F FWD, PLAY and STOP). Note  
that the camcorder stops recording in the single trigger  
mode of the Manual Interval Rec mode if you press the  
EJECT button.  
While recording in Continuous Trigger mode of Manual  
Interval Rec (the TALLY indicator (green) flashes (4  
flashes/second)), you cannot use the cassette control  
buttons (EJECT, REW, F FWD, PLAY and STOP). To stop  
recording, press the VTR START button or the VTR button  
on the lens. However, the tape may run to record the  
picture data stored in the memory before stopping the  
manual interval recording.  
Tape running direction  
Cut 1  
Cut 2  
Cut 3  
Cut 4  
Example: After recording cut 3, clearing cut 3  
and recording cut 4 after cut 2  
Continuous recording the new cut after the  
cut before the most recent cut  
Menu operation  
In the above example, with the camcorder in the recording  
pause mode after recording the cut 3, press the RET switch  
on the lens while holding the ASSIGN 1 switch down.  
The camcorder automatically positions the tape at the end  
point of cut 2 and turns in the recording pause mode.  
Record cut 4.  
In Single Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec, you cannot  
change the settings of “CACHE/INTVAL REC” and  
“NUMBER OF FRAME” on the FUNCTION 1 page after  
the camcorder starts recording. To change the settings, stop  
recording by pressing the EJECT button or setting the  
POWER switch to OFF.  
Cut 4 is recorded after cut 2.  
While recording in Continuous Trigger mode of Manual  
Interval Rec, you cannot change the settings of CACHE/  
INTVAL REC, NUMBER OF FRAME and TRIGGER  
INTERVAL on the FUNCTION 1 page. To change these  
settings, stop recording by pressing the VTR START  
button or the VTR button on the lens or by setting the  
POWER switch to OFF.  
Notes  
• When pictures consisting of cuts recorded using the RE-  
TAKE function are played back on a VTR for  
professional use, the CHANNEL CONDITION  
indicator, which indicates the condition of the played  
back signal of the VTR, may be lit in yellow, noise may  
be added to the cue audio for the first 2 or 3 seconds, or  
the previously recorded timecode may be displayed for a  
few seconds. To avoid this, it is recommended that you  
make the first part of the cut (in the above example, cut  
4) about 3 seconds longer.  
When the camcorder power is switched off during  
recording in Manual Interval Rec mode  
• When you set the POWER switch to OFF, the camcorder  
will switch off by itself after disc access has continued  
for a few seconds to record the picture data stored in  
memory.  
Recording  
51  
   
• In the following cases, the RE-TAKE function is not  
accepted. The message “INVALID OPERATION!” is  
displayed on the viewfinder screen for three seconds.  
1.When only one cut has been recorded  
2.When the length of the recorded cuts is less than three  
seconds  
the STOP button again to stop the camcorder and then  
press the RET button on the lens.  
3.When Picture Cache is ON  
The RE-TAKE function is also not accepted after  
recording stops until the recording pause operation is  
completed (about 1 second). The message “INVALID  
OPERATION!” is displayed. In this case, the RE-  
TAKE function will be accepted when you perform the  
RE-TAKE operation again after the message  
disappears.  
3-2-7 Searching for the Last  
Recorded Portion and Turning in  
Recording Pause Mode (End Search  
Function)  
The End Search function allows the camcorder to search  
for the end of the recording on the tape after the recorded  
portion is rewound and played back.  
To use this function, set the END SEARCH function to ON  
on the FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu.  
For detailed information on menu operation, see “5-1-2  
Basic Menu Operations” on page 71.  
Tape running direction  
Recorded portion  
Blank portion  
The current tape position  
Searching for the end of the  
recorded portion and turning  
in recording pause mode  
END SEARCH function  
Searching for the end of the recording and  
turning in recording pause mode  
To start the recording again after rewinding the recorded  
tape, playing it back and stopping the camcorder, follow  
the procedure.  
Press the RET button on the lens.  
The tape automatically runs and stops at the end of the  
recording. The camcorder is in recording pause mode.  
Note  
When the STOP KEY FREEZE function is set to become  
active on the VTR MODE page of the MAINTENANCE  
menu, the picture is frozen once you push the STOP button  
during playback. To activate the end search function, push  
Recording  
52  
   
3-3-2 Checking the Recording on  
the Color Video Monitor — Playback  
in Color  
3-3 Checking Recording  
and Playback  
Connect a color video monitor to the VIDEO OUT  
connector of the camcorder. By pressing the PLAY button,  
you can view the recorded picture.  
When the optional CBK-SD01 SDI Output Board is  
installed, you can connect a color video monitor provided  
with an SDI IN connector.  
By pressing the PLAY button, you can review any length  
of recording in the viewfinder in black and white. There  
are two other ways to review the recording.  
• Recording review: You can view the last 2 seconds of  
the recording in the viewfinder in black and white.  
• Color playback: You can see the recording in color on  
a color video monitor without the need for any external  
adaptor.  
Color Video monitor  
DVW-970/970P  
VIDEO IN  
connector  
You may also view the picture during searching by  
rewinding or fast forwarding by pressing the PLAY +  
REW button or PLAY + F FWD button.  
1)  
2)  
SDI IN connector  
VIDEO OUT connector  
See “2-3 Audio Functions” on page 19 for information  
about the switches and controls used to select the audio  
output signal and to adjust the audio level.  
1) When VBS is selected as the output signal of the VIDEO  
OUT connector.  
2) When SDI is selected as the output signal of the VIDEO  
OUT connector (only when the CBK-SD01 is installed).  
3-3-1 Checking the Last Two  
Seconds of the Recording —  
Recording Review  
Color playback  
Notes  
• You can select either VBS or SDI as the output signal of  
the VIDEO OUT connector when the CBK-SD01 is  
installed.  
• When the CBK-SD01 is not installed, the OUTPUT  
page is not displayed. The output is fixed to VBS.  
If you press the RET button on the lens while recording is  
paused, the last two seconds of the recording is played  
back on the viewfinder screen and the color LCD. Use this  
function to check whether recording went smoothly. If you  
hold the RET button down longer, at most 10 seconds of  
the tape is rewound and played back. After playback, the  
camcorder is ready to start recording again.  
For details, see “5-3-2 Selecting the Output Signals” on  
page 88.  
By assigning the LENS RET function to the ASSIGN 1  
switch, you can use the ASSIGN 1 switch in the same way  
as the RET button on the lens.  
For details, see “5-3-5 Assigning Functions to Assignable  
Switches” on page 90.  
Note  
The recording review functions only works if the recording  
you have made is at least 3 seconds long.  
Checking Recording and Playback  
53  
           
4
5
Push the MENU knob.  
3-4 Freezing a Picture  
During Playback  
The ? mark on the left of the setting returns to a z  
mark, and the z mark on the left of STOP KEY  
FREEZE returns to an b mark.  
To end menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF.  
Pressing the STOP button during playback stops playback  
and freezes the picture.  
The VTR MODE page of the MAINTENANCE menu  
allows you to set the freeze-frame mode where you can  
view the frozen picture during playback.  
Viewing frozen pictures  
1
2
Push the PLAY button to start playback.  
Performing the settings required for  
freezing the picture  
Push the STOP button at the instant when you want to  
freeze the picture.  
The tape stops running and the picture is frozen.  
The time code is displayed in the counter display and  
the PLAY indicator flashes (one flash/second).  
1
2
Follow steps 1 to 4 in “Settings for recording essence  
marks to the system area” (page 39) to display the  
VTR MODE page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
?M08 VTR MODE  
Changing to another mode  
To cancel the freeze-frame mode for viewing the frozen  
picture and change to another mode, proceed as follows:  
REC TALLY BLINK :  
REC START BEEP  
LCD DISPLAY HOLD: TIMER  
ON  
:
OFF  
LCD HOLD TIMER  
REC VIDEO RATE  
STBY OFF TIMER  
:
:
:
1H  
50M  
60MIN  
OFF  
STOP KEY FREEZE :  
To restart playback: Push the PLAY button.  
To view the pictures shot by the camcorder: Push the  
STOP button.  
To rewind the tape: Push the REW button.  
To fast forward the tape: Push the F FWD button.  
To eject the tape: Push the EJECT button.  
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to STOP  
KEY FREEZE, then push the MENU knob.  
M08 VTR MODE  
Notes  
REC TALLY BLINK :  
REC START BEEP  
LCD DISPLAY HOLD: TIMER  
ON  
OFF  
:
• In the freeze-frame mode, you cannot start recording  
pictures on the tape. To start recording the shot pictures  
again, push the STOP button to finish playback and then  
push the VTR START button.  
LCD HOLD TIMER  
REC VIDEO RATE  
STBY OFF TIMER  
:
:
:
1H  
50M  
60MIN  
OFF  
STOP KEY FREEZE :  
• When changing to the recording pause mode from the  
freeze-frame mode by using the end-search function or  
positioning function for continuous recording, push the  
STOP button first, and then push the RET button.  
The b mark on the left of STOP KEY FREEZE  
changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the  
setting changes to a ? mark.  
When remotely controlling the camcorder from  
an RM-B150/B750 remote control unit (not  
supplied)  
3
Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise  
until the desired freeze mode appears.  
You can perform the same operation from an RM-B150/  
B750.  
The freeze mode changes in the following sequence:  
OFF y FRAME y FIELD  
Setting  
OFF  
Contents  
Deactivates the freeze function.  
FRAME  
Freezes pictures in frame mode. This  
mode is effective for freezing pictures of  
objects that are not moving.  
FIELD  
Freezes pictures in field mode. This  
mode is effective for freezing moving  
pictures.  
Freezing a Picture During Playback  
54  
   
3-5 Setting the Stand-by  
off Timer During Rec-  
Pause  
The VTR SAVE/STBY switch allows you to control the  
VTR power mode during pauses in recording (rec-pause)  
or when stopped.  
However, even in the standby mode (with the VTR SAVE/  
STBY switch set to STBY), you can set the VTR in such a  
way that the mode is automatically switched from the  
standby mode to save mode when the tape does not run for  
a preset time, using the VTR MODE page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu.  
1
Follow steps 1 to 4 in “Settings for recording essence  
marks to the system area” (page 39) to display the  
VTR MODE page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to STBY  
OFF TIMER, then push the MENU knob.  
M08 VTR MODE  
REC TALLY BLINK :  
REC START BEEP  
LCD DISPLAY HOLD: TIMER  
ON  
:
OFF  
LCD HOLD TIMER  
REC VIDEO RATE  
STBY OFF TIMER  
:
:
:
1H  
50M  
60MIN  
OFF  
STOP KEY FREEZE :  
The b mark on the left of “STBY OFF TIMER”  
changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the  
setting changes to a ? mark.  
3
Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise  
until the desired STBY OFF TIMER appears.  
If you turn the MENU knob clockwise or  
counterclockwise, STBY OFF TIMER changes in the  
following sequence: 60MIN y 30MIN y 10MIN  
y 5MIN y OFF.  
In order not to enter in the VTR SAVE mode, select  
OFF.  
To enter the VTR SAVE mode, select the desired time.  
4
5
Press the MENU knob.  
The z mark on the left of “STBY OFF TIMER”  
returns to an b mark, and the ? mark to the left of the  
setting returns to the z mark.  
To end menu operations, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF.  
Setting the Stand-by off Timer During Rec-Pause  
55  
     
Adjustments and  
4
Settings for Recording  
Chapter  
4-1-1 Adjusting the Black Balance  
4-1 Adjusting the Black  
Balance and the White  
Balance  
To automatically adjust the black balance  
In automatic black balance mode, adjustments are  
performed in the following order: clamp level, black set,  
and black balance. Manual black balance adjustment can  
be selected from the setup menu.  
To ensure excellent image quality when using this  
camcorder, conditions may require that both the black  
balance and the white balance be adjusted.  
Note that the automatic black balance adjustment includes  
a function to correct for white flecks caused in the CCDs  
by cosmic rays, in addition to the normal black balance  
operation.  
Black balance adjustment  
The black balance will require adjustment in the following  
cases.  
To adjust the black balance, proceed as follows:  
• When the camcorder is used for the first time  
• When the camcorder has not been used for a long time  
• When the camcorder is used under conditions in which  
the surrounding temperature has changed greatly  
• When the GAIN selector (L/M/H) values have been  
changed by using the USER menu  
It is not usually necessary to adjust the black balance when  
using the camcorder after it has been off.  
OUTPUT/DCC switch  
AUTO W/B BAL switch  
White balance adjustment  
Always readjust the white balance when the lighting  
conditions change.  
1
2
Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM.  
Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to BLK and release  
the switch.  
Viewfinder screen displays  
If the black balance or white balance adjustment is started,  
messages that report on the progress and results are  
displayed on the viewfinder screen when the VF DISP  
MODE item is set to “2” or “3” on the VF DISP 1 page of  
the USER menu.  
The switch returns to the center position, and the  
adjustment is executed.  
During adjustment, the following message is displayed  
on the viewfinder screen.  
Note  
Themessageschange  
in the following  
sequence:  
Black balance and white balance adjustment values that  
are automatically set by the camcorder and the various  
settings are stored in the camcorder memory and retained  
even when the power is turned off.  
-BLACK SET-  
t
-BLACK BALANCE-  
ABB:EXECUTING  
-BLACK SET-  
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance  
56  
             
The black balance adjustment ends in a few seconds  
with the message “ABB:OK” and the adjustment value  
is automatically stored in memory.  
1
Set the switches and selectors as shown in the figure  
below.  
Notes  
FILTER selector (step 2)  
• During the black balance adjustment, the iris is  
automatically closed.  
• During the black balance adjustment, the gain selection  
circuit is automatically activated so you may see  
flickering on the viewfinder screen, but this is not a fault.  
If automatic black balance adjustment  
cannot be made  
If the black balance adjustment cannot be completed  
normally, an error message will appear for about 3 seconds  
on the viewfinder screen (in display mode 2 or 3).  
Possible messages are listed below.  
OUTPUT/DCC switch:  
CAM  
WHITE BAL switch:  
1)  
A or B  
Black balance adjustment error messages  
Error message Meaning  
ABB : NG  
IRIS NOT  
CLOSED  
The lens iris did not close; adjustment  
was impossible.  
GAIN selector: Set as low as  
possible.  
ABB : NG  
TIME LIMIT  
Adjustment could not be completed  
within the standard number of attempts.  
1) White balance setting values are stored in memory B only  
when the WHITE SWITCH <B> item is set to “MEM” on  
the FUNCTION 2 page of the OPERATION menu.  
ABB : NG  
R (or G or B) :  
OVERFLOW  
The difference between the reference  
value and the current value is so great  
that it exceeds the range. Adjustment  
was impossible.  
If the setting of the GAIN selector or WHITE BAL  
switch is changed, a message reporting the new setting  
position appears for about 3 seconds in the setting  
change and adjustment progress message display area  
of the viewfinder screen.  
If any of the above error messages is displayed, retry the  
black balance adjustment.  
Keep pushing the AUTO W/B BAL to BLK until  
“-BLACK SET-” appears after “-BLACK BALANCE-”  
appears. If the error message occurs again, contact your  
Sony service representative.  
2
Set the FILTER selector to suit the lighting conditions  
as follows:  
Note  
FILTER selector (outer knob) setting and CC-filter  
selection  
If the lens cable is not firmly connected to the LENS  
connector, it may not be possible to adjust the lens iris. If  
this happens, the black balance will be incorrect.  
FILTER selector (outer  
knob) setting  
CC filter  
A
B
C
D
Cross filter  
3200K  
Black balance memory  
Values stored in memory are held until the black balance is  
next adjusted.  
4300K  
6300K  
FILTER selector (inner knob) setting and ND-filter  
selection  
4-1-2 Adjusting the White Balance  
FILTER selector  
ND filter  
(inner knob) setting  
To automatically adjust the white balance  
When you make automatic white balance adjustment, the  
adjustment value obtained is saved in memory.  
1
2
Clear  
1
/ ND  
4
1
1
3
4
/
/
ND  
ND  
16  
64  
Proceed as follows:  
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance  
57  
           
If the setting of the FILTER selector is changed, a  
message reporting the setting appears for about 3  
seconds in the setting change and adjustment progress  
message display area of the viewfinder screen (in  
display mode 3).  
figure, and the adjustment setting is automatically  
stored in the memory (A or B) that was selected in step  
1.  
3
Place a white test card under the same lighting  
conditions as for the subject to be shot and zoom up to  
it.  
AWB:OK  
. K  
Approximate color  
temperature of the  
subject  
Alternatively, any white object such as a cloth or a wall  
can be used.  
The absolute minimum white area is as follows:  
Note  
Rectangle centered on  
the screen. The lengths of  
the sides are 70% of the  
length and width of the  
screen.  
If the camera has a zoom lens with an automatic iris,  
the iris may hunt during the adjustment. To prevent  
this, adjust the iris gain knob (indicated as IG, IS, or S)  
on the lens.  
1)  
The white object must be  
within the rectangle and  
have an area of at least  
10% of the screen.  
1)Hunting  
Repeated brightening and darkening of the image, resulting from  
repeated response to automatic iris control.  
For details, refer to the lens operation manual.  
If the automatic white balance adjustment  
cannot be made  
Note  
Make sure there are not bright spots in the rectangle.  
If the white balance adjustment cannot be completed  
normally, an error message will appear for about 3 seconds  
on the viewfinder screen (in display mode 2 or 3).  
Possible messages are listed below.  
4
5
Adjust the lens iris.  
Manually adjusted lens: set the iris to an appropriate  
setting.  
Lens with automatic iris: set the automatic/manual  
switch on the lens to automatic.  
White balance adjustment error messages  
Error message  
Meaning  
AWB : NG  
LOW LEVEL  
The white video level is too low.  
Either open the lens iris or increase  
the gain.  
Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to WHT and then  
release the switch.  
AWB : NG  
COLOR TEMP HIGH  
The color temperature is too high.  
Select a suitable filter setting.  
AWB : NG  
COLOR TEMP LOW  
The color temperature is too low.  
Select a suitable filter setting.  
AWB : NG  
TIME LIMIT  
Adjustment could not be completed  
within the standard number of  
attempts.  
AWB : NG  
POOR WHITE AREA  
The white area could not be  
checked.  
AUTO W/B BAL switch  
AWB : NG  
OVER LEVEL  
The white video level is too high.  
Either stop down the lens iris or  
change the ND filter.  
The switch returns to the center position, and the  
adjustment is executed.  
If any of the above error messages is displayed, retry the  
white balance adjustment. If the error message occurs  
again, contact your Sony service representative.  
During adjustment, the message “AWB :  
EXECUTING” is displayed on the viewfinder screen  
(in display mode 2 or 3).  
The white balance adjustment ends in about one  
second with the message shown in the following  
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance  
58  
If you have no time to adjust the white  
balance  
Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.  
The white balance is automatically set as follows,  
depending on the FILTER selector setting.  
B: 3200K  
4-2 SettingtheElectronic  
Shutter  
C: 4300K  
D: 6300K  
This section describes the shutter modes that can be used  
with the electronic shutter of the camcorder, and describes  
the procedure for selecting the shutter speed and shutter  
mode.  
For details about setting the white balance manually, see  
“To automatically adjust the white balance” on page 57.  
White balance memory  
Values stored in memory are held until the white balance is  
next adjusted.  
4-2-1 Shutter Modes  
The shutter modes that can be used with the electronic  
shutter and the shutter speeds that can be selected are  
shown below.  
There are two sets of white balance memories, A and B,  
and adjustments for each of the filters can be automatically  
stored in the memory corresponding to the setting (A or B)  
of the WHITE BAL switch. The camcorder has four built-  
in filters, so a total of eight (4 × 2) adjustments can be  
stored. The number of memories allocated to each of A and  
B can be limited to one by setting the WHT FILTER INH.  
item to “ON” on the FUNCTION 3 page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu. In this case, the memory contents  
are not linked to the filter settings.  
Standard mode  
Use this mode for shooting fast-moving subjects with little  
blurring.  
CCD scan mode  
Shutter speed (sec.)  
I
DVW-970  
1/100, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000,  
1/2000  
If the WHITE BAL switch is set to B, and on the  
FUNCTION 2 page of the OPERATION menu, the  
WHITE SWITCH <B> item is set to “ATW,” the ATW  
(Auto Tracing White) function is activated to  
automatically adjust the white balance of the picture being  
shot for varying lighting conditions.  
DVW-970P 1/60, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000,  
1/2000  
PsF  
DVW-970  
1/40, 1/60, 1/120, 1/125, 1/250,  
1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000  
DVW-970P 1/33, 1/50, 1/100, 1/125, 1/250,  
1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000  
24P (DVW-970 only) 1/32, 1/48, 1/96, 1/125, 1/250,  
1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000  
ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode  
Use this mode for obtaining images with no horizontal  
bands of noise when shooting subjects such as monitor  
screens.  
CCD scan mode  
Shutter speed  
I
DVW-970  
60.00 to 6000 Hz  
DVW-970P 50.00 to 6000 Hz  
DVW-970 30.00 to 7000 Hz  
DVW-970P 25.00 to 6000 Hz  
PsF  
24P (DVW-970 only) 24.00 to 5000 Hz  
SLS (slow speed shutter) mode  
The SLS mode can only be selected when the CCD scan  
mode is set to “I (interlace scan).”  
Use this mode For shooting subjects in low level lighting  
conditions.  
You can select the shutter speed from among 1 (1/30 sec  
for the DVW-970, 1/25 sec for the DVW-970P) to 8, 16  
Setting the Electronic Shutter  
59  
             
frames (1/2 sec for the DVW-970, 2/3 sec for the DVW-  
970P).  
1
2
Follow the procedure described in “5-2-2 Selecting the  
Display Items” (page 79) to set the VF DISPLAY  
MODE item to “2” or “3” on the VF DISP 1 page of  
the USER menu.  
EVS (Enhanced Vertical definition System) mode  
This mode is used to improved vertical resolution.  
However, the sensitivity and dynamic range are reduced.  
The shutter speed is set to the same value as that currently  
selected in Standard or ECS mode.  
Push the SHUTTER selector from ON to SEL.  
Notes  
• Whatever the operating mode of the electronic shutter,  
the sensitivity of the CCD decreases with increasing  
shutter speed.  
• When the automatic iris is used, the iris opens wider as  
the shutter speed increases, thus reducing the depth of  
field.  
• Under artificial light, particularly fluorescent or mercury  
lamps, the light intensity may appear to be constant, but  
the red, green, and blue intensities are actually changing  
in synchronization with the frequency of the power  
supply causing flicker. Using an electronic shutter under  
such lighting could make the flicker even worse. Color  
flicker is particularly likely to happen when the power  
supply frequency is 60 Hz (with the DVW-970) or 50 Hz  
(with the DVW-970P). However, if the power frequency  
is 50 Hz (with the DVW-970) or 60 Hz (with the DVW-  
970P), setting the shutter speed to 1/100 or 1/60 can  
reduce this flicker.  
• When a bright object is shot in EVS mode or ECS mode  
in such a manner that it fills the screen, the upper edge of  
the picture may have poor quality because of an inherent  
characteristic of CCDs. Before using EVS mode or ECS  
mode, check the shooting conditions.  
SHUTTER selector  
The current shutter setting indication appears for about  
3 seconds in the setting change and adjustment  
progress message display area of the viewfinder  
screen.  
Examples: “: SS : 1/250,” “: ECS : 60.00 Hz”  
3
Before the shutter setting indication disappears, push  
the SHUTTER selector down to SELECT again and  
repeat this until the desired mode or speed appears.  
Pushing the SHUTTER selector down to SELECT  
repeatedly allows you to cycle through the settings of  
mode and speed preselected on the SHT ENABLE  
page of the OPERATION menu.  
You can turn on or off the EVS mode on the SW STATUS  
page of the PAINT menu.  
Note that all modes and all standard-mode speeds  
listed in the table on the previous page are preselected  
using the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION  
menu.  
4-2-2 Selecting the Shutter Mode  
and Shutter Speed  
By factory default, all available shutter modes and  
shutter speeds are displayed in the sequence shown in  
the following figure. (You can use the SHT ENABLE  
page of the OPERATION menu to make a setting so  
that only the desired (or most frequently used) modes  
and speeds are displayed.)  
Use the SHUTTER selector to select a shutter mode or a  
standard-mode shutter speed. To set the shutter speed in  
ECS or SLS mode, with the SHUTTER selector set to ON  
and the ECS or SLS mode selected, use the MENU knob  
for adjustment.  
You can use the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION  
menu to narrow the range of choice in advance, or to select  
in advance whether or not you use ECS/SLS.  
Standard mode  
Setting the shutter mode and the shutter  
speed in standard mode  
Once the shutter speed is selected, it is retained even when  
the camcorder power is turned off.  
SLS mode  
ECS mode  
1/100: for the DVW-970  
1/60: for the DVW-970P  
Setting the Electronic Shutter  
60  
   
Setting the shutter speed in ECS mode  
Proceed as follows:  
SLS: 1/30 : 1FRAME  
Example of view finder screen display  
for SLS setting operation  
2
Turn the MENU knob until the desired number of  
frames appears.  
1
2
The number of frames can be set to values in the range  
1 to 8, and 16 (1 frame nearly equals to 1/30 second  
(DVW-970) or 1/25 second (DVW-970P)).  
1
2
Set the shutter speed mode to ECS.  
Changing the range of choice of shutter  
mode and speed settings  
You can reduce the time required to select the shutter mode  
and speed by narrowing the choice of settings in advance.  
This can be done by using the SHT ENABLE page of the  
OPERATION menu.  
ECS:60.00Hz  
Example of view finder screen display  
for ECS setting operation  
Proceed as follows:  
Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from  
the front of the camera to increase the value, or  
clockwise to decrease the value, until the desired  
frequency appears.  
Note  
The settings selected on the SHT ENABLE page of the  
OPERATION menu become invalid when the RM-B150/  
B750 Remote Control Unit is connected to the camcorder.  
The frequency range can be changed between 60.1 and  
7000 Hz (DVW-970) or between 50.2 and 9000 Hz  
(DVW-970P).  
When the RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit is  
connected  
You can set the shutter speed of ECS with the rotary  
encoder of the RM-B150/B750.  
MENU ON/OFF switch  
MENU knob  
Setting the shutter speed in SLS mode  
Proceed as follows:  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON while holding  
down the MENU knob.  
The TOP menu appears.  
1
2
1
Set the shutter speed mode to SLS.  
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
OPERATION.  
Setting the Electronic Shutter  
61  
3
4
Press the MENU knob.  
4-3 Changing the  
Reference Value for  
Automatic Iris  
If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been  
displayed, the CONTENTS page of the OPERATION  
menu appears.  
If the menu has been used before, the last accessed  
page appears.  
Adjustment  
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU  
knob to move the b mark to “SHT ENABLE,” then  
press the MENU knob to display the SHT ENABLE  
page.  
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob  
until the SHT ENABLE page appears, then press the  
MENU knob to select the page.  
The reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be  
changed to aid the shooting of clear pictures of back-lit  
subjects, or to prevent blown-out highlights. The reference  
value for the lens iris can be set within the following range  
with respect to the standard value.  
• 0.5: about 0.5 stop further open  
• 1: about 1 stop further open  
• –0.5: about 0.5 stop further closed  
• –1: about 1 stop further closed  
SHT ENABLE page  
17 SHT ENABLE  
SHUTTER SLS  
SHUTTER ECS  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
SHUTTER 1/100  
SHUTTER 1/125  
SHUTTER 1/250  
SHUTTER 1/500  
SHUTTER 1/1000  
SHUTTER 1/2000  
Changing the reference value  
Proceed as follows:  
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
(This menu display is for the DVW-970. For the DVW-  
970P, “SHUTTER 1/60” is displayed instead of  
“SHUTTER 1/100.”)  
If this is the first time the USER menu has been  
displayed, the CONTENTS page of the USER menu  
appears. If the menu has been used before, the last  
accessed page appears.  
5
6
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the  
shutter mode or shutter speed you want, then press the  
MENU knob.  
2
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU  
knob to move the b mark to AUTO IRIS, then press  
the MENU knob to display the AUTO IRIS page.  
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob  
until the AUTO IRIS page appears, then press the  
MENU knob to select the page.  
Turn the MENU knob until “ON” appears, then press  
the MENU knob.  
AUTO IRIS page  
The z mark on the left of the selected item returns to  
a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting  
returns to a z mark.  
U10 AUTO IRIS  
To set another mode or speed, return to step 5.  
Note that only the shutter speeds set to “ON” can be  
selected with the SHUTTER selector.  
7
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF.  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “IRIS  
OVERRIDE,” then press the MENU knob.  
The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen and  
the display indicating the current status of the  
camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the  
viewfinder screen.  
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
Turn the MENU knob until “ON” appears, then press  
the MENU knob.  
Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment  
62  
         
The z mark on the left of the selected item returns to  
a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting  
returns to a z mark.  
The IRIS OVERRIDE item is set to “ON” (factory  
setting: OFF).  
5
6
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
The AUTO IRIS page disappears from the viewfinder  
screen.  
Opening the lens iris  
Iris opened by 1 stop  
(two bars)  
Turn the MENU knob to change the reference value.  
The changed reference value is retained until the  
power of the camcorder is turned off.  
Even if the reference value is changed, it reverts to the  
standard value every time the power is turned on.  
Iris opened by 0.5 stop  
(one bar)  
Stopping down the lens iris  
To open the iris by 0.5 stop:  
Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from  
the front of the camera.  
Iris stopped down by 1 stop  
(two bars)  
One bar (s) appears in the upper part to the left of the  
F number in the iris indication.  
Iris stopped down by 0.5 stop  
(one bar)  
To open the iris by 1 stop:  
Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from  
the front of the camera.  
Two bars (ss) appear in the upper part to the left of  
the F number in the iris indication.  
Adjusting the reference value for automatic iris adjustment  
When the RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit is  
connected  
The IRIS control knob of the RM-B150/B750 can be used  
for lens iris setting. In this case, the bar display (s) does  
not appear.  
To stop down the iris by 0.5 stop:  
Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front  
of the camera.  
One bar (s) appears in the lower part to the left of the  
F number in the iris indication.  
Selecting the automatic iris window  
Proceed as follows:  
To stop down the iris by 1 stop:  
Turn the MENU knob further clockwise as seen from  
the front of the camera.  
Two bars (ss) appear in the lower part to the left of  
the F number in the iris indication.  
1
Follow the procedure of steps 1 and 2 described in the  
previous item “Changing the reference value” (page  
62) to display the AUTO IRIS page.  
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “IRIS  
WINDOW IND,” then press the MENU knob.  
The b mark on the left of “IRIS WINDOW IND”  
changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the  
setting changes to a ? mark.  
3
Turn the MENU knob until “ON” appears, then press  
the MENU knob.  
The z mark returns to a b mark, and the ? mark  
returns to a z mark.  
The currently selected auto iris window appears on the  
screen.  
If it is not necessary to display the auto iris window on  
the screen, set to “OFF.”  
Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment  
63  
 
4
5
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “IRIS  
WINDOW,” then press the MENU knob.  
4-4 Adjusting the Audio  
Level  
The b mark changes to a z mark, and the z mark  
changes to a ? mark.  
Turn the MENU knob until the desired auto iris  
window appears, then press the MENU knob.  
Setting the AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 switches to  
AUTO automatically adjusts the input levels of the audio  
signal to be recorded in audio channels 1 and 2. You can  
also adjust the audio level manually.  
For the audio level of the signal to be recorded in  
audio channels 3 and 4  
The input levels of audio channels CH-3 and CH-4 are  
automatically adjusted or fixed.  
The shaded parts indicate the area  
where light detection occurs.  
Auto iris window  
When the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch is set to CH-3/4, the  
audio channel level meters display the level of the audio  
signals recorded in audio channels CH-3 and CH-4. You  
can select the audio input signals to be recorded for audio  
channel CH-3 and 4 by using the AUDIO IN CH-3/CH-4  
switches.  
The z mark on returns to a b mark and the ? mark  
returns to a z mark.  
If you select “VARIABLE,” the following items  
become effective and you can set the window of the  
desired size. Set each item to the desired size.  
Item  
Setting  
4-4-1 Manually Adjusting the Audio  
Input Level of the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2  
Connectors  
IRIS VAR WIDTH  
The width of the window  
IRIS VAR HEIGHT The height of the window  
IRIS VAR H POS.  
The position of the window in the  
horizontal direction  
Follow the procedure described below to adjust the audio  
levels of the audio input from the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2  
connectors, which are to be recorded in audio channels  
CH-1 and CH-2.  
IRIS VAR V POS.  
The position of the window in the  
vertical direction.  
6
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF or close the  
cover of the menu operating section.  
Note  
When 1 and 2 are not displayed under the audio channel  
level meters, the CH-1/2/ CH-3/4 switch is set to the CH-  
3/4 position. Set this switch to CH-1/2.  
The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen and  
the display indicating the current status of the  
camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the  
screen.  
At the factory setting, the XLR connection automatic  
detection mode of the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors is  
set to OFF. If the setting has been changed to ON, start the  
operation from step 2.  
Start the operation from step 1 with the XLR connection  
automatic detection mode set to OFF.  
To counter problems with very bright  
highlights  
If the subject is too bright, the iris may close too much,  
leaving the overall image dark, or the highlights may be  
blown out. In such cases, setting the highlight clip function  
on reduces the luminance range, avoiding problems from  
the automatic iris correction.  
You can set the XLR connection automatic detection mode  
on the AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
In the AUTO IRIS page of the USER menu, set the CLIP  
HIGH LIGHT item to “ON.”  
Adjusting the Audio Level  
64  
     
At the factory Example 1 Example 2  
setting  
Audio  
level to  
CH-1  
LEVEL (CH-1) MIC LEVEL The MIC LEVEL  
control  
control  
control is linked  
with LEVEL (CH-1)  
control.  
Audio  
level to  
CH-2  
LEVEL (CH-2) MIC LEVEL The MIC LEVEL  
control  
control  
control is linked  
with LEVEL (CH-2)  
control.  
3
2
Note  
When you have operation of the LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2)  
controls and MIC LEVEL control linked together, if the  
MIC LEVEL control is set to 0, the audio signals on  
channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check the position of  
the MIC LEVEL control before adjusting the LEVEL  
(CH-1/CH-2) controls.  
1
MIC LEVEL control  
Manual adjustment of the audio levels  
of AUDIO IN CH1/CH2  
4-4-2 Manually Adjusting the Audio  
Level of the Front Microphone  
1
To adjust the signal input to the AUDIO IN CH1 or  
AUDIO IN CH2 connector, set the AUDIO IN CH-1 or  
AUDIO IN CH-2 switch to REAR.  
You can adjust the audio level input from the front  
microphone connected to the MIC IN connector, which is  
to be recorded on audio channels 1 and 2.  
To adjust both input signals, set both switches to  
REAR.  
2
3
Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) corresponding to  
the channel(s) selected in step 1 to MANUAL.  
Notes  
• When [1] and [2] are not displayed under the audio  
channel level meters, the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch is set  
to the CH-3/4 position. Set this switch to CH-1/2.  
• If the XLR connection automatic detection mode is on,  
when the cables are connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/  
CH2 connectors, the camcorder detects the connection to  
the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors. Thus, the AUDIO  
IN switches are internally reset to REAR and the audio  
signals input to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors are  
automatically selected.  
With the LEVEL control for the channel selected in  
step 1, adjust so that the audio level meter shows up to  
–20 dB for a normal input volume.  
The second bar from the top may turn on occasionally,  
but do not allow the top bar (0 dB) to go on. If it goes  
on, the audio level is too high.  
Before adjusting the audio level of the front microphone,  
confirm that no cables are connected to the AUDIO IN  
CH1/CH2 connectors. Alternatively, set the REAR XLR  
AUTO item to “OFF” on the AUDIO-1 page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu.  
All bars go on.  
These bars go on.  
To adjust the audio level of the front microphone, proceed  
as follows:  
Normal input level  
Excessive input level  
Using the LEVEL controls  
You can select the audio level controls to be used to adjust  
the level of the audio signals input to the AUDIO IN CH1/  
CH2 connectors on the AUDIO-3 page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu.  
Adjusting the Audio Level  
65  
 
Note  
When you have operation of the MIC LEVEL control and  
LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls linked together, if the  
LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls are set to 0, the audio  
signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check the  
position of the LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls before  
adjusting the MIC LEVEL control.  
4-4-3 Input level of audio channels  
CH-3 and CH-4  
2
1
The levels of the audio signals recorded in audio channels  
CH-3 and CH-4 are automatically adjusted or fixed. You  
cannot adjust them manually.  
3
You can select the audio signal to be recorded in audio  
channels CH-3 and CH-4 using the AUDIO IN CH-3 and  
CH-4 switches.  
Manual adjustment of the audio levels  
of the front microphone  
To adjust the audio recording level  
Set AU CH34 AGC MODE on the AUDIO-2 page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu as follows:  
1
Set either or both of the AUDIO IN switch(es) to  
FRONT as follows:  
For automatic adjustment: Set to STREO or MONO.  
To fix the level: Set to OFF.  
When using the front microphone input for both  
channels 1 and 2: Set both AUDIO IN switches to  
FRONT.  
When using the front microphone input for either  
channel 1 or 2: Set the AUDIO IN switch for the  
desired channel to FRONT.  
Note  
The XLR connector automatic detection function does not  
affect audio signals recorded on audio channels CH-3 and  
CH-4.  
2
3
Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) for the desired  
channel(s) selected in step 1 to MANUAL.  
F: The audio signal from the front  
microphone is recorded.  
Turn the MIC LEVEL control, and adjust so that the  
audio level meter shows up to –20 dB for a normal  
input volume.  
R: The audio signal input to the AUDIO  
IN CH1 connector is recorded.  
W:The audio signal of the wireless  
microphone is recorded.  
• The 9 bars from the bottom among 17 bars go on  
with the normal input volume.  
F: Same as with the CH-3 switch.  
• The second top bar may turn on occasionally, but do  
not allow the top bar to go on. If it goes on, the audio  
level is too high.  
R: The audio signal input to the AUDIO  
IN CH2 connector is recorded.  
W:Same as with the CH-3 switch.  
Using the LEVEL controls  
Audio signals to be recorded on audio channels 3 and 4  
You can select the audio level controls to be used to adjust  
the level of the front microphone on the AUDIO-3 page of  
the MAINTENANCE menu.  
At the factory Example 1  
setting  
Example 2  
Audio  
level to  
CH-1  
MIC LEVEL  
control  
LEVEL(CH-1) The MIC LEVEL  
control  
control is linked  
with LEVEL  
(CH-1) control.  
Audio  
level to  
CH-2  
MIC LEVEL  
control  
LEVEL(CH-2) The MIC LEVEL  
control  
control is linked  
with LEVEL  
(CH-2) control.  
Adjusting the Audio Level  
66  
 
To reset the time code value to 00:00:00:00  
Press the RESET button.  
4-5 Setting the Time Data  
5
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN or R-  
RUN.  
4-5-1 Setting the Time Code  
F-RUN: Free run. The time code generator keeps  
running.  
R-RUN: Recording run. The time code generator runs  
only while recording.  
The time code setting range is from 00 : 00 : 00 : 00 to 23  
: 59 : 59 : 29 (hours : minutes : seconds : frames) for the  
DVW-970, and from 00 : 00 : 00 : 00 to 23 : 59 : 59 : 24 for  
the DVW-970P.  
To set the drop frame mode/non-drop frame mode  
(only for the DVW-970)  
You can select the drop frame (DF) mode or non-drop  
frame (NDF) mode on the FUNCTION 1 page of the  
USER menu or OPERATION menu or on the TIMECODE  
page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
To set the time code, proceed as follows:  
To make the time code consecutive  
When the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set to R-RUN,  
recording a number of scenes on the tape normally  
produces consecutive time code. However, once you  
remove the tape and record on another tape, the time code  
will no longer be contiguous when you use again the  
original tape for recording. In this case, to make the time  
code consecutive, proceed as follows:  
HOLD button  
RESET button  
1
4
2
1
2
3
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to REGEN.  
Use the PLAY buttons to play back.  
3,5  
CUE IN  
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
Watching the playback, find the point of the previous  
recording on the tape from which you wish to continue  
recording, and press the STOP button.  
4
Press the RET button on the lens.  
Setting the time code  
This reads the previous recording and synchronizes the  
internal time code generator, thus allowing the new  
time code recorded to follow on consecutively.  
1
2
3
Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.  
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to PRESET.  
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET.  
The first (leftmost) digit of time code flashes.  
4-5-2 Saving the Actual Time in the  
Time Code  
4
Using the SHIFT and ADVANCE buttons, set the time  
code.  
Setting the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to CLOCK  
saves the actual time in the time code.  
When it is necessary to set the actual time, use the TIME/  
DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu.  
SHIFT: Selects a digit to set. Each time you press the  
button, the flashing digit moves one column to the  
right.  
Pressing this button while holding down the HOLD  
button moves the flashing digit one to the left.  
ADVANCE: Increments the value of the flashing  
digit.  
For details, see “5-3-6 Setting the Date/Time of the  
Internal Clock” on page 92.  
Pressing this button while holding down the HOLD  
button decrements the flashing digit.  
Setting the Time Data  
67  
                 
5
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN or R-  
RUN, corresponding to the desired operating mode for  
the time code generator.  
4-5-3 Setting the User Bits  
By setting the user bits (up to 8 hexadecimal digits), you  
can record user information such as the date, time, or scene  
number on the time code track.  
The set user bit data will be recorded for both LTC and  
VITC.  
To set the user bits, proceed as follows:  
To store the user bit setting in memory  
The user bit setting (apart from the real time) is  
automatically retained in memory even when the power is  
turned off.  
4-5-4 Synchronizing the Time Code  
You can synchronize the internal time code generator of  
this camcorder with an external generator for the  
regeneration of an external time code. You can also  
synchronize the time code generators of other camcorders/  
VTRs with the internal generator of this camcorder.  
HOLD button  
RESET button  
1
4
2,5  
Connections for time code  
synchronization  
Connect both the reference video signal and the external  
time code as illustrated below.  
CUE IN  
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
3
Example 1: Synchronizing with an external time code  
Setting the user bits  
1
2
3
4
Set the DISPLAY switch to DATA.  
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET.  
Set the DATA DISPLAY switch to U-BIT.  
1)  
GENLOCK IN  
Reference video signal  
Set the user bits by using the SHIFT and ADVANCE  
buttons.  
SHIFT: Selects a digit to set. Each time you press the  
button, the flashing digit moves one column to the  
right. Pressing this button while holding down the  
HOLD button moves the flashing digit one to the  
left.  
External time code  
TC IN  
ADVANCE: Increments the value of the flashing  
digit. Pressing this button while holding down the  
HOLD button decrements the flashing digit.  
1) Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu, if GENLOCK is set to OFF.  
Hexadecimal digits A to F are displayed as follows:  
Hexadecimal  
Display  
A
B
C
D
E
F
A
b
C
d
E
F
To reset the user bit data to 00:00:00:00  
Press the RESET button.  
Setting the Time Data  
68  
         
This operation synchronizes the internal time code  
generator with the external time code. After about 10  
seconds, you can disconnect the external time code  
without losing the synchronization. However, there  
will be noise on the recorded image if you connect or  
disconnect the time code signal during recording.  
Example 2: Interconnecting a number of camcorders  
for time code synchronization  
TEST OUT  
Notes  
TC OUT  
Reference camcorder  
• When you finish the above procedure, the internal time  
code is immediately synchronized with the external time  
code and the counter display will show the value of the  
external time code. However, wait for a few seconds  
until the sync generator stabilizes before recording.  
• If the frequency of the reference video signal is not the  
same as the frame frequency of the camcorder, the  
camera cannot be correctly genlocked. In such a case, the  
internal time code is not correctly synchronized with the  
external time code.  
TC IN  
1)  
GENLOCK IN  
TC OUT  
TEST OUT  
1)  
GENLOCK IN  
TC IN  
TC OUT  
• When the GENLOCK ON/OFF item is set to “OFF” on  
the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu, the  
time code cannot be synchronized with the reference  
video signal. In this case, set the GENLOCK item to  
“ON” on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE  
menu.  
TEST OUT  
To another camcorder to be synchronized  
1) Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu, if GENLOCK is set to OFF.  
User bit settings during time code  
synchronization  
When the time code is synchronized, only the time data is  
synchronized with the external time code value. Therefore,  
the user bits can have their own settings for each  
camcorder.  
Procedure for time code synchronization  
To synchronize the time code, proceed as follows:  
To synchronize the user bits with external user bit data, set  
the EXT-LK UBIT item on the TIME CODE page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu to “EXT.”  
4
To release the time code synchronization  
First disconnect the external time code, then set the F-  
RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN.  
1
3
To change the power supply from the battery  
pack to an external power supply during time  
code synchronization  
2
Synchronizing the time code  
To maintain a continuous power supply, connect the  
external power supply to the DC IN connector before  
removing the battery pack. You may lose time code  
synchronization if you remove the battery pack first.  
1
2
3
4
5
Turn on the POWER switch.  
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to PRESET.  
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN.  
Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.  
Camera synchronization during time code  
synchronization  
During time code synchronization, the camera is  
genlocked to the reference video signal input from the  
GENLOCK IN connector.  
Supply a time code signal and a reference video signal  
complying with the SMPTE (for the DVW-970) or  
EBU (for the DVW-970P) standard and in proper  
phase relationship, to the TC IN connector and to the  
GENLOCK IN connector, respectively.  
Setting the Time Data  
69  
Menu Displays and  
Detailed Settings  
5
Chapter  
purpose of use and so on. The TOP menu allows you to  
select the desired submenus.  
5-1 Menu Organization  
and Operation  
To display the TOP menu screen  
While holding down the MENU knob, set the MENU ON/  
OFF switch from the OFF position to the ON position.  
<TOP MENU>  
5-1-1 Menu Organization  
USER  
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE  
ALL  
OPERATION  
PAINT  
MAINTENANCE  
FILE  
DIAGNOSIS  
The following shows the organization of menus that you  
can use to make various settings and adjustments.  
TOP menu  
1)  
2)  
USER submenu  
OUTPUT page  
TEST OUT page  
FUNCTION 1 page  
VF DISP 1 page  
VF DISP 2 page  
! LED page  
Note  
Depending on the internal switch settings, display of the  
TOP menu may be disabled.  
MARKER 1 page  
GAIN SW page  
VF SETTING page  
AUTO IRIS page  
SHOT ID page  
SHOT DISP page  
SET STATUS page  
LENS FILE page  
USER FILE page  
For details, ask your Sony service representative.  
Submenus selected in the TOP menu  
These are the following menus.  
• USER menu  
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE submenu  
ALL submenu  
This menu includes monitor output settings, viewfinder  
settings, and commonly used functions. This menu is  
normally displayed when the MENU ON/OFF switch is  
changed to ON.  
Just as with the USER  
submenu, each submenu  
is composed of pages. On  
these pages you can  
make various settings  
and adjustments. Some  
pages have a window for  
more settings. This  
• OPERATION submenu  
• PAINT submenu  
• USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu  
This menu allows you to add pages to or delete pages from  
the USER menu to suit your needs.  
• MAINTENANCE submenu  
• FILE submenu  
manual refers to these  
submenus as the menu.  
• DIAGNOSIS submenu  
• ALL menu  
This menu contains all items of the OPERATION menu,  
PAINT menu, MAINTENANCE menu, FILE menu and  
DIAGNOSIS menu.  
1) In this manual, the USER menu consisting of items and pages registered at  
the factory is used. You use the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu to add  
or delete pages according to how the camcorder is being used.  
2) This menu appears only when the CBK-SD01 is installed.  
• OPERATION menu  
For details, see “5-1-3 Editing the USER Menu” on page  
73.  
This menu contains items for changing settings according  
to conditions related to the subject when the camcorder is  
being operated.  
TOP menu  
The menus of the camcorder are composed of submenus  
classified into categories according to the frequency of use,  
Menu Organization and Operation  
70  
                 
• PAINT menu  
This menu contains items for making detailed image  
adjustments while using a waveform monitor to monitor  
the waveforms output by the camera. Support of a video  
engineer is usually required to use this menu. Although  
you can also use an external remote control panel or master  
setup unit to set the items on this menu, this menu is  
effective when using the camcorder by itself outdoors.  
• MAINTENANCE menu  
This menu contains items for performing camera  
maintenance operations, such as changing the system or  
using infrequently used “paint” items.  
CANCEL/PRST/  
ESCAPE switch  
• FILE menu  
This menu is for performing file operations, such as  
writing the reference file.  
MENU ON/OFF switch  
MENU knob  
Cover of the menu  
operating section  
• DIAGNOSIS menu  
This menu enables you to confirm the VTR status or  
identify a failed circuit board.  
Controls used for the basic use of the menu operations  
This section explains operations on the USER menu. But  
the operations are the same as those on menus other than  
the USER menu. Also, if the optional extension boards are  
not installed in your camcorder, some items on the USER  
menu pages are not displayed.  
Returning to the TOP menu from other  
menus  
There are two methods.  
• Align the b mark with “TOP” at the top right of the  
menu page, and press the MENU knob.  
• Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch down to the  
ESCAPE position repeatedly until the TOP menu  
appears.  
Proceed as follows:  
1
Switch the MENU ON/OFF switch from OFF to ON.  
A USER menu page normally appears.  
Example:  
U03 FUNCTION1  
5-1-2 Basic Menu Operations  
TURBO SW  
TURBO  
When you open the cover of the menu operating section,  
the MENU ON/OFF switch appears. If the MENU ON/  
OFF switch is set to ON, the menu is displayed on the  
viewfinder screen. Closing the cover automatically sets the  
MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
CACHE/INTVAL REC  
(For the DVW-970P, the DF/NDF item is not included.)  
If the USER menu has been used before, the last  
accessed page appears. In this case, go to step 2.  
If this is the first time the USER menu has been  
displayed, the CONTENTS page of the USER menu  
appears. In this case, follow the procedure below.  
1 Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the  
desired page number.  
Menu Organization and Operation  
71  
           
To decrease a setting value  
Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front  
of the camera.  
This indicates that the  
menu screen can be  
scrolled downwards.  
01.OUTPUT  
As turning the MENU knob, the setting increases or  
decreases one step by one step.  
If you turn the knob quickly, the numeric value  
changes rapidly. If you turn it slowly, you can make  
minute adjustments.  
02.TEST OUT  
03.FUNCTION1  
04.VF DISP 1  
05.VF DISP 2  
06.`!'LED  
This indicates that the  
menu screen can be  
scrolled upwards.  
07.MARKER  
08.GAIN SW  
09.VF SETTING  
10.AUTO IRIS  
b mark  
To toggle a setting on or off  
2 Press the MENU knob.  
Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise.  
Each turning operation of the knob toggles the ON and  
OFF settings.  
The selected page is displayed.  
Go to step 4.  
To cancel the setting/to reset the setting to the initial  
setting  
2
3
Turn the MENU knob until the desired page appears.  
Press the MENU knob.  
You can cancel the setting and reset it to its initial value  
(one set at the factory, or preset value) by pushing the  
CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to CANCEL/  
PRST before pushing the MENU knob in step 7.  
When the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch is set to  
CANCEL/PRST, the message CANCEL? appears. To  
cancel the previous setting, push the CANCEL/PRST/  
ESCAPE switch to CANCEL/PRST again.  
A b mark appears on the left of the item currently  
selected on the page.  
To reset the setting to the initial value, push the  
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch to CANCEL/PRST  
a third time. The message PRESET? appears. To reset  
to the initial setting, push the CANCEL/PRST/  
ESCAPE switch to CANCEL/PRST once more.  
4
5
Turn the move MENU knob to move the bmark to the  
The action of the CANCEL/PRST function differs for  
some setting items. Some items are only affected by  
PRST. Check the setting procedure for each item for  
more information.  
desired item.  
• Turning the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen  
from the front of the camera moves the b mark up  
continuously.  
• Turning the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the  
front of the camera moves the b mark down  
continuously.  
To interrupt changing the settings  
By setting the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF, the  
menu disappears from the screen. By setting the  
MENU ON/OFF switch to ON again, the values that  
were displayed when you interrupted the setting  
operations will reappear so you can continue making  
settings.  
Press the MENU knob.  
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
7
8
Press the MENU knob.  
The z mark returns to a b mark, and the ? mark  
returns to a z mark. The setting is confirmed.  
To continue setting other items in the same page,  
repeat steps from 4 to 7.  
To move to another page  
Proceed as follows:  
6
Turn the MENU knob to change the setting.  
To increase a setting value  
Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from  
the front of the camera.  
1
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the page  
number, then press the MENU knob.  
If the bmark is placed at a position other than the page  
Menu Organization and Operation  
72  
number, push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch  
to ESCAPE.  
E00 CONTENTS  
TOP  
01.EDIT PAGE  
02.USER 1  
03.USER 2  
04.USER 3  
05.USER 4  
06.USER 5  
07.USER 6  
08.USER 7  
09.USER 8  
10.USER 9  
EDIT  
EDIT  
EDIT  
EDIT  
EDIT  
EDIT  
EDIT  
EDIT  
EDIT  
A ? mark appears in front of the page number. The  
camcorder is now in page selecting mode.  
2
3
Turn the MENU knob until the desired page appears.  
Press the MENU knob when the desired page appears.  
If the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu has been  
used before, the last accessed page appears.  
To end menu operations  
You can end menu operations using the following two  
methods:  
• Turn the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
• Close the cover of the menu operating section. When you  
close the cover, the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to OFF  
automatically.  
The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen, and the  
display indicating the current status of the camcorder  
appears along the top and bottom of the screen (when the  
viewfinder DISPLAY switch is set to ON or the VF DISP  
item on the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu is set to  
“ON”).  
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU  
knob to move the b mark to one of USER 1 EDIT to  
USER 19 EDIT and ASSIGN SEL EDIT, then press  
the MENU knob to display the page.  
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob  
until the desired page appears, then press the MENU  
knob to select the page.  
Example: When you select the USER 2 EDIT page  
E02 USER 2 EDIT  
TOP  
For details of the viewfinder display, see “5-2-2 Selecting  
the Display Items” on page 79.  
5-1-3 Editing the USER Menu  
4
Move the b mark to the item to be added (this  
operation is unnecessary, if no item exists on the page  
as shown in the figure for step 3), then press the  
MENU knob.  
The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to  
configure a USER menu that consists only of pages and  
items that you need by adding, deleting or replacing the  
pages.  
The EDIT FUNCTION display appears.  
Adding a new page  
The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to add  
a new page to the USER menu.  
While the EDIT page contains factory-preset items, the  
USER 1 EDIT to USER 19 EDIT pages and the ASSIGN  
SEL EDIT page are all blank in their initial state. You can  
register up to 10 items, including blank lines, on each of  
these pages.  
EDIT FUNCTION  
INSERT  
MOVE  
ESC  
DELETE  
BLANK  
5
6
Move the b mark to “INSERT,” and press the MENU  
To add a new page, proceed as follows:  
knob.  
1
2
While holding down the MENU knob, move the  
MENU ON/OFF switch from the OFF position to the  
ON position.  
The page for the last added item appears.  
P25 BLACK/FLARE  
ESC  
MASTER BLACK  
R BLACK  
B BLACK  
MASTER FLARE  
R FLARE  
G FLARE  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ON  
The TOP menu appears.  
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “USER  
B FLARE  
FLARE  
MENU CUSTOMIZE,” then press the MENU knob.  
TEST OUT SELECT :  
ENC  
If this is the first time the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE  
menu has been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the  
menu appears.  
Add the items.  
Menu Organization and Operation  
73  
 
1 Turn the MENU knob until the page that has the  
The previously displayed page appears again.  
desired items appears, then press the MENU knob.  
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the  
position where you want to move the item, then press  
the MENU knob.  
2 Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the  
desired item, then press the MENU knob.  
E02 USER 1 EDIT  
WHITE<B>CH  
TOP  
AWB  
OFF  
The USER 2 EDIT page appears again, displaying the  
newly added item.  
:
:
TEST OUT MENU  
OFFSET WHITE <A>:  
OFF  
3200  
0
7
Add the remaining items by repeating steps 4 to 6.  
WARM COOL  
COLOR FINE  
MASTER BLACK  
<A>:  
<A>:  
:
0
You can add up to 10 items on one page.  
To delete items from a page by using the  
CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch  
You can delete items from any of the USER 1 EDIT to  
USER 19 EDIT pages.  
The item selected in step 1 moves to the position that  
you selected in step 3.  
In the above example, “MASTER BLACK” is moved  
to the top and the other items are moved down one line.  
Proceed as follows:  
To insert a blank line  
You can insert a blank line above the selected item.  
Proceed as follows:  
1
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item  
to be deleted.  
Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to  
CANCEL/PRST.  
1
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item  
above which you want to insert a blank line.  
The message “PRESET DATA OK?” appears.  
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.  
3
Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to  
CANCEL/PRST again.  
2
Select “BLANK,” and press the MENU knob.  
The item is deleted.  
The previously displayed page appears again, and a  
blank line is inserted above the specified item.  
To delete items from a page by using the menu  
Proceed as follows:  
Note  
You cannot insert a blank line on a page where 10 items  
have already been registered.  
1
2
Move the b mark to the item to be deleted, and press  
the MENU knob.  
Adding/deleting/replacing pages  
You can add a new page to the USER menu, delete a page  
from the USER menu or replace pages, using the EDIT  
PAGE of the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu.  
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.  
Select “DELETE,” and press the MENU knob.  
The previously displayed page appears again, and the  
message “DELETE OK? YES b NO” appears at the  
upper right.  
To add a page  
Proceed as follows:  
3
To delete, turn the MENU knob to move the bmark to  
1
While holding down the MENU knob, move the  
MENU ON/OFF switch from the OFF position to the  
ON position.  
“YES,” and press the MENU knob.  
To change the order of the items on a page  
Proceed as follows:  
The TOP menu appears.  
1
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item  
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “USER  
to be replaced, then press the MENU knob.  
MENU CUSTOMIZE,” then press the MENU knob.  
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.  
If this is the first time the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE  
menu has been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the  
menu appears. If the menu has been used before, the  
last accessed page appears.  
Select MOVE, then press the MENU knob.  
Menu Organization and Operation  
74  
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU  
knob to move the bmark to “EDIT PAGE,” then press  
the MENU knob to display the EDIT PAGE screen.  
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob  
until the EDIT PAGE screen appears, then press the  
MENU knob to select the page.  
2
3
Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to  
CANCEL/PRST.  
The message “DELETE PAGE OK?” appears.  
E01 EDIT PAGE  
DELETE PAGE OK ?  
01.OUTPUT  
02.TEST OUT  
03.FUNCTION 1  
04.VF DISP 1  
05.VF DISP 2  
06.'!'LED  
07.MARKER 1  
08.GAIN SW  
09.VF SETTING  
10.AUTO IRIS  
EDIT PAGE  
E01 EDIT PAGE  
TOP  
01.OUTPUT  
02.TEST OUT  
03.FUNCTION 1  
04.VF DISP 1  
05.VF DISP 2  
06.'!'LED  
07.MARKER 1  
08.GAIN SW  
09.VF SETTING  
10.AUTO IRIS  
Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to  
CANCEL/PRST again.  
In the above example, the VF DISP 1 page is deleted.  
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to where  
you want to add the page, then press the MENU knob.  
To delete a page by using the menu  
Proceed as follows:  
The EDIT FUNCTION display appears.  
1
On the EDIT PAGE screen of the USER MENU  
CUSTOMIZE menu, move the b mark to the page to  
be deleted, and press the MENU knob.  
EDIT FUNCTION  
INSERT  
MOVE  
DELETE  
BLANK  
ESC  
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.  
2
3
Select DELETE, and press the MENU knob.  
The previously displayed page appears again, and the  
message “DELETE OK?” appears at the upper right.  
5
6
Select INSERT, and press the MENU knob.  
The selection screen appears.  
To delete, turn the menu knob to move the b mark to  
CONTENTS  
ESC  
“YES,” and press the MENU knob.  
01.USER PAGE 1  
02.USER PAGE 2  
03.USER PAGE 3  
04.USER PAGE 4  
05.USER PAGE 5  
06.USER PAGE 6  
07.USER PAGE 7  
08.USER PAGE 8  
09.USER PAGE 9  
To change the order of pages  
Proceed as follows:  
1
Display the EDIT PAGE screen of the USER MENU  
CUSTOMIZE menu. Turn the MENU knob to move  
the b mark to the page that you want to move.  
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the  
desired page, then press the MENU knob.  
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.  
This adds the number and name of the selected page  
above the item selected in step 4.  
2
3
Select MOVE, then press the MENU knob.  
The EDIT PAGE screen appears again.  
To cancel adding a page  
Before pressing the MENU knob in step 6, turn the MENU  
knob to move the b mark to “ESC” at the top right of the  
screen, then press the MENU knob.  
Turn MENU knob to move the b mark to the position  
to where you want to move the page selected in step 1.  
E01 EDIT PAGE  
PUSH TO PAGE INSERT  
01.OUTPUT  
The EDIT PAGE screen appears again.  
02.TEST OUT  
03.FUNCTION 1  
04.VF DISP 1  
05.'!'LED  
06.MARKER 1  
07.GAIN SW  
To delete a page by using the CANCEL/PRST /  
ESCAPE switch  
Proceed as follows:  
08.VF SETTING  
09.AUTO IRIS  
1
Open the EDIT PAGE and turn the MENU knob to  
move the b mark to the page to be deleted.  
4
Press the MENU knob.  
Menu Organization and Operation  
75  
The page selected in step 1 is moved to the position  
selected in step 3.  
In the above example, “AUTO IRIS” moves to the “04”  
position and the “VF DISP 1” and following items  
move down one line.  
Menu Organization and Operation  
76  
5-2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen  
The viewfinder screen displays not only the video picture  
but also characters and messages indicating the camcorder  
settings and operating status, a center marker, a safety zone  
marker, etc.  
When the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to OFF and the  
DISPLAY switch is set to ON, the items for which an  
“ON” setting was made in the VF DISP1 page of the USER  
menu or with related switches are displayed at the top and  
bottom of the screen. The messages that give details of the  
settings and adjustment progress and results can also be  
made to appear for about 3 seconds while settings are  
being changed, during adjustment, and after adjustment.  
For information about the display item selection, see “5-2-  
2 Selecting the Display Items” on page 79.  
For information about setting change and adjustment  
progress messages, see “5-2-3 Display Modes and Setting  
Change Confirmation/Adjustment Progress Messages” on  
page 80.  
For information about marker display, see “5-2-4 Setting  
the Marker Display” on page 81.  
5-2-1 Layout of the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen  
All items that can be displayed on the viewfinder screen  
are shown below.  
a Extender  
b Zoom position  
c Color temperature  
d UHF wireless microphone reception level  
e DC IN / battery voltage or remaining capacity  
w 16:9 mode  
16:9  
DVW-970  
EM  
f Essence mark indication  
g * indicator  
v Model name and serial number  
u Date and time  
h 16:9 mode recording indicator  
t ID number  
AWB  
i Setting change and adjustment progress  
message display area  
s Time code  
r D5600 indication  
j Operation/error message display area  
D5600  
1
2
k Iris setting/auto iris override  
l Remaining tape  
m Audio level  
n Shutter speed  
o Gain  
p White balance memory  
q Filter  
7, 8, w;, wa and ws appear only when color bars are displayed.  
Status display on the viewfinder  
a Extender  
“EX” is displayed when a lens extender is used.  
b Zoom position  
This indicator appears only when you use a lens that has a  
zoom position display function. It indicates the  
1)  
approximate position of the variator of the zoom lens,  
between wide angle and telephoto.  
1) Variator  
A group of lenses that are moved to adjust the focal length.  
Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen  
77  
     
c Color temperature  
This indicates the currently selected color temperature.  
Also, the auto iris override is displayed using bars which  
appear in the upper and lower parts to the left of the F  
number respectively.  
d UHF wireless microphone reception level  
This indicates reception level of the wireless microphone  
when the UHF wireless microphone is attached, using four  
x which appear at the right of “W.” When four x are lit,  
the receiving condition is good.  
For details, see “4-3 Changing the Reference Value for  
Automatic Iris Adjustment” on page 62.  
l Remaining tape  
This indicator indicates the remaining tape recording time  
e DC IN / battery voltage or remaining capacity  
This shows the battery voltage or remaining capacity of an  
internal battery pack.  
When the power is supplied from an AC adaptor connected  
to the DC IN connector, “DC IN” appears.  
When the DISP BATT REMAIN item is set to “INT” on  
the VF DISP 2 page of the USER menu, the battery voltage  
is not indicated. However, when the Anton Bauer  
intelligent battery system or the BP-GL65/GL95/L60S  
battery pack is used, the remaining battery capacity is  
automatically detected and indicated as a percentage even  
when the DISP BATT REMAIN item is set to “OFF.” The  
indicated value changes in steps of 10%.  
(in minutes) of the VTR.  
Examples of remaining disc recording time indication  
Indication  
F – 30  
Remaining disc recording time  
Full to 30 minutes  
30 to 25 minutes  
25 to 20 minutes  
20 to 15 minutes  
15 to 10 minutes  
10 to 5 minutes  
30 – 25  
25 – 20  
20 – 15  
15 – 10  
10 – 5  
5 – 0  
5 to 2 minutes  
5 – 0 (flashing)  
2 to 0 minute  
• Until the remaining battery capacity is reduced to 40%,  
the indications MAX, 90%, 80%...40% are displayed for  
3 seconds in the viewfinder each time the remaining  
battery capacity reduces by 10%.  
m Audio level  
These indicate the level of audio channel 1 and channel 2.  
The peak indication of the VTR level meter is related as  
follows to the audio level when an 1-kHz sine wave is  
input.  
• When the remaining battery capacity is less than 40%,  
the indication is displayed all the time.  
1)  
• When the remaining battery capacity is less than 10% ,  
the indication flashes. When the remaining battery  
capacity is reduced further, the LOW indication flashes.  
Audio channel 1  
level indicator  
1) This value can be set to either 10% or 20% on the FUNCTION 2 page of  
the OPERATION menu.  
1
Audio channel 2  
2
level indicator  
f Essence mark indication  
This appears when an essence mark has been recorded.  
VTR level meter  
indicator  
g * indicator  
This flashes when the color bars are displayed and is  
recorded together with the color bars.  
n Shutter speed  
This indicates the shutter speed or the shutter mode.  
However, if the SHUTTER selector is set to OFF, nothing  
is displayed.  
1/100 (DVW-970) or 1/60 (DVW-970P), 1/125, 1/250,  
1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000: Shutter speed (in seconds) in  
standard mode  
h 16:9 mode recording indicator  
This indicates recording in the 16:9 mode. This indicator is  
recorded together with the color bars.  
i Setting change and adjustment progress message  
display area  
ECS: ECS mode  
EVS: EVS mode  
1F to 8F, 16F: Number of frames in SLS mode  
For details, see “5-2-3 Display Modes and Setting Change  
Confirmation/Adjustment Progress Messages” on page 80.  
o Gain  
This indicates the gain of the video amplifier, as set by the  
GAIN selector.  
j Operation/error message display area  
For details, see “Operation/error messages” on page 130.  
p White balance memory  
This indicates the currently selected white balance  
automatic adjustment memory.  
k Iris setting/auto iris override  
This indicates the f-stop (iris setting) of the lens.  
A: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to A.  
B: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to B.  
Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen  
78  
 
P: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST  
or when the preset button on the RM-B150/B750 has  
been pushed.  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
The last accessed menu page appears on the  
viewfinder screen.  
T: Displayed when ATW is being used.  
Turn the MENU knob until the VF DISP 1 or VF DISP  
2 page appears, and press the MENU knob to select the  
page.  
q Filter  
This indicates the currently selected filter types.  
r D5600 indication  
The current setting is displayed on the right of each  
item.  
This appears when the electric 5600K color temperature  
filter function has been activated on the FUNCTION 2  
page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
VF DISP 1 page  
U04 VF DISP 1  
s Time code  
VF DISP  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
ON  
3
This indicates the time code, user bits or other information  
selected by the DISPLAY switch and DATA DISPLAY  
switch settings.  
VF DISP MODE  
DISP EXTENDER  
DISP FILTER  
DISP WHITE  
DISP GAIN  
DISP SHUTTER  
DISP AUDIO  
DISP TAPE  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
For more information, see “Relationships between the  
DISPLAY switch and DATA DISPLAY switch settings and  
the time counter displays” on page 33.  
DISP IRIS  
You can select the following items to be displayed on  
the screen on the VF DISP 1 or VF DISP 2 page.  
t ID number  
This indicates the ID number selected from ID 1 to ID 4.  
The ID number is recorded together with the color bars.  
VF DISP 1 page  
Item  
Description  
u Date and time  
VF DISP  
Turning on or off the viewfinder  
display  
This indicates the date and time of recording, which are  
recorded together with the color bars.  
1)  
2)  
VF DISP MODE  
Selecting the display mode  
v Model name and serial number  
This indicates the model name and serial number of the  
camcorder, which are recorded together with the color  
bars.  
DISP EXTENDER  
DISP FILTER  
DISP WHITE  
Extender indicator  
Types of the ND and CC filters  
White balance memory indicator  
Gain indicator  
DISP GAIN  
w 16:9 mode  
This indicates the 16:9 mode.  
DISP SHUTTER  
Shutter speed and ECS mode  
indicator  
DISP AUDIO  
DISP TAPE  
DISP IRIS  
Audio level indicator  
Remaining tape indicator  
Iris opening indicator  
5-2-2 Selecting the Display Items  
To select the items to be displayed on the viewfinder screen  
from the VF DISP 1 and VF DISP 2 pages of the USER  
menu, turn on or off the indication next to each item.  
1) The viewfinder display can be also turned on or off by using the  
DISPLAY switch on the viewfinder.  
2) For detailed information on the display mode, see “5-2-3 Display  
Modes and Setting Change Confirmation/Adjustment Progress  
Messages” on page 80.  
To select the items to be displayed on the viewfinder  
screen, proceed as follows:  
VF DISP 2 page  
Item  
Description  
DISP ZOOM  
Zoom position indicator  
Displays the color temperature.  
DISP COLOR  
TEMP.  
DISP BATT  
REMAIN  
Displays the battery voltage/  
remaining capacity of an internal  
battery pack or an external battery  
connected to the DC IN  
connector.  
CANCEL/PRST /  
ESCAPE switch  
1)  
MENU knob  
MENU ON/OFF switch  
Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen  
79  
       
Item  
Description  
5-2-3 Display Modes and Setting  
Change Confirmation/Adjustment  
Progress Messages  
DISP DC IN  
Displayed when the power is  
supplied from an external battery  
connected to the DC IN  
connector.  
DISP 16:9/4:3 ID  
Displays the 16:9/4:3 mode  
indicator.  
You can limit or suppress the messages that give details of  
setting changes and adjustment progress and results by  
setting a display mode.  
The conditions under which messages are displayed and  
their correspondence with the display mode are as follows:  
DISP WRR RF LVL Displays the reception level of the  
wireless microphone.  
DISP E. MARK IND Displayed when an essence mark  
has been recorded.  
Setting change confirmation/adjustment progress messages  
and display modes  
DISP TIME CODE Displays the time code.  
Y: Message is displayed.  
DISP VIDEO RATE Displays the recording video  
signal rate.  
N: Message is not displayed.  
Message  
display  
Message  
Display  
1) When an Anton Bauer Intelligent Battery System or the BP-GL65/  
GL95/L60S battery pack is used, the setting of this item determines  
the display as follows:  
INT: The remaining battery capacity is shown as a percentage when  
there is a change, and when the capacity is low.  
AUTO: The remaining battery capacity is shown as a percentage,  
except that when this is impossible the battery voltage appears.  
VOLT: The battery voltage is shown.  
mode setting  
condition  
1
2
3
When the filter  
selection has  
been changed  
ND : n, CC : m  
(where n = 1, 2, 3, 4,  
m = A, B, C, D)  
N
N
Y
When the gain  
setting has been –3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB,  
changed  
GAIN : n (where n =  
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item  
9 dB,12 dB, 18 dB, 24 dB,  
30 dB, 36 dB, 42 dB,  
48 dB)  
you want to set, and press the MENU knob.  
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
When the  
setting of the  
WHITE BAL  
switch has been or ATW : RUN  
changed  
WHITE : n  
(where n = A CH, B CH,  
PRESET)  
Turn the MENU knob to select whether the selected  
item should appear in the viewfinder display (the  
“ON” setting), or not appear (the “OFF” setting), and  
press the MENU knob.  
When the  
DCC : ON (or OFF)  
OUTPUT/DCC  
selector has  
been set to DCC  
ON or OFF  
The z mark returns to a b mark, and the ? mark  
returns to a z mark.  
When the  
shutter speed  
and mode  
SS : 1/100 (DVW-970) or  
1/60 (DVW-970P)  
(or 1/125, 1/250, 1/500,  
Note that pressing the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE  
switch to CANCEL/PRST on this page has no effect.  
setting has been 1/1000, 1/2000, ECS,  
1)  
SLS)  
changed  
5
6
To set another item to “ON” or “OFF,” repeat steps 3  
and 4.  
When the black E.g. AWB : OK  
or white balance  
N
Y
Y
has been  
adjusted  
2)  
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
1) This is also displayed for about 3 seconds when the SHUTTER selector is  
set to ON.  
2) For details, see “4-1 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance”  
on page 56.  
The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen, and  
the display indicating the current status of the  
camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the  
screen.  
Changing the display mode  
The currently set display mode appears on the VF DISP 1  
page of the USER menu. To change it, proceed as follows:  
1
Follow steps 1 and 2 in “5-2-2 Selecting the Display  
Items” (page 79), until the VF DISP 1 page of the  
USER menu appears on the screen.  
Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen  
80  
   
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “VF  
Item  
Description  
DISPLAY MODE,” and press the MENU knob.  
MARKER  
CENTER  
Not to display all markers, set to OFF.  
To display the center marker, set to ON.  
To display the safety zone, set to ON.  
The b mark on the left of “VF DISPLAY MODE”  
changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the  
setting changes to a ? mark.  
SAFETY  
ZONE  
SAFETY  
AREA  
To select the safety zone range (80%,  
90%, 92.5% or 95%), when SAFETY  
ZONE is set to ON.  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob until the desired display mode  
appears, and press the MENU knob.  
The z mark returns to a b mark, and the ? mark  
ASPECT  
To display the aspect marker, set to ON.  
returns to a z mark.  
ASPECT  
SELECT  
To select the type (4:3, 13:9, 14:9) of  
the aspect marker.  
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
ASPECT  
To make the areas out of the selected  
aspect marker dimmer, set to ON.  
1)  
MASK  
ASPECT  
MASK LVL  
To set the mask level (1/2, 1/4 or 1/8),  
when the ASPECT MASK is set to ON.  
100%  
MARKER  
To display the effective pixel area, set to  
ON.  
5-2-4 Setting the Marker Display  
1) The ASPECT MASK item is for processing the signal to be output to  
the viewfinder. When R, G, or B is selected for the TEST OUT  
SELECT item from the menu, the same video signal is output to the  
viewfinder and the TEST OUT connector. Thus, when the ASPECT  
MASK item is set to “ON” with R/G/B selected, the masked video  
signal is output to the TEST OUT connector.  
Use the MARKER 1 page of the USER menu to switch the  
display of the center and safety zone markers on or off and  
to select whether the area indicated by the safety zone  
marker is 80%, 90% or 100% of the screen area.  
3
Perform the settings for each item.  
1 Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the  
item you want to set, and press MENU knob.  
The bmark on the left of the selected item changes  
to the z mark, and the z mark on the left of the  
setting changes to a ? mark.  
CANCEL/PRST /  
ESCAPE switch  
MENU knob  
MENU ON/OFF switch  
2 Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and  
press the MENU knob.  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
The z mark on the left of the selected item returns  
to a bmark, and the ? mark on the left of the setting  
returns to a z mark.  
The last accessed menu page appears on the  
viewfinder screen.  
Turn the MENU knob until the MARKER 1 page  
appears, and press the MENU knob to select the page.  
4
5
To continue setting other items, repeat step 3.  
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
The current setting of each item appears on the right of  
the item.  
MARKER 1 page  
The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen, and  
the display indicating the current status of the  
camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the  
screen.  
U07 MARKER 1  
TOP  
OFF  
MARKER  
:
CENTER  
:
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
90%  
OFF  
4:3  
OFF  
1/4  
OFF  
SAFETY ZONE  
SAFETY AREA  
ASPECT  
ASPECT SELECT  
ASPECT MASK  
ASPECT MASK LVL :  
100% MARKER  
:
5-2-5 Setting the Viewfinder  
Use the VF SETTING page of the USER menu to select  
items related to the viewfinder.  
You can set the following items on the MARKER 1  
page.  
Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen  
81  
           
Proceed as follows:  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item  
you want to set, and press the MENU knob.  
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and press  
the MENU knob.  
CANCEL/PRST /  
ESCAPE switch  
The z mark returns to a b mark, and the ? mark  
MENU knob  
MENU ON/OFF switch  
returns to a z mark.  
5
6
To continue setting other items, repeat steps 3 and 4.  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
The last accessed menu page appears on the  
viewfinder screen.  
Turn the MENU knob until the VF SETTING page  
appears, and press the MENU knob to select the page  
The menu disappears from the screen, and the display  
indicating the current status of the camcorder appears  
along the top and bottom of the screen.  
The current setting of each item appears on the right of  
the item.  
VF SETTING page  
5-2-6 Recording Shot Data  
U09 VF SETTING  
Superimposed on the Color Bars  
ZEBRA  
ZEBRA SELECT  
:
:
OFF  
1
In the SHOT DISP page of the USER menu, you can select  
which shot data is recorded superimposed on the color  
bars. You can also select which of the shot IDs (1 to 4) set  
in the SHOT DATA page is recorded superimposed on the  
picture.  
ZEBRA1 DET.LEVEL:  
ZEBRA1 APT.LEVEL:  
ZEBRA2 DET.LEVEL:  
70%  
10%  
100%  
VF DETAIL LEVEL :  
OFF  
VF ASPECT  
:
AUTO  
Item  
Description  
Proceed as follows:  
1)  
ZEBRA  
Turns the zebra display on or off.  
ZEBRA SELECT  
Selects ZEBRA 1, ZEBRA 2 or  
BOTH.  
ZEBRA 1 DET. LVL Adjusts the level of the zebra 1  
(factory setting: 70%) display.  
ZEBRA 1 APT. LVL Adjusts the aperture level of the  
zebra 1 display (1 to 10 to 20).  
CANCEL/PRST/  
ESCAPE switch  
ZEBRA 2 DET. LVL Adjusts the level of the zebra 2  
(factory setting: 100%) display.  
MENU knob  
MENU ON/OFF switch  
VF DETAIL LEVEL Adjusts the sharpness of the  
2)  
viewfinder.  
Turns the VF detail function on or  
off and adjusts the level.  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
VF ASPECT  
Selects the viewfinder aspect ratio  
The last accessed menu page appears on the  
viewfinder screen.  
3)  
(AUTO/16:9).  
1) When you use the viewfinder which is not equipped with the ZEBRA  
switch, turns the display on or off using this item. When you use the  
viewfinder with the ZEBRA switch, the most recent operation of the  
ZEBRA switch and this menu operation is effective.  
2) The sharpness setting at the viewfinder does not affect the recorded  
image.  
Turn the MENU knob until the SHOT DISP page  
appears, and press the MENU knob to select the page.  
The current setting of each item appears on the right of  
the item.  
3) When the VF ASPECT item is set to “AUTO,” this is linked to the  
16:9/4:3 selection on the FORMAT page.  
Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen  
82  
       
SHOT DISP page  
5-2-7 Setting the Shot ID  
U12 SHOT DISP  
SHOT DATE  
SHOT TIME  
SHOT MODEL NAME :  
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
On the SHOT ID page of the USER menu, you can set a  
shot ID of up to 12 alphanumeric characters, spaces, and  
symbols.  
SHOT SERIAL NO  
SHOT ID SEL  
SHOT 16:9 ID  
:
:
:
SHOT BLINK CHARA:  
When the OUTPUT/DCC switch is set to BARS, DCC  
OFF, this shot ID is output with the color bar signal. The  
shot ID comprises ID1 to ID4, and the setting can be  
changed using the SHOT DISP page of the USER menu.  
You can select the SHOT ID to be recorded superimposed  
on the color bars on the SHOT DISP page.  
Item  
Description  
SHOT DATE  
Selects whether or not the shot date is  
superimposed (ON or OFF).  
SHOT TIME  
Selects whether or not shot time is  
superimposed (ON or OFF).  
Note  
When the menu is displayed, the shot ID is not displayed  
even if the color bar signal is output.  
SHOTMODEL Selects whether or not the model name  
NAME is superimposed (ON or OFF).  
SHOTSERIAL Selects whether or not the serial  
NO number is superimposed (ON or OFF).  
To set the shot ID, proceed as follows:  
SHOT ID SEL Selects whether or not the shot ID set  
1)  
on the SHOT ID page is  
superimposed (1 to 4 or OFF).  
SHOT 16:9 ID Selects whether or not the 16:9 mode  
indicator is superimposed (ON or OFF).  
SHOT BLINK Selects whether or not the blinking * is  
CHARA  
superimposed (ON or OFF).  
CANCEL/PRST /  
ESCAPE switch  
1) To carry out superimposed recording, select the SHOT ID number (1  
to 4). Not to carry out superimposed recording, select “OFF.”  
MENU knob  
MENU ON/OFF switch  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
you want to set, and press MENU knob.  
The last accessed menu page appears on the screen.  
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
Turn the MENU knob until the SHOT ID page  
appears, and press the MENU knob to select the page.  
Turn the MENU knob to select whether or not to  
record the selected item superimposed on the color  
bars, and press the MENU knob.  
SHOT ID page  
U11 SHOT ID  
TOP  
ID-1 : ssssssssssss  
ID-2 : ssssssssssss  
ID-3 : ssssssssssss  
ID-4 : ssssssssssss  
The z mark on returns to a b mark, and the ? mark  
returns to a z mark.  
5
6
To continue setting other items, repeat steps 3 and 4.  
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the ID  
(one of ID-1 to ID-4) you want to set, and press the  
MENU knob.  
Carrying out superimposed recording  
To actually record the items selected for superimposed  
recording on the SHOT DISP page, set the OUTPUT/DCC  
switch to BARS, DCC OFF.  
The items selected for superimposed recording appear on  
the screen and are recorded superimposed on the color  
bars.  
A x mark appears over the first character position in  
the string, and characters can now be input.  
U11 SHOT ID  
ID-1 :?  
TOP  
x
ID-2 : ssssssssssss  
ID-3 : ssssssssssss  
ID-4 : ssssssssssss  
!#$%&'()*+,-./012345678  
9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP  
QRSTUVWXYZ[Y]abcdefghijk  
lmnopqrstuvwxyz~  
INS DEL RET  
ESC END  
Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen  
83  
       
4
Enter or change the shot ID.  
U11 SHOT ID  
TOP  
ID-1 : CM 015  
When you are entering the whole shot ID, go to step  
2.  
ID-2 : ssssssssssss  
ID-3 : ssssssssssss  
ID-4 : ssssssssssss  
Space inserted  
!#$%&'()*+,-./012345678  
9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP  
QRSTUVWXYZ[Y]abcdefghijk  
lmnopqrstuvwxyz~  
1 Turn the MENU knob to move the x mark to the  
character which you want to change, then press the  
MENU knob.  
INS DEL RET  
ESC END  
To delete a character  
A character table appears.  
In step 4 of the procedure for setting the shot ID, move the  
x mark over “DEL,” and press the MENU knob.  
This deletes the character under the x mark in the shot ID  
row.  
To cancel deleting the character, move the x mark over  
“RET,” and press the MENU knob.  
U11 SHOT ID  
ID-1 :?  
ID-2 : ssssssssssss  
ID-3 : ssssssssssss  
ID-4 : ssssssssssss  
TOP  
x
!#$%&'()*+,-./012345678  
9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP  
QRSTUVWXYZ[Y]abcdefghijk  
lmnopqrstuvwxyz~  
INS DEL RET  
ESC END  
To cancel entering or changing shot ID  
Before executing step 6 of the procedure for setting the  
shot ID, move the b mark to “ESC” at the top right of the  
screen, then press the MENU knob or push the CANCEL/  
PRST / ESCAPE switch down to ESCAPE.  
2 Turn the MENU knob until the x mark moves to  
the character position that you want to select, then  
press the MENU knob.  
This cancels all changes, and returns to the SHOT ID page.  
Example: To input “+”  
U11 SHOT ID  
TOP  
ID-1 :?  
+
5-2-8 Displaying the Status  
Confirmation Windows  
ID-2 : ssssssssssss  
ID-3 : ssssssssssss  
ID-4 : ssssssssssss  
!#$%&'()*+,-./012345678  
9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP  
QRSTUVWXYZ[Y]abcdefghijk  
lmnopqrstuvwxyz~  
You can confirm the settings or status of the camcorder on  
the screen by displaying the following three windows.  
• ABNORMAL <!> window  
INS DEL RET  
ESC END  
• FUNCTION window  
• AUDIO STATUS window  
5
6
Repeat step 4 for each of the remaining characters.  
When the input is complete, turn the MENU knob to  
move the x mark over “END,” then press the MENU  
knob.  
Indications on the windows  
ABNORMAL <!> window  
This ends the input, and returns to the original SHOT  
ID page.  
ABNORMAL<!>  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
!GAIN  
!SHUTTER  
WHT PRESET : ON  
:
:
ON  
ON  
3dB  
OFF  
WB  
To insert a space  
ATW RUN  
EXTENDER  
!FILTER  
:
:
ON  
ON  
: OFF  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
1B  
Proceed as follows:  
OVERRIDE  
:
O
1
In step 4 above, move the x mark over “INS,” and  
press the MENU knob.  
U11 SHOT ID  
TOP  
This window allows you to confirm why the  
indicator lights.  
You can use the '!' LED page of the USER menu to set  
whether or not the (warning) indicator lights.  
(warning)  
ID-1 : CM015  
ID-2 : ssssssssssss  
ID-3 : ssssssssssss  
ID-4 : ssssssssssss  
!#$%&'()*+,-./012345678  
9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP  
QRSTUVWXYZ[Y]abcdefghijk  
lmnopqrstuvwxyz~  
Move the x mark  
over “INS.”  
INS DEL RET  
ESC END  
2
Move the x mark over “RET,” then press the MENU  
knob.  
Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen  
84  
       
FUNCTION window  
FUNCTION  
FORMAT:  
I
ASSIGN<1> ATW <2> OFF  
<T>TURBO  
ZEBRA :OFF SELECT:  
1
10%  
DET  
DET2 100%  
P.CACHE  
70%  
APT:  
:
OFF: 0SEC  
- Actual State ---------  
REAR BNC:OFF  
This window allows you to confirm the assigned function  
of the ASSIGN 1/2 switches, ON/OFF of the Picture  
Cache function, and ON/OFF of the output of the VIDEO  
OUT connector.  
By pushing the STATUS ON/SEL / OFF  
switch up to ON/SEL, the confirmation  
window appears.  
Each time you push this switch up to  
ON/SEL, the window switches. After 10  
seconds, the window disappears  
automatically.  
AUDIO STATUS window  
AUDIO STATUS  
DF  
To make the window disappear  
promptly after displaying the window,  
push this switch down to OFF.  
CH1:FRONT  
CH2:REAR  
CH3:WIRELES  
CH4:WIRELES  
CH1:  
CH2:  
CH3:  
CH4:  
Disabling display of the status  
confirmation windows  
This window allows you to confirm the following items  
related to audio.  
Proceed as follows:  
• DF/NDF setting (only for the DVW-970)  
• Type of input signal to audio channels 1 to 4  
• Input level of audio channels 1 to 4  
You can use the SET STATUS page of the USER menu to  
set whether or not the status confirmation windows are  
displayed.  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
The last accessed menu page appears on the  
viewfinder screen.  
Turn the MENU knob until the SET STATUS page  
appears, and press the MENU knob to select the page.  
Displaying the status confirmation  
windows  
You can use the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch as the  
STATUS ON/SEL / OFF switch when the MENU ON/OFF  
switch is set to OFF (when the cover of the menu operating  
section is closed, OFF is automatically selected).  
The current setting of each item appears on the right of  
the item.  
SET STATUS page  
U13 SET STATUS  
STATUS ABNORMAL :  
STATUS FUNCTION :  
ON  
ON  
ON  
STATUS AUDIO  
:
Item  
Description  
STATUS  
Selects whether or not the ABNORMAL  
ABNORMAL window is displayed (ON or OFF).  
STATUS  
FUNCTION  
Selects whether or not the FUNCTION  
window is displayed (ON or OFF).  
STATUS  
AUDIO  
Selects whether or not the STATUS  
AUDIO window is displayed (ON or  
OFF).  
Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen  
85  
     
GENLOCK page  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item  
you want to set, and press MENU knob.  
M16 GENLOCK  
GENLOCK  
RETURN VIDEO  
:
:
ON  
OFF  
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
GL H PHASE  
GL SC PHASE  
:
:
0
0
180  
GL SC 0/180 SEL :  
Turn the MENU knob to select whether or not to  
display the selected window, then press the MENU  
knob.  
4
Carry out setting operations as follows:  
The z mark returns to a b mark, and the ? mark  
1 Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
returns to a z mark.  
“GENLOCK,” and press the MENU knob.  
5
6
To continue setting other windows, repeat steps 3 and  
4.  
The bmark on the left of “GENLOCK” changes to  
a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the  
GENLOCK setting changes to a ? mark.  
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
2 Turn the MENU knob until “OFF” appears, then  
press the MENU knob.  
The z mark returns to a b mark, and the ? mark  
5-2-9 Confirming the Image of the  
Return Video Signal in the  
Viewfinder  
returns to a z mark, and the setting is executed.  
3 Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
“RETURN VIDEO,” and press the MENU knob.  
You can set whether or not to see the image of the return  
video signal in the viewfinder, using the GENLOCK page  
of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
The b mark changes to a z mark, and the z mark  
changes to a ? mark.  
4 Turn the MENU knob until “ON” appears, then  
Proceed as follows:  
press the MENU knob.  
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON while holding  
down the MENU knob.  
The z mark returns to a b mark, and the ? mark  
returns to a z mark, and the setting is executed.  
The TOP menu appears.  
5
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
“MAINTENANCE,” then press the MENU knob.  
To see the image of the return video signal on the  
viewfinder screen  
Hold down the RET switch on the lens. The image of the  
return video signal input to the GENLOCK IN connector  
is displayed on the viewfinder screen while you are  
holding down the RET switch.  
If this is the first time the MAINTENANCE menu has  
been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu appears.  
If the menu has been used before, the last accessed  
page appears.  
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU  
knob to move the b mark to “GENLOCK,” then press  
the MENU knob to display the GENLOCK page.  
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob  
until the GENLOCK page appears, then press the  
MENU knob to select the page.  
When the return video function is assigned to the ASSIGN  
1 switch, you can see the image of the return video signal  
on the viewfinder screen while you are holding down the  
ASSIGN 1 switch even if the RETURN VIDEO item is set  
to “OFF” on the GENLOCK page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu.  
The current setting of each item appears on the right of  
the item.  
Note  
When no signal is input to the GENLOCK IN connector,  
the image is not changed even if you hold down the RET  
switch on the lens.  
Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen  
86  
       
However, the image is switched while you are holding  
down the ASSIGN 1 switch to which the return video  
function is assigned, even if no signal is input to the  
GENLOCK IN connector.  
5-3 Adjustments and  
Settings from Menus  
The camcorder provides menus for adjustments and  
settings.  
5-3-1 Setting Gain Values for the  
GAIN Selector Positions  
Before using the camcorder, use the GAIN SW page of the  
USER menu to set the gains corresponding to the L, M,  
and H positions of the GAIN selector, which switches the  
gain of the video amplifier.  
To set the gain values, proceed as follows:  
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
The last accessed menu page appears on the  
viewfinder screen.  
2
Turn the MENU knob until the GAIN SW page  
appears, then press the MENU knob to select the page.  
The current setting of each item appears on the right of  
the item.  
GAIN SW page  
U08 GAIN SW  
TOP  
GAIN LOW  
GAIN MID  
GAIN HIGH  
GAIN TURBO  
:
:
:
:
0db  
9db  
18db  
42db  
TURBO SW IND  
:
OFF  
Item  
Description  
GAIN LOW  
Sets the gain value corresponding to  
the L position of the GAIN selector.  
GAIN MID  
Sets the gain value corresponding to  
the M position of the GAIN selector.  
GAIN HIGH  
GAIN TURBO  
Sets the gain value corresponding to  
the H position of the GAIN selector.  
Sets the gain value corresponding to  
TURBO GAIN button selection.  
Adjustments and Settings from Menus  
87  
         
2
Turn the MENU knob until the OUTPUT page  
appears, then press the MENU knob to select the page.  
Item  
Description  
TURBO SW IND OFF: When you operate the GAIN  
selector after pressing the TURBO  
GAIN button once, the video gain is  
changed according to the GAIN  
selector operation.  
OUTPUT page  
U01 OUTPUT  
REAR BNC OUT SEL:  
VBS  
ON: When the video gain is boosted  
to the video gain to the value preset  
by pressing the TURBO GAIN  
button once, the video gain is not  
changed even if you operate the  
GAIN selector, until you press the  
TURBO GAIN button once more.  
Item  
Description  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item  
REAR BNC OUT  
SEL  
Selects the type of the video signal to  
be output from the VIDEO OUT  
connector.  
SDI: Outputs the SDI signal. When SDI  
is selected, connect the VIDEO OUT  
connector to the SDI IN connector of  
the video monitor.  
VBS: Outputs the analog composite  
video signal. When VBS is selected,  
connector the VIDEO OUT connector  
to the VIDEO IN connector of the  
video monitor.  
you want to set, and press MENU knob.  
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and press  
the MENU knob.  
The z mark on the left of the selected item returns to  
a b mark, and the ? mark on the left of the setting  
returns to a z mark.  
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “REAR  
BNC OUT SEL,” and press the MENU knob.  
Any of –3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 42 or 48 dB  
can be set for each of the L, M, and H positions, in any  
sequence.  
The b mark on the left of “REAR BNC OUT SEL”  
changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the  
setting changes to a ? mark.  
For TURBO, any of –3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 30, 36,  
42 or 48 dB can be selected.  
4
5
Turn the MENU knob to change the desired setting,  
and press the MENU knob.  
To change the gain corresponding to another switch  
position, return to step 3.  
The z mark returns to a bmark, and the ? mark on the  
left of the setting returns to a z mark.  
5
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
The menu display disappears, and the current status of  
the camcorder is shown along the top and bottom of  
the viewfinder screen.  
5-3-3 Setting the Color Temperature  
Manually  
You can adjust the value of the white balance manually by  
setting the color temperature.  
5-3-2 Selecting the Output Signals  
When the optional CBK-SD01 extension board is  
installed, you can select the type of video signals (VBS/  
SDI) from the VIDEO OUT SEL connector on the  
OUTPUT page of the USER menu.  
Proceed as follows:  
1
Holding down the MENU knob, move the MENU ON/  
OFF switch to ON.  
Proceed as follows:  
The TOP menu appears.  
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the bmark to “PAINT,”  
The last accessed menu page appears on the  
viewfinder screen.  
and press the MENU knob.  
Adjustments and Settings from Menus  
88  
           
If this is the first time the PAINT menu has been  
displayed, the CONTENTS page appears.  
If the menu has been used before, the last accessed  
page appears.  
6
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU  
knob to move the b mark to “WHITE,” and press the  
MENU knob to display the WHITE page.  
5-3-4 Specifying an Offset for the  
Auto White Balance Setting  
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob  
until the WHITE page appears, and press the MENU  
knob to select the page.  
By setting an offset for the value of auto white balance, you  
can make the picture warmer or colder.  
The OFFSET WHT page of the OPERATION menu  
allows you to do this setting.  
The current setting of each item appears on the right of  
the item.  
Proceed as follows:  
WHITE page  
P02 WHITE  
1
Holding down the MENU knob, move the MENU ON/  
OFF switch from OFF to ON.  
COLOR TEMP  
COLOR FINE  
R GAIN  
B GAIN  
D5600K  
COLOR TEMP  
COLOR FINE  
R GAIN  
B GAIN  
D5600K  
<A>:  
<A>:  
<A>:  
<A>:  
<A>:  
<B>:  
<B>:  
<B>:  
<B>:  
:
3200  
0
0
0
The TOP menu appears.  
OFF  
3200  
0
0
0
OFF  
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
“OPERATION,” and press the MENU knob.  
If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been  
displayed, the CONTENTS page appears. If the menu  
has been used before, the last accessed page appears.  
Item  
Description  
COLOR  
TEMP <A>  
Sets the color temperature for the  
desired value. Adjust the value while  
looking at the real image because  
error tends to be bigger for  
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU  
knob to move the b mark to “OFFSET WHITE,” and  
press the MENU knob to display the OFFSET WHT  
page.  
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob  
until the OFFSET WHT page appears, and press the  
MENU knob to select the page.  
adjustment of high color temperature.  
COLOR FINE Adjusts the value more precisely  
<A>  
when the color temperature  
adjustment through COLOR TEMP is  
not satisfactory.  
R GAIN <A>  
B GAIN <A>  
D5600K  
Only the value of R GAIN is changed.  
Only the value of B GAIN is changed.  
The current settings of each item appears on the right  
of the item.  
Sets the color temperature to  
approximately 5600K.  
OFFSET WHT page  
The above table shows the adjustment of the white  
balance of channel A.  
Items followed by “<B>” are used to adjust the white  
balance of channel B.  
16 OFFSET WHT  
OFFSET WHITE <A>:  
WARM COOL <A>:  
COLOR FINE <A>:  
OFF  
3200  
0
OFFSET WHITE <B>:  
WARM COOL <B>:  
COLOR FINE <B>:  
OFF  
3200  
0
4
5
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item  
you want to set, and press MENU knob.  
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
Item  
Description  
OFFSET  
WHITE <A>  
Turns the setting of the offset for  
channel A ON or OFF. ON: Adds the  
offset adjusted on this page to the  
white balance.  
Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and press  
the MENU knob.  
WARM-COOL  
<A>  
When OFFSET WHITE <A> is ON,  
sets the offset for the white balance of  
channel A, using the color  
temperature. Adjust the value while  
looking at the real image because  
error tends to be bigger for  
The z mark returns to a b mark, and the ? mark  
returns to a z mark.  
To set other items, go back to step 3.  
adjustment of high color temperature.  
Adjustments and Settings from Menus  
89  
       
Item  
Description  
5-3-5 Assigning Functions to  
Assignable Switches  
COLOR FINE  
<A>  
Adjusts the value more precisely if the  
adjustment by WARM-COOL <A> is  
not satisfactory.  
You can assign the desired function to the ASSIGN 1/2  
switches and the TURBO GAIN button.  
OFFSET  
WHITE <B>  
Turns the setting of the offset for  
channel B ON or OFF. ON: Adds the  
offset adjusted on this page to the  
white balance.  
Proceed as follows:  
WARM-COOL  
<B>  
Sets the offset for the white balance  
of channel B, using the color  
temperature. Adjust the value while  
looking at the real image because  
error tends to be bigger for  
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
The last accessed menu page appears on the  
viewfinder screen.  
adjustment of high color temperature.  
COLOR FINE  
<B>  
Adjusts the value more precisely if the  
adjustment by WARM-COOL <B> is  
not satisfactory.  
2
Turn the MENU knob until the FUNCTION 1 page  
appears, then press the MENU knob to select to page.  
The current settings of each item appears on the right  
of the item.  
4
Set the WHITE BAL switch to the position  
corresponding to the desired channel (A or B).  
FUNCTION 1 page  
U03  
Note  
If the WHITE BAL switch is not set to A or B when  
you operate the camcorder, the adjustment value will  
not be reflected in the output signal.  
TURBO SW  
TURBO  
CACHE/INTVAL REC  
5
6
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item  
you want to set, and press MENU knob.  
Item  
Description  
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
ASSIGN SW <1> Assigns the function to ASSIGN 1  
(push-type) switch.  
ASSIGN SW <2> Assigns the function to ASSIGN 2  
(slide-type) switch.  
Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and press  
the MENU knob.  
TURBO SW  
Assigns the function to the TURBO  
GAIN button.  
The z mark returns to a b mark, and the ? mark  
returns to a z mark.  
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item  
corresponding to the switch to which you want to  
assign the function, and press the MENU knob.  
To set other items, go back to step 3.  
To set the other white balance channel, go back to step  
2.  
The corresponding ASSIGN SEL window appears.  
ASSIGN <1> SEL window  
7
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
ASSIGN <1> SEL ESC  
OFF  
PICTURE CACHE ON/OFF  
TEST OUT CHARACTER  
MARKER  
RE-TAKE  
ATW  
RETURN VIDEO  
LENS RET  
REC SWITCH  
TURBO SWITCH  
Note  
When using the OFFSET WHITE function, “+” is  
displayed as the WARM color temperature indication and  
“-” is displayed as the COOL temperature indication in the  
viewfinder.  
Adjustments and Settings from Menus  
90  
         
ASSIGN <2> SEL window  
Functions to be assigned to  
the ASSIGN 2 (slide-type) switch  
ASSIGN <2> SEL ESC  
Function  
Content  
OFF  
PICTURE CACHE ON/OFF  
TEST OUT CHARACTER  
MARKER  
ZEBRA  
D5600  
EXT REC CONTROL  
OFF  
Disables the switch.  
PICTURE  
CACHE  
ON/OFF  
Assigns Picture Cache mode ON/OFF  
function.  
1)  
TEST OUT  
Assigns the function to switch whether  
CHARACTER or not the characters are mixed to the  
video signal to be output from the TEST  
OUT connector.  
TURBO SW SEL window  
TURBO SW SEL ESC  
MARKER  
Assigns the ON/OFF function to display  
all markers.  
2)  
OFF  
PICTURE CACHE ON/OFF  
TEST OUT CHARACTER  
MARKER  
RE-TAKE  
ATW  
RETURN VIDEO  
LENS RET  
REC SWITCH  
TURBO SWITCH  
ZEBRA  
D5600  
Assigns the zebra pattern display  
function.  
Applies an electrical 5600K filter.  
EXT REC  
CONTROL  
Selects whether or not recording  
control of external devices connected  
through the CCZ connector (26-pin) of  
a CA-702 is possible.  
Functions to be assigned to the ASSIGN 1 (push-type)  
switch and TURBO GAIN button  
UA01 to  
UA10  
Assigns the items assigned in the  
ASSIGN SEL menu.  
Function  
Description  
3)  
OFF  
Disables the switch.  
1) This does not appear if the CBK-MB01 is not installed.  
2) Even when the MARKER item is set to “OFF” on the MARKER  
page of the USER menu, the ASSIGN 2 switch allows you to display  
or not to display all markers.  
PICTURE  
CACHE  
ON/OFF  
Assigns Picture Cache mode ON/OFF  
function.  
1)  
3) This does not appear if nothing is assigned in the Assign menu.  
TEST OUT  
Assigns the function to switch whether  
CHARACTER or not text is superimposed on the  
video signal to be output from the TEST  
OUT connector.  
Note  
For functions that are assigned to the ASSIGN 2  
(slide-type) switch, you cannot change those settings  
using other menus. The function assigned to ASSIGN  
2 switch takes precedence over the menu setting.  
MARKER  
Assigns the ON/OFF function to display  
all markers.  
2)  
RE-TAKE  
ATW  
Assigns the RE-TAKE function.  
Assigns the ON/OFF function of auto-  
tracing white balance.  
4
5
6
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item  
you want to set, and press MENU knob.  
RETURN  
VIDEO  
Assigns the ON/OFF function to display  
the image of the return video signal on  
the viewfinder.  
The b mark changes to a z mark, and the z mark by  
3)  
the setting changes to a ? mark.  
LENS RET  
Assigns the same function as that of  
the RET switch on the lens.  
Turn the MENU knob to switch to the desired setting,  
and press the MENU knob.  
REC SWITCH Assigns the VTR S/S (start/stop)  
function.  
The z mark returns to a b mark, and the ? mark  
TURBO  
Assigns the TURBO GAIN function.  
returns to a z mark, confirming the setting.  
SWITCH  
ZEBRA  
Assigns the zebra pattern display  
function.  
To continue with other settings, repeat steps 3 and 4.  
D5600  
Applies an electrical 5600K filter.  
To return to the previous page  
UA01 to  
UA10  
Assigns the items assigned in the  
ASSIGN SEL menu.  
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “ESC” at the  
right top of the window and press the MENU knob.  
Alternatively, push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch  
down to the ESCAPE side.  
4)  
1) This does not appear if the CBK-MB01 is not installed.  
2) Even when the MARKER item is set to “OFF” on the MARKER  
page of the USER menu, the ASSIGN 1 switch (or TURBO GAIN  
button) allows you to display or not to display all markers.  
3) Even if the RETURN VIDEO item is set to “OFF” on the GENLOCK  
page of the MAINTENANCE menu, you can use this switch to  
display the image of the return video signal on the viewfinder.  
4) This does not appear if nothing is assigned in the Assign menu.  
To end the menu operation  
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF or close the cover  
of the menu operating section.  
Adjustments and Settings from Menus  
91  
 
Operation of the assignable switches when UA01  
to UA10 are assigned  
TIME ADJUST ESC  
HOUR  
MIN  
SEC  
:
:
:
12  
55  
58  
When an on/off switchable function (or menu item) is  
assigned to one of the assignable switches, each time the  
switch is pressed toggles the function on or off.  
When another type of menu item is assigned, pressing the  
switch displays the item and its setting value on the  
viewfinder screen.  
YEAR  
MONTH  
DAY  
:
:
:
00  
07  
31  
OK  
You can then change the setting by pressing and turning the  
MENU knob.  
The viewfinder screen display disappears approximately 3  
seconds after the last operation.  
Item  
Description  
HOUR  
MIN  
Sets the hour value.  
Sets the minutes value.  
Sets the seconds value.  
Sets the year.  
SEC  
YEAR  
MONTH  
DAY  
5-3-6 Setting the Date/Time of the  
Internal Clock  
Sets the month.  
Sets the day.  
You can set or change the date and time of the internal  
clock. The date and time set are reflected in the time code.  
5
6
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item  
you want to set, and press MENU knob.  
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
Proceed as follows:  
1
Holding down the MENU knob, move the MENU ON/  
OFF switch to ON.  
Turn the MENU knob to display the desired value, and  
press the MENU knob.  
The TOP menu appears.  
The z mark returns to a b mark, and the ? mark  
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
returns to a z mark.  
“DIAGNOSIS,” and press the MENU knob.  
If this is the first time the DIAGNOSIS menu has been  
displayed, the CONTENTS page appears. If the menu  
has been used before, the last accessed page appears.  
7
8
To continue the remaining settings, repeat steps 5 and  
6.  
When you finish settings, turn the MENU knob to  
move the bmark to “OK,” then press the MENU knob.  
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU  
knob to move the bmark to “TIME/DATE,” and press  
the MENU knob to display the TIME/DATE page.  
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob  
until the TIME/DATE page appears, then press the  
MENU knob to select the page.  
The internal clock is set with the date and time set in  
steps 5 to 7. The TIME/DATE page of the  
DIAGNOSIS menu appears again. The time set on the  
TIME ADJUST setting window is displayed.  
The b mark is displayed at “ADJUST.”  
To cancel the setting  
Before executing step 8, move the bmark to “ESC” at the  
top right of the window and press the MENU knob.  
Alternatively, push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch  
down to the ESCAPE side.  
All settings or changes are discarded and the TIME/DATE  
page of the DIAGNOSIS menu appears.  
TIME/DATE page  
D02 TIME/DATE  
ADJUST  
:
EXEC  
HOUR  
MIN  
SEC  
:
:
:
12  
55  
58  
YEAR  
MONTH  
DAY  
:
:
:
00  
07  
31  
4
Press the MENU knob.  
The TIME ADJUST setting window appears.  
Adjustments and Settings from Menus  
92  
       
19 FORMAT  
5-3-7 Selecting the Lens File  
16:9/4:3 SELECT :  
16:9  
I
SCAN MODE  
:
:
The LENS FILE page of the USER menu allows you to  
change the lens file according to the lens in use.  
UC/J SELECT  
UC  
Proceed as follows:  
(“UC/J SELECT” is displayed only for the DVW-970.)  
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the bmark to “16:9/4:3  
The last accessed menu page appears on the  
viewfinder screen.  
SELECT,” and press MENU knob.  
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
2
Turn the MENU knob until the LENS FILE page  
appears, then press the MENU knob to select the page.  
The LENS FILE page shows the lens name and the f-  
stop (iris setting) of the lens file currently selected.  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to display the desired aspect  
ratio, and press the MENU knob.  
U15  
The z mark returns to a b mark, and the ? mark  
returns to a z mark.  
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
To display the aspect ratio of 16:9/4:3 on the  
viewfinder screen  
By setting the “DISP 16:9/4:3 ID” item on the VF DISP 2  
page of the USER menu to “ON,” “16:9” or “4:3” appears  
on the viewfinder screen according to the setting on the  
FORMAT page.  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to LENS  
FILE SELECT, and press the MENU knob.  
The b mark changes to a z mark, and the z mark  
changes to a ? mark.  
Turn the MENU knob until the lens file No. in use  
appears, then press the MENU knob.  
For details, see “5-2-2 Selecting the Display Items” on  
page 79.  
The z mark returns to a b mark, and the ? mark  
returns to a z mark.  
To display “16:9” in color bars  
By setting the “SHOT 16:9 ID” on the SHOT DISP page  
of the USER menu to ON, you can record a “16:9” mode  
indicator superimposed on the color bars.  
If you do not want to use a lens file  
Select OFF.  
5
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
For details, see “5-2-6 Recording Shot Data Superimposed  
on the Color Bars” on page 82.  
5-3-8 Selecting the Aspect Ratio  
The FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu allows you  
to select the aspect ratio of the video output signal.  
Proceed as follows:  
1
Follow the procedure of steps 1 to 3 described in  
“5-3-4 Specifying an Offset for the Auto White  
Balance Setting” on page 89 to display the FORMAT  
page of the OPERATION menu.  
Adjustments and Settings from Menus  
93  
               
5-3-9 Setting the CCD Scan Mode  
Since the camcorder has CCDs that use an “all pixels read-  
out method,” a progressive scan mode is also available in  
addition to the conventional interlace scan mode.  
You can select either of the following modes using the  
FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu.  
• I (interlace scan) mode  
• PsF (progressive scan) mode  
Installing the CBK-FC01 allows you to select the 24P  
mode (DVW-970 only).  
Color bars (SMPTE type)  
Each mode is described below using timing charts.  
I (interlace scan) mode  
CCD output  
Color bars (EBU type)  
16:9 mode indicator on the color bar display  
Video output signal  
O: Odd  
E: Even  
Interlace scan mode timing chart  
The video signal of an odd scanning line and that of an  
even scanning line are output from the CCD alternately.  
Thus, the timing of the odd-field video signal and even-  
field video signal are different.  
PsF (progressive scan) mode  
CCD output  
Video output signal  
O: Odd  
E: Even  
Progressive scan mode timing chart  
The video signal of an odd scanning line and that of an  
even scanning line are output from the CCD at the same  
time. Then they are sent to the memory and separated into  
odd-field and even-field scanning lines. Thus the timing of  
an odd-field video signal and an even-field video signal are  
the same.  
Adjustments and Settings from Menus  
94  
           
24P (pull-down) mode (DVW-970 with CBK-FC01 only)  
23.98 frames per second  
A ( O + E )  
B ( O + E )  
C ( O + E )  
D ( O + E )  
A ( O + E )  
CCD output  
A O  
A E  
B O  
B E  
B O  
C E  
C O  
D E  
D O  
D E  
A O  
A E  
Video output signal  
29.97 frames per second  
O: Odd  
E: Even  
24P mode timing chart  
After reading from the CCDs in 24P mode (23.98 frames  
per second), a pull-down conversion is carried out to the 30  
frames (29.97 frames per second) of the normal  
progressive scan mode.  
Setting the CCD scan mode to the progressive scan mode  
The scan mode of the camcorder has been set to the  
interlace scan mode at the factory. The FORMAT page of  
the OPERATION menu allows you to change the CCD  
scan mode to the progressive scan mode or 24P mode  
(DVW-970 with CBK-FC01 only).  
19 FORMAT  
16:9/4:3 SELECT :  
16:9  
PsF  
UC  
SCAN MODE  
:
:
UC/J SELECT  
1
Follow the procedures given in steps 1 to 3 described  
in “5-3-4 Specifying an Offset for the Auto White  
Balance Setting” on page 89, to display the FORMAT  
page of the OPERATION menu.  
4
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF.  
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “SCAN  
MODE,” and press the MENU knob.  
The bmark on the left of “SCAN MODE” changes to  
a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
19 FORMAT  
16:9/4:3 SELECT :  
16:9  
I
SCAN MODE  
:?  
UC/J SELECT  
:
UC  
(“UC/J SELECT” is displayed only for the DVW-970.)  
3
Turn the MENU knob to display “PsF” or “24P,” and  
press the MENU knob.  
The z mark changes to a b mark, and the ? mark  
changes to a z mark.  
Adjustments and Settings from Menus  
95  
   
5-3-10 Usin UMID Data  
g
To perform operations from interviewing to editing  
effectively and to detect audio-visual materials easily  
when reusing them, metadata that provides additional  
information is recorded along with audio-visual data on a  
tape. As one of application of metadata, the UMID  
(Unique Material Identifier) is internationally  
standardized.  
What is a UMID?  
The UMID (Unique Material Identifier) is a unique  
identifier for audio-visual material defined by the  
SMPTE330M-2003 standard.  
The UMID may be used either as the 32-byte Basic UMID  
or as the Extended UMID, which includes an additional 32  
bytes of Source Pack to make a total 64 bytes.  
For details, refer to SMPTE 330M.  
Extended UMID (64 bytes)  
Basic UMID (32 bytes)  
Source Pack (32 bytes)  
Spatial  
Universal label  
12 bytes  
L
1
Inst. No.  
3 bytes  
Material Number  
16 bytes  
Time/Date  
8 bytes  
Country  
Org  
User  
Co-ordinates  
12 bytes  
4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes  
Globally unique ID is automatically recorded every  
The UMID is applied as follows:  
shooting.  
The Extended UMID is metadata that provides additional  
information such as location, time/date, company and so  
on.  
Source Pack  
Shooting information (when,  
where and who)  
Same as the above  
Material No.  
ID generated when shooting  
Same as the above  
Instance No.  
Original material: 00 00 00  
Copied material:  
generation number (1 byte) +  
random number (2 bytes)  
M
M
Material source ID/detecting  
material  
M
Distinguishing between the  
original material and copied  
material  
Metadata pack that identifies the  
source of material unit by  
defining the when, where and  
who of the material unit with  
which it is associated.  
Using the Extended UMID  
Functions of UMID data  
You have to enter a country code, organization code and  
user code. Set the country code referring to the ISO-3166  
table, and set the organization code and user code  
independently.  
The UMID data enables the following:  
• Add a globally unique ID to every shot of audio-visual  
material. The unique ID is used to detect the material  
source and to link it with the original source material.  
• Distinguishing between original material and copied  
material. 00 is added to the Instance Number for original  
material.  
For details, see “UMID menu setup” on page 97.  
Adjustments and Settings from Menus  
96  
 
• Recording based on the UTC. The UTC is used when  
recording the UMID. This enables uniform control of  
source material recorded all over the world based on the  
universal time code.  
• Calculating the date difference among source materials.  
The source material is recorded based on the MJD  
(Modified Julian Date), which enables easy calculation  
of date difference among source materials.  
Item  
Contents  
TIME ZONE  
MACHINE  
Sets the time difference from UTC.  
Displays the machine-specific  
number.  
4
5
6
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item  
you want to set, and press the MENU knob.  
The b mark to the left of the selected item changes to  
a z mark, and the z mark to the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
UMID menu setup  
The UMID SET page of the OPERATION menu allows  
you to make settings for UMID data.  
Proceed as follows:  
Turn the MENU knob to change the setting of the  
selected item or to display the desired value, and press  
the MENU knob.  
1
Holding down the MENU knob, set the MENU ON/  
OFF switch from OFF to ON.  
The z mark returns to a b mark, and the ? mark  
returns to a z mark.  
The TOP menu appears.  
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF.  
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
“OPERATION,” and press the MENU knob.  
If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been  
displayed, the CONTENTS page appears.  
If the menu has been used before, the last accessed  
page appears.  
Additional information on the UMID SET  
menu items  
EX-OWNERSHIP REC  
Specify whether to record the user data.  
ON: The user data (COUNTRY CODE,  
ORGANIZATION, and USER CODE) are recorded on  
the tape.  
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU  
knob to move the b mark to “UMID SET,” and press  
the MENU knob.  
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob  
until the UMID SET page appears, then press the  
MENU knob.  
OFF: The user data are not recorded.  
COUNTRY CODE  
When you select this item, the character table appears.  
The current settings appear on the right side of each  
item.  
20 UMID SET  
TOP  
OFF  
UMID SET page  
EX-OWNERSHIP REC:  
?20 UMID SET  
COUNTRY CODE  
ORGANIZATION  
USER CODE  
:
:
:
:
sss  
sssss  
sssss  
RND  
EX-OWNERSHIP REC:  
OFF  
INSTANCE NO  
COUNTRY CODE  
ORGANIZATION  
USER CODE  
:
:
:
:
sss  
-0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKL  
MNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghij  
klmnopqrstuvwxyz  
sssss  
sssss  
RND  
INSTANCE NO  
INS DEL RET  
ESC END  
TIME ZONE : 00 : +00:00  
MACHINE : sssssssssssss  
Enter an abbreviated alphanumeric string (4-byte  
alphanumeric strings) according to the values defined in  
ISO 3166-1.  
Proceed as follows:  
There are about 240 country codes.  
Find your own country code on the following home page.  
Item  
EX-OWNERSHIP Specifies whether to record the  
REC user data.  
COUNTRY CODE Sets the country code.  
Contents  
Refer to ISO-3166-1:  
http://www.din.de/gremien/nas/nabd/iso3166ma/codlstp1/  
en_listp1.html  
ORGANIZATION  
USER CODE  
Sets the organization code.  
Sets the user code.  
When the country code is less than 4 bytes, the active part  
of the code will occupy the first part of the 4-bytes and the  
remainder must be filled with the space character (20h).  
INSTANCE NO.  
Specifies how to generate the  
instance number.  
Adjustments and Settings from Menus  
97  
 
Example: In the case of Japan  
For Japan, if the country code is JP, it is 2 bytes, if JPN, it  
is 3 bytes.  
Thus, enter the following:  
TIME ZONE  
00.UTC  
ESC  
GREENWICH  
01.UTC-01:00 AZORES  
02.UTC-02:00 M-ATRANTIC  
03.UTC-03:00 ARZENTINE  
04.UTC-04:00 HALIFAX  
05.UTC-05:00 NEW YORK  
06.UTC-06:00 CHICAGO  
07.UTC-07:00 DENVER  
08.UTC-08:00 LOSANGELES  
09.UTC-09:00 ALASKA  
JP_ _  
or  
JPN _  
where _ represents a space.  
Set the time difference from UTC. When setting the  
summer time or daylight savings time, change the code to  
one which will advance the time by 1 hour.  
ORGANIZATION (organization code)  
When you select this item, the character table appears.  
(Refer to COUNTRY CODE above.)  
Enter an abbreviated 4-byte alphanumeric string for the  
organization code.  
Note  
When you change the time zone, adjust the built-in clock  
to local time and turn the power of the camcorder off and  
then the power on again.  
Note  
There are no problems in recording or playing back audio-  
video signals, if ORGANIZATION is not set.  
Organization codes must be acquired by applying to the  
SMPTE registration office. When no organization code has  
been acquired, it is forbidden to enter an arbitrary string.  
As a rule, the code “00” must be entered. Freelance  
operators who do not belong to an origination should enter  
“~.”  
MACHINE  
An identification number specific to the machine is  
displayed. This number cannot be set or modified by users.  
USER CODE  
When you select this item, the USER CODE window  
appears.  
(Refer to the COUNTRY CODE window above.)  
Enter the 4-byte alphanumeric strings for user  
identification.  
The user code is registered with each organization locally.  
It is usually not centrally registered.  
When the user code is less than 4 bytes, enter the user code  
from the beginning of the 4 bytes and enter the space  
character (20h) in the remaining strings.  
This user code is determined by the organization. The  
methods used depend on the organization.  
Note  
User bits cannot be entered when no organization code has  
been entered.  
INSTANCE NO.  
Select the method for generating the numbers to be used to  
identify the original video images.  
RND: Random  
GEN: Generation (number of times of copy)  
Ask the system administrator for selection.  
TIME ZONE  
When you select this item, the TIME ZONE window  
appears.  
The UTC is calculated based on the local time, using the  
time zone. If the time zone is not set, the UTC is not  
recorded correctly.  
Adjustments and Settings from Menus  
98  
5-4 Resetting USER  
Menu Settings to the  
Standard Settings  
You can return all settings in the USER menu to the  
standard settings.  
Proceed as follows:  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
The last accessed menu appears on the screen.  
Turn the MENU knob until the USER FILE page  
appears, and press the MENU knob.  
USER FILE page  
F01 USER FILE  
USER FILE LOAD  
USER FILE SAVE  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
F.ID : sssssssssssssssss  
USER PRESET EXEC  
:
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “USER  
PRESET,” and press the MENU knob.  
The message “PRESET OK? YES b NO” appears.  
F01 USER FILE  
PRESET OK?  
USER FILE LOAD  
USER FILE SAVE  
YES NO  
: EXEC  
:
EXEC  
F.ID : sssssssssssssssss  
USER PRESET EXEC  
:
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “YES,”  
and press the MENU knob.  
The settings for all items in the USER menu are reset  
to the standard settings.  
Resetting USER Menu Settings to the Standard Settings  
99  
   
Saving and Loading User  
Setting Data  
6
Chapter  
6-1 Saving and Loading  
User Files  
The camcorder is equipped with a “Memory Stick” drive,  
which enables you to save user files, scene files, lens files,  
reference files and “ALL” files. You can load these files  
from the “Memory Stick” for immediate recall of a  
particular setting configuration.  
MEMORY STICK OPEN button  
When a menu page is displayed, you can set up the  
2
Hold the “Memory Stick” with the notch facing  
downward and the label side facing toward you, and  
insert the “Memory Stick” into the “Memory Stick”  
insertion slot until it clicks into place. Then, close the  
cover.  
camcorder so that inserting a “Memory Stick”  
automatically jumps to the appropriate file-related menu  
page.  
For details about scene files, see “6-2 Saving and Loading  
Scene Files” on page 104.  
For details of the function for jumping to the appropriate  
file-related menu page, see “6-3 Jumping to a File-Related  
Menu Page When Inserting a “Memory Stick”” on page  
108.  
“Memory Sticks” usable with this camcorder  
With this camcorder, you can use “Memory Sticks” whose  
capacity does not exceed 128 MB.  
Label side of “Memory Stick”  
For details, see “Memory Stick” in “Specifications” on  
page 133.  
Note  
If it does not fit into the slot properly or if there is some  
resistance when you insert it, the “Memory Stick” may be  
turned around or upside down. Do not force the “Memory  
Stick” into the slot. Confirm the direction of the notch and  
arrow on the “Memory Stick” before inserting the  
“Memory Stick,” and then try inserting it again.  
6-1-1 Handling the “Memory Stick”  
The “Memory Stick” can be inserted to or removed from  
the camcorder with the power turned on or off.  
Inserting the “Memory Stick”  
Proceed as follows:  
Removing the “Memory Stick”  
Press the MEMORY STICK OPEN button to open the  
cover of the “Memory Stick” compartment.  
Push the eject button after confirming that the ACCESS  
indicator is not lit. The “Memory Stick” pops out.  
1
Push the MEMORY STICK OPEN button.  
The cover of the “Memory Stick” compartment opens.  
Saving and Loading User Files  
100  
         
• Avoid getting liquids on the “Memory Stick.”  
• Avoid using or storing the “Memory Stick” in a location  
subject to:  
—extremely high temperature such as the hot inside of a  
car or the outdoors exposed to a burning sun, or a  
place near a heater  
—direct sunlight  
—high humidity  
—excessive dust  
• When storing and carrying the “Memory Stick,” keep it  
in its original case to ensure protection of important data.  
• When carrying the camcorder with the “Memory Stick”  
inserted, close the cover of the menu operating section.  
• Avoid removing the “Memory Stick” from the insertion  
slot while the access indicator is lit.  
Check that the ACCESS  
indicator is not lit.  
MEMORY STICK OPEN button  
• Do not format the “Memory Stick” using a PC.  
• Formatting of “Memory Sticks” can be performed on the  
MEMORY STICK page of the FILE menu.  
6-1-2 Saving USER Menu Data (User  
File) to the “Memory Stick”  
Eject button  
You can save USER menu settings held in the camcorder  
as user files in the “Memory Stick.”  
You can save up to 100 user files in the “Memory Stick.”  
Insert the “Memory Stick,” then proceed as follows:  
Note  
Do not remove the “Memory Stick” while the ACCESS  
indicator is lit. You may lose data, or damage the “Memory  
Stick.”  
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
The last accessed menu page appears on the  
viewfinder screen.  
Protecting saved data  
To prevent accidental erasure of important setup data, use  
the LOCK switch on the “Memory Stick.”  
Slide the switch right to the write protect position. The  
message “MEMORY STICK LOCKED” is displayed. It is  
now impossible to write or delete data on the “Memory  
Stick.”  
2
Turn the MENU knob until the USER FILE page  
appears, then press the MENU knob to select the page.  
Alternately, select “USER FILE” on the CONTENTS  
page.  
USER FILE page  
F01 USER FILE  
USER FILE LOAD  
USER FILE SAVE  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
F.ID : sssssssssssssssss  
USER PRESET EXEC  
:
LOCK switch on the “Memory Stick”  
If you want to set a file ID for the data to be saved  
Set the file ID before going to step 3.  
Notes on using and storing the “Memory  
Stick”  
• Avoid touching the connector of the “Memory Stick” or  
contacting it with a metal object.  
For details on setting the file ID, see “Setting the file  
ID” on page 102.  
• When attaching a label to the “Memory Stick,” use only  
the label supplied for the “Memory Stick.”  
• Do not drop, bend, or submit the “Memory Stick” to  
external shock.  
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to USER  
FILE SAVE, and press the MENU knob.  
The P00 USER SAVE page appears.  
• Do not disassemble or modify the “Memory Stick.”  
Saving and Loading User Files  
101  
   
• To overwrite, move the b mark to “YES” and press  
?P00 USER SAVE  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
the MENU knob.  
:
001.NEW FILE  
002.NEW FILE  
003.NEW FILE  
004.NEW FILE  
005.NEW FILE  
You can select the information displayed on each  
USER SAVE or USER LOAD page by changing the  
DISPLAY MODE setting.  
For details, see “Selecting the display contents” on  
page 103.  
When a ? appears on the left of “P00” at the top left of  
the page, you can change the page. Up to 20 pages,  
from P00 to P19, can be used to save user files in the  
“Memory Stick.” Each page can hold up to 5 files.  
7
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
4
5
Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains  
the desired file number appears, and press the MENU  
knob.  
The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen, and  
the display indicating the current status of the  
camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the  
screen.  
P00 USER SAVE  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
:
USER menu settings to be saved in the “Memory  
Stick”  
Settings for items on all pages of the USER menu are saved  
in the “Memory Stick” as a user file. However, you can  
select the items which are not to be saved in the “Memory  
Stick.”  
Use the items LOAD CUSTOM DATA, LOAD OUT OF  
USER, BEFORE FILE PAGE and USER LOAD WHITE  
on the USER FILE2 page of the FILE menu.  
001.NEW FILE  
002.NEW FILE  
003.NEW FILE  
004.NEW FILE  
005.NEW FILE  
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the  
desired file number, and press the MENU knob.  
The message “SAVE OK? YES b NO” appears.  
If data cannot be saved  
If one of the following error messages appears during or  
after the save operation, then the data was not saved.  
P00 USER SAVE  
SAVE OK?  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
When a file number is  
shown as “NEW FILE,”  
this means that the file is  
empty. When data is  
YES NO  
:
ALL  
001.NEW FILE  
002.NEW FILE  
003.NEW FILE  
004.NEW FILE  
005.NEW FILE  
Data save error messages  
stored in a file number,  
the file name appears.  
Error message  
Cause  
Action  
NO MEMORY  
No “Memory  
Insert or reinsert the  
STICK (flashing) Stick” is inserted. “Memory Stick.”  
MEMORY STICK The LOCK  
Set the LOCK switch  
to the write enable  
position.  
6
To carry out the save, move the b mark to “YES” and  
press the MENU knob.  
LOCKED  
switch on the  
“Memory Stick”  
is set to the write  
protect position.  
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving the b mark  
pointing to “NO.”  
MEMORY STICK Circuit or  
Check the circuitry, or  
replace the “Memory  
Stick”.  
The ACCESS indicator lights.  
ERROR  
“Memory Stick”  
fault.  
When the saving is completed, the message  
“COMPLETE” appears and the ACCESS indicator  
goes off.  
(flashing)  
Setting the file ID  
Before data is saved to a “Memory Stick,” it is useful to set  
a file ID for the “Memory Stick” to identify it.  
When data is saved to a “Memory Stick,” the file ID is  
saved to the “Memory Stick” together with the data.  
If no “Memory Stick” has been inserted, the message  
“NO MEMORY STICK” will appear. Insert a  
“Memory Stick.”  
If you select a file number where data has already  
been saved  
Note  
The message “OVERWRITE OK? YES b NO”  
appears. In this case, the b mark appears on the left of  
“NO,” which is flashing.  
Set the file ID before saving data in the “Memory Stick.”  
Otherwise, the file ID is not saved with the other data.  
• To stop overwriting, press the MENU knob.  
Proceed as follows:  
Saving and Loading User Files  
102  
1
2
On the USER FILE page, turn the MENU knob to  
move the b mark to “F. ID.”  
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark until the  
desired type of the display contents (see the following  
table) appears, then press the MENU knob.  
F01 USER FILE  
TOP  
P00 USER LOAD  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
USER FILE LOAD  
USER FILE SAVE  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
:
F.ID  
F.ID : sssssssssssssssss  
001.USER1  
002.USER2  
003.NO FILE  
004.USER4  
005.USER5  
USER PRESET  
:
EXEC  
Press the MENU knob.  
Display type Description  
A character table appears, allowing you to select  
characters you want to enter.  
ALL  
File ID (10 characters) and date ((month/  
day/year) for the DVW-970 and (day/  
month/year) for the DVW-970P))  
F01 USER FILE  
TOP  
F.ID  
File ID (16 characters)  
USER FILE LOAD  
USER FILE SAVE  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
DATE  
Saved date (year/month/day/hours/  
minutes/seconds)  
F.ID :?  
x
!#$%&'()*+,-./012345678  
9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP  
QRSTUVWXYZ[Y]abcdefghijk  
lmnopqrstuvwxyz~  
MODEL  
Information on the model  
INS DEL RET  
ESC END  
6-1-3 Loading Saved Data from a  
“Memory Stick”  
3
4
Follow the procedure of steps 4 and 5 described in “5-  
2-7 Setting the Shot ID” (page 83) to enter the file ID.  
When you finish entering the file ID, turn the MENU  
knob to move the x mark to “END,” then press the  
MENU knob.  
Note  
The data loaded from the “Memory Stick” overwrites the  
data saved in the camcorder.  
The entered file ID is now displayed.  
Proceed as follows:  
F01 USER FILE  
TOP  
USER FILE LOAD  
USER FILE SAVE  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
F.ID : sssssssssssssssss  
USER PRESET EXEC  
The last accessed menu page appears on the screen.  
:
Turn the MENU knob until the USER FILE page  
appears, then press the MENU knob. Alternatively,  
select “USER FILE” on the CONTENTS page.  
File ID set in step 3  
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “USER  
After setting the file ID, carry out the procedure from  
step 3 in “6-1-2 Saving USER Menu Data (User File)  
to the “Memory Stick”” (page 101).  
FILE LOAD,” and press the MENU knob.  
The P00 USER LOAD page appears.  
The set file ID is saved in the “Memory Stick” with the  
data.  
?P00 USER LOAD  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
:
001.USER1  
002.USER2  
003.NO FILE  
004.USER4  
005.USER5  
JAN/01/04  
JAN/15/04  
Selecting the display contents  
FEB/05/04  
FEB/20/04  
You can select the contents of the file to be displayed on  
the USER SAVE page and USER LOAD page.  
Proceed as follows:  
4
Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains  
the desired file number appears, then press the MENU  
knob.  
1
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
“DISPLAY MODE,” and press the MENU knob.  
Saving and Loading User Files  
103  
 
P00 USER LOAD  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
:
6-2 Saving and Loading  
Scene Files  
001.USER1  
002.USER2  
003.NO FILE  
004.USER4  
005.USER5  
JAN/01/04  
JAN/15/04  
FEB/05/04  
FEB/20/04  
You can save various settings for shooting a particular  
scene as a scene file. Loading the scene file, you can  
quickly recreate setup conditions suitable for the scene.  
You can save up to five scene files in the camcorder  
memory and up to 100 scene files in a “Memory Stick.”  
You can also load data from the “Memory Stick” into the  
camcorder memory.  
5
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the  
desired file number to be loaded, and press the MENU  
knob.  
The message “LOAD OK? YES b NO” appears.  
P00 USER LOAD  
LOAD OK?  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
YES NO  
:
Data that can be saved in a scene file  
001.USER1  
002.USER2  
003.NO FILE  
004.USER4  
005.USER5  
JAN/01/04  
JAN/15/04  
You can save the following data in a scene file:  
• Values adjusted using the PAINT menu (except the items  
that return to the default values when power is on, such  
as TEST OUT SELECT)  
FEB/05/04  
FEB/20/04  
• Shutter speed settings made in the standard mode and  
ECS mode  
The white balance data can be loaded only when the  
SCENE WHITE DATA setting on the REFERENCE page  
of the FILE menu is ON.  
6
7
To carry out the load, move the b mark to “YES” and  
press the MENU knob.  
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving the b mark  
pointing to “NO.”  
The ACCESS indicator lights.  
When the load is completed, the message  
“COMPLETE” appears and the ACCESS indicator  
goes off.  
6-2-1 Saving a Scene File  
Proceed as follows to save a scene file in the camcorder  
memory or the “Memory Stick.”  
To save a scene file in the “Memory Stick,” insert the  
“Memory Stick” before starting the operation.  
The USER FILE page appears again.  
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
1
2
In the TOP menu, select the FILE menu.  
If data cannot be loaded  
If one of the following error messages appears during or  
after the load operation, then the data was not loaded.  
Turn the MENU knob until the SCENE FILE page  
appears, then press the MENU knob to select the page.  
Alternatively, select “SCENE FILE” on the  
Data load error messages  
CONTENTS page to display the SCENE FILE page.  
Error message  
Cause  
Action  
SCENE FILE page  
NO MEMORY  
No “Memory  
Insert or reinsert the  
F04 SCENE FILE  
TOP  
STICK (flashing) Stick” is inserted. “Memory Stick.”  
s
s
s
s
s
s
1
2
3
4
5
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
MEMORY STICK Circuit or  
Recheck, and  
consult your Sony  
representative.  
ERROR  
(flashing)  
“Memory Stick”  
fault.  
STANDARD  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F.ID:  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
OTHER  
MODEL’S FILE  
(flashing)  
The “Memory  
Stick” contains  
data that cannot  
be loaded into this  
camcorder.  
Do not try to load  
data saved from  
another camcorder.  
If you want to set a file ID for the data to be saved  
Set the file ID before going to step 3.  
For details on setting the file ID, see “Setting the file  
ID” on page 106.  
Saving and Loading Scene Files  
104  
           
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the bmark to “SCENE  
2 Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the  
desired file number, and press the MENU knob.  
The message “STORE OK? YES b NO” appears.  
STORE,” and press the MENU knob.  
F04 SCENE FILE  
TOP  
P01 SCENE STORE  
STORE OK?  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
s
s
s
s
s
s
1
2
3
4
5
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
YES NO  
:
001.SCENE1  
FEB/05/02  
002.STANDARD  
003.STANDARD  
004.STANDARD  
005.STANDARD  
STANDARD  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F.ID:  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
***.5FILE SAVE  
MEM1-5  
The SCENE STORE page appears.  
3 To carry out the storing, move the b mark to  
“YES” and press the MENU knob.  
?P00 SCENE STORE  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving the b  
:
mark pointing to “NO.”  
MEM-01:STANDARD  
MEM-02:STANDARD  
MEM-03:STANDARD  
MEM-04:STANDARD  
MEM-05:STANDARD  
You can select the contents of the user file to be  
displayed on the page.  
For details, see “Selecting the display contents” on  
page 106.  
4
Select the desired file number.  
When no “Memory Stick” has been inserted  
5
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the  
desired file number, and press the MENU knob.  
When the save is completed, the SCENE FILE page  
appears again.  
To return to the SCENE FILE page  
After the message “COMPLETE” is displayed, move  
the b mark to “ESC” at the top right of the page by  
turning the MENU knob, then press the MENU knob.  
When you select a file number where data has  
already been saved  
The message “OVERWRITE OK? YES b NO”  
appears. In this case, the b mark is placed on the left  
of “NO.”  
White balance setting data to be saved in the  
scene file  
• To stop overwriting, press the MENU knob.  
• To overwrite, move the b mark to “YES” and press  
the MENU knob.  
The white balance setting data selected when you save the  
scene file is saved. For example, when the WHITE BAL  
switch is set to A, the adjusted values in memory A are  
saved in the scene file, and when the WHITE BAL switch  
is set to PRST, the preset value is saved.  
When a “Memory Stick” has been inserted  
You can use up to 20 pages, from P01 to P20, to save  
scene files in the “Memory Stick.” Each page can hold  
up to 5 files.  
Saving scene files from the camcorder  
memory to the “Memory Stick”  
To select a file, proceed as follows:  
You can save five scene files from the camcorder to the  
“Memory Stick” in a single operation.  
1 Turn the MENU knob until the page which  
contains the desired file number appears, then press  
the MENU knob.  
Proceed as follows:  
1
2
After displaying the SCENE FILE page (page 104)  
turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “SCENE  
STORE,” then press the MENU knob.  
P01 SCENE STORE  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
:
001.SCENE1  
FEB/05/02  
002.STANDARD  
003.STANDARD  
004.STANDARD  
005.STANDARD  
One of the SCENE STORE pages appears.  
Turn the MENU knob until the desired SCENE  
STORE page appears, then press the MENU knob.  
***.5FILE SAVE  
MEM1-5  
Saving and Loading Scene Files  
105  
 
P01 SCENE STORE  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
F04 SCENE FILE  
TOP  
:
!#$%&'()*+,-./012345678  
9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP  
QRSTUVWXYZ[Y]abcdefghijk  
lmnopqrstuvwxyz~  
001.SCENE1  
002.SCENE2  
003.NO FILE  
004.SCENE4  
005.SCENE5  
FEB/05/02  
FEB/06/02  
INS DEL RET  
ESC END  
FEB/08/02  
FEB/08/02  
s
STANDARD  
***.5FILE SAVE  
MEM1-5  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
F.ID:  
x
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “5FILE  
3
4
Carry out the operations for steps 4 and 5 described in  
5-2-7 “Setting the Shot ID” (page 83) to enter the file  
ID.  
SAVE B MEM1-5,” and press the MENU knob.  
The message “SAVE OK? YES b NO” appears.  
P01 SCENE STORE  
SAVE OK?  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
Note  
YES NO  
:
Set the file ID before saving the scene file in the  
“Memory Stick” or the camcorder memory.  
Otherwise, the file ID is not saved with the other data.  
001.SCENE1  
002.SCENE2  
003.NO FILE  
004.SCENE4  
005.SCENE5  
***.5FILE SAVE  
MEM1-5  
When you finish entering the file ID, turn the MENU  
knob to move the x mark to “END,” then press the  
MENU knob.  
4
5
To carry out the save, move the b mark to “YES” and  
press the MENU knob.  
The SCENE FILE page appears again.  
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving the b mark  
pointing to “NO.”  
F04 SCENE FILE  
TOP  
s
s
s
s
s
s
1
2
3
4
5
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
When the save is completed, the message  
“COMPLETE” appears.  
STANDARD  
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF.  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F.ID: SCENE21  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
Carry out the procedure from step 3 in 6-2-1 “Saving  
a Scene File” (page 104).  
The set file ID is saved together with the data.  
Note  
If files have been saved in the page selected in step 2, those  
files are replaced with files loaded from the camcorder  
memory. For example, files from 001 to 005 are replaced.  
Selecting the display contents  
You can select the items of file information to be displayed  
on the SCENE STORE pages (P01 to P20) or the SCENE  
RECALL pages (P01 to P20) used for saving data to or  
loading data from a “Memory Stick.”  
Setting the file ID  
Before the data is saved as a scene file, it is useful to set a  
file ID to identify it. The set file ID is saved together with  
the data.  
For details, see “Selecting the display contents” on page  
103.  
To set the file ID, proceed as follows:  
1
On the SCENE FILE page, turn the MENU knob to  
move the b mark to “F. ID.”  
6-2-2 Loading a Scene File  
F04 SCENE FILE  
TOP  
s
s
s
s
s
s
1
2
3
4
5
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
Proceed as follows:  
1
2
In the TOP menu, select the FILE menu.  
STANDARD  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F.ID:  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
Turn the MENU knob until the SCENE FILE page  
appears, then press the MENU knob to select the page.  
Alternatively, on the CONTENTS page select  
“SCENE FILE,” and press the MENU knob to display  
the SCENE FILE page.  
2
Press the MENU knob.  
A character table appears, allowing you to select  
characters you want to enter.  
Saving and Loading Scene Files  
106  
   
3
Load a scene file.  
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving the b mark  
pointing to “NO.”  
To load a scene file stored in the camcorder  
When the loading is completed, the message  
“COMPLETE” appears. The camcorder is set up  
according to the loaded scene file.  
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the  
desired file number, and press the MENU knob.  
The s which is displayed on the left of the file number  
changes to x.  
The camcorder is set up according to the loaded scene  
file.  
If no file is present with a particular file number, this is  
shown as “NO FILE.”  
5
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF.  
F04 SCENE FILE  
TOP  
s
x
s
s
s
s
1
2
3
4
5
:SCENE 25  
:SCENE 26  
:SCENE 27  
:SCENE 28  
:NO FILE  
Loading scene files from a “Memory Stick”  
into the camcorder memory  
You can load up to five scene files stored in the “Memory  
Stick” into the camcorder memory in a single operation.  
STANDARD  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F.ID: SCENE21  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
To cancel the selected scene file  
1
After displaying the SCENE FILE page (page 104),  
turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “SCENE  
RECALL,” and press the MENU knob.  
Move the b mark to x, and press the MENU knob. x  
changes to s.  
The camcorder returns to the settings before selecting  
this scene file.  
A SCENE RECALL page appears.  
To load a scene file saved in the “Memory Stick”  
Proceed as follows:  
2
3
Turn the MENU knob until the SCENE RECALL page  
which contains the desired scene files appears, then  
press the MENU knob.  
1 Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
“SCENE RECALL,” and press the MENU knob.  
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “5FILE  
LOAD b MEM 1-5,” and press the MENU knob.  
The P00 SCENE RECALL page appears.  
The message “RECALL OK? YES bNO” appears.  
?P00 SCENE RECALL  
ESC  
DISPLAY MODE  
:
F.ID  
P01 SCENE RECALL  
RECALL OK? YES NO  
ESC  
ALL  
MEM<1>:STANDARD  
MEM<2>:STANDARD  
MEM<3>:STANDARD  
MEM<4>:STANDARD  
MEM<5>:NO FILE  
DISPLAY MODE  
:
001.SCENE1  
002.SCENE2  
003.NO FILE  
004.SCENE4  
005.SCENE5  
***.5FILE LOAD  
MEM1-5  
2 Turn the MENU knob until the page which  
contains the desired file number appears, then press  
the MENU knob.  
4
5
To carry out the recall, move the bmark to “YES” and  
press the MENU knob.  
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving the b mark  
3 Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the  
pointing to “NO.”  
desired file number, and press the MENU knob.  
When loading is complete, the message  
“COMPLETE” appears and the ACCESS indicator  
goes off.  
The message “RECALL OK? YES bNO” appears.  
P01 SCENE RECALL  
RECALL OK? YES NO  
ESC  
ALL  
DISPLAY MODE  
:
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
001.SCENE1  
002.SCENE2  
003.NO FILE  
004.SCENE4  
005.SCENE5  
***.5FILE LOAD  
MEM1-5  
Notes  
• The scene files loaded from the “Memory Stick”  
overwrite data saved in the camcorder memory.  
4
To carry out the recall, move the bmark to “YES” and  
press the MENU knob.  
Saving and Loading Scene Files  
107  
• To load the scene file saved in the camcorder memory  
when the “Memory Stick” is inserted, return to the P00  
SCENE RECALL page and load the desired scene file in  
the camcorder memory.  
• When there is no file to be loaded (shown as “NO  
FILE”), an existing file of the same number is  
unaffected. In the example shown in step 3, MEM(3) is  
not overwritten.  
6-3 Jumping to a File-  
Related Menu Page When  
Inserting a “Memory  
Stick”  
6-2-3 Resetting the Settings of the  
Camcorder to the Standard Settings  
Saved in the Reference File  
A “Memory Stick” enables you to save user files, scene  
files, lens files, reference files and “ALL” files. The  
camcorder menu system allows you to make a setting so  
that when a “Memory Stick” holding these files is inserted  
while in menu operating mode, a menu page relating to the  
desired file is automatically displayed on the screen. Thus  
you can proceed to file operation quickly. This is very  
convenient especially when you manage data files using  
“Memory Sticks.”  
You can reset the settings of the camcorder to the settings  
saved in the reference file (standard settings).  
For details about the items in the reference file, refer to the  
Maintenance Manual.  
The page to be displayed can be selected on the MEMORY  
STICK page of the FILE menu.  
On the SCENE FILE page, turn the MENU knob to move  
the b mark to “STANDARD,” and press the MENU knob.  
To make this setting, proceed as follows:  
F04 SCENE FILE  
TOP  
1
2
In the TOP menu, select the FILE menu.  
s
s
s
s
s
x
1
2
3
4
5
:SCENE 25  
:SCENE 26  
:SCENE 27  
:SCENE 28  
:NO FILE  
Turn the MENU knob until the MEMORY STICK  
page of the FILE menu appears, then press the MENU  
knob to select the page. Alternatively, on the  
CONTENTS page select MEMORY STICK.  
STANDARD  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F.ID: SCENE21  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
MEMORY STICK page  
The s displayed on the left of STANDARD changes to x.  
When x changes to s, the settings of the camcorder are  
reset to the settings saved in the reference file.  
F09 MEMORY STICK  
M.S. FORMAT  
M.S. IN > JUMP TO:  
:
EXEC  
OFF  
If you press the MENU knob again while x is displayed,  
the operation is cancelled and the camcorder returns to the  
settings before STANDARD was selected.  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the bmark to “M.S. IN  
> JUMP TO,” and press the MENU knob.  
The b mark on the left of “M.S. IN > JUMP TO”  
changes to a z mark, and the z mark on the left of the  
setting changes to a ? mark.  
Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting  
(target FILE menu page).  
Setting  
OFF  
Description  
Disables this function.  
USER  
ALL  
Jumps to the USER FILE page.  
Jumps to the ALL FILE page.  
Jumps to the SCENE FILE page.  
Jumps to the LENS FILE 1 page.  
SCENE  
LENS  
Jumping to a File-Related Menu Page When Inserting a “Memory Stick”  
108  
         
Setting  
REFER  
USER 1  
Description  
Jumps to the REFERENCE page.  
Jumps to the USER 1 page.  
5
Press the MENU knob to confirm the selection.  
The z mark returns to a b mark, and the ? mark  
returns to a z mark.  
Notes  
In the following cases, jumping to the target page is  
impossible.  
• When the power is turned on after you insert a “Memory  
Stick.”  
• When OFF is selected for the M.S. IN > JUMP TO item.  
• When any of the following menu pages is already  
displayed.  
—A file-related page such as the USER FILE page of  
the FILE menu  
—MEMORY STICK, ALL FILE, SCENE FILE, LENS  
FILE, REFERENCE FILE or ROM VERSION page  
Jumping to a File-Related Menu Page When Inserting a “Memory Stick”  
109  
Setting Up the  
Camcorder  
7
Chapter  
2
Slide the battery pack down until its “LOCK” arrow  
points at the matching line on the camcorder.  
7-1 Power Supply  
The following power supplies can be used with the  
camcorder.  
• BP-GL65/GL95/L60S Lithium-ion battery pack  
• AC power using the AC-550/550CE or AC-DN10 AC  
adaptor  
“LOCK” arrow  
Matching line on  
the camcorder  
7-1-1 Using a Battery Pack  
When a BP-GL95 battery pack is used, the camcorder will  
operate continuously for about 180 minutes. When a BP-  
GL65 is used, the camcorder will operate continuously for  
about 120 minutes.  
Detaching the battery pack  
Before use, charge the battery pack with a BC-M50/M150  
Battery Charger. It takes about 145 minutes to charge one  
BP-GL95.  
For details, refer to the battery charger operation manual.  
Holding the button  
in, pull the battery  
pack up.  
Note on using the battery pack  
A warm battery pack may not be able to be fully recharged.  
Attaching the battery pack  
Detaching the battery pack  
1
Press the battery pack against the back of the  
camcorder, aligning the line on the side of the battery  
pack with the matching line on the camcorder.  
7-1-2 Avoiding Breaks in Operation  
Due to an Exhausted Battery  
Back of camcorder  
If you use both an internal battery pack (attached to the  
camcorder) and an external battery (connected to the DC  
IN connector) at the same time, you can avoid breaks in  
operation due to dead batteries.  
Battery pack  
Align these lines.  
When the external battery begins to fail and an  
internal battery pack is also used  
Remove the DC output cable from the DC IN connector.  
The power source will switch to the internal battery pack.  
Power Supply  
110  
               
When the external battery begins to fail and an  
internal battery pack is not used  
First load the camcorder with a fully charged internal  
battery pack, then remove the DC output cable of the  
external battery from the DC IN connector. The power  
source will switch to the internal battery pack. To use an  
external battery again, connect a fully charged external  
battery to the DC IN connector before unloading the  
internal battery pack. The power source will switch to the  
external battery.  
to an AC power  
source  
Connecting to an AC power source  
using the AC-DN10 AC Adaptor  
Continuous operation when operating with only  
an internal battery pack  
First, connect a fully charged external battery to the DC IN  
connector, then change the internal battery.  
7-1-4 Using the Anton Bauer  
Ultralight System  
Notes  
• When an internal battery pack is loaded and an external  
battery is connected to the DC IN connector, the external  
battery is always used as the power source.  
• There may be some noise on the video signal at the  
instant the power sources are switched.  
By fitting the camcorder with the Anton Bauer Ultralight  
system, and setting the LIGHT switch to AUTO, you can  
switch the light on and off automatically as you start and  
stop VTR operation. This system operates with lights  
powered by 12 V, with a maximum power consumption of  
50 W.  
7-1-3 Using an AC Adaptor  
Using the AC-550/550CE AC adaptor  
Connect the camcorder to the AC power supply through  
the AC-550/550CE AC Adaptor as shown in the following  
figure, and turn the POWER switch of the AC-550/550CE  
on.  
to an AC power source  
Power switch on  
AC Adaptor  
AC-550/  
550CE  
DC OUT  
DC IN  
DC output cable (supplied with  
the AC-550/550CE)  
Using an AC adaptor  
Using the AC-DN10 AC adaptor  
Mount the AC-DN10 on the camcorder in the same way as  
a battery pack, then connect to the AC power supply. The  
AC-DN10 can supply up to 100 W of power.  
Power Supply  
111  
           
1
2
3
Loosen the viewfinder front-rear positioning lever and  
the LOCK knob.  
7-2 Adjusting the  
Viewfinder  
Slide the viewfinder longitudinally to the most  
convenient position.  
Tighten the viewfinder front-rear positioning lever and  
the LOCK knob.  
For maximum viewing convenience, you can adjust the  
viewfinder position in the left-right and backward-forward  
directions.  
7-2-2 Adjusting the Viewfinder  
Focus and Screen  
7-2-1 Adjusting the Viewfinder  
Position  
Adjusting the viewfinder focus  
Turn the diopter adjustment ring until the viewfinder  
image is sharpest.  
Adjusting the position to the left or right  
Proceed as follows:  
Diopter adjustment ring  
3
1
2
Adjusting the position to the left or right  
Adjusting the viewfinder focus  
1
2
3
Loosen the viewfinder left-right positioning ring.  
Adjusting the viewfinder screen  
Adjust the brightness, contrast, and peaking of the  
viewfinder screen with the controls shown below:  
Slide the viewfinder to the s convenient position.  
Tighten the viewfinder left-right positioning ring.  
To store the camcorder in the carrying case  
BRIGHT control  
CONTRAST control  
PEAKING control  
Always store the camcorder with the viewfinder moved  
fully in the direction opposite to the barrel and the  
viewfinder left-right positioning ring tightened.  
Adjusting the position backward or  
forward  
Proceed as follows:  
Adjusting the viewfinder screen  
1
1
3
2
Adjusting the position backward or forward  
Adjusting the Viewfinder  
112  
         
7-2-3 Detaching the Viewfinder  
7-2-4 Detaching the Eyepiece  
Removing the eyepiece gives a clearer view of the screen  
from further away. It is also easy to remove dust from the  
viewfinder screen and mirror when the eyepiece is  
detached.  
Viewfinder stopper  
3
1
Turn the eyepiece locking ring fully counterclockwise,  
to align the red marks on the locking ring and the  
viewfinder barrel.  
1
2
Red mark  
Red mark  
4
Locking ring  
Line up the red marks.  
Detaching the viewfinder  
2
Detach the eyepiece.  
1
2
3
Point the viewfinder barrel up or down.  
Loosen the viewfinder left-right positioning ring.  
Holding the viewfinder stopper up, slide the  
viewfinder in the direction indicated by the arrow and  
detach it.  
4
Remove the viewfinder cable and microphone cable  
from the clamps and disconnect them.  
Using the viewfinder rotation bracket  
Reattaching the eyepiece  
By fitting a BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket (not  
supplied), you can rotate the viewfinder out of the way so  
that your right leg does not hit the viewfinder while you are  
carrying the camcorder.  
1
2
Align the red marks on the eyepiece locking ring and  
the viewfinder barrel.  
Align the red mark on the end of the eyepiece end with  
the red marks on the eyepiece locking ring and the  
viewfinder barrel. Then insert the eyepiece into the  
viewfinder barrel.  
Using the BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket  
Red mark on the end of the eyepiece  
For more information, refer to the BKW-401 manual.  
Adjusting the Viewfinder  
113  
             
3
Turn the eyepiece locking ring clockwise until its  
“LOCK” arrow points at the red mark on the  
viewfinder barrel.  
7-3 Mounting the Lens  
Note  
To mount the lens, proceed as follows:  
When the eyecup is worn out, replace it with a new one  
(service part number 3-723-079-03).  
For information about using the lens, refer to the lens  
manual.  
Lens mount  
securing rubber  
1 3  
5 4 2  
Mounting the lens  
1
2
3
Push the lens locking lever upward and remove the  
lens mount cap from the lens mount.  
Align the center slot in the lens mount with the center  
pin on the lens and insert the lens into the mount.  
Holding the lens in place, push the lens locking lever  
downward to mount the lens.  
Note  
If the lens is not firmly locked, it may come off while  
the camcorder is being used. This could cause a serious  
accident. Make sure the lens is firmly locked. It is  
recommended that the lens mount securing rubber  
(supplied) be put on the lens-locking lever as  
illustrated above.  
4
5
Connect the lens cable to the LENS connector.  
Note  
Connecting a cable to the LENS connector while in  
powered status may cause a malfunction or damage the  
unit. Turn off the power before you make a connection  
with the LENS connector.  
Secure the lens cable with the cable clamps.  
Mounting the Lens  
114  
   
7-4 Adjusting the Flange 7-5 Audio Input System  
Focal Length  
7-5-1 Using the Supplied  
Microphone  
If the lens does not stay in focus properly as you zoom  
from telephoto to wide angle, adjust the flange focal length  
(the distance from the plane of the lens mounting flange to  
the imaging plane). Make this adjustment after mounting  
or changing the lens.  
You can use the supplied microphone either detached from  
or attached to the camcorder.  
Using the microphone detached from the  
camcorder  
Adjusting the flange focal length  
The position of the controls for adjusting the flange focal  
length vary somewhat from lens to lens. Check the  
identification of the various controls in the lens manual.  
Connect to the MIC IN  
connector.  
About 3 m (10 ft)  
Set the AUDIO IN switch for  
the desired audio recording  
channel to FRONT.  
Adjusting the flange focal length  
Using the supplied microphone detached  
from the camcorder  
1
2
Set the iris to manual.  
Note  
Open the iris. Place the flange focal length adjustment  
chart about 3 m (10 ft) away from the camera, lit well  
enough to provide a satisfactory video output level.  
When using the supplied microphone with an extension  
cable, always use an external power supply type cable.  
3
Loosen the fixing screws on the F.f or F.B ring (flange  
focal length adjustment ring).  
Using the microphone attached to the  
camcorder  
4
5
Use manual or power zoom to set the lens to telephoto.  
1
Loosen the screw and open the microphone holder  
clamp.  
Point the camera at the chart by turning the focus ring  
and focus on it.  
6
7
Set the zoom ring to wide angle.  
Turn the F.f or F.B ring until the chart is in focus, being  
careful not to disturb the focus ring.  
Clamp of the  
Microphone holder  
8
9
Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the chart stays in focus all the  
way from wide angle to telephoto.  
Tighten the F.f or F.B ring fixing screws.  
Adjusting the Flange Focal Length / Audio Input System  
115  
         
2
Place the microphone in the microphone holder.  
Using a detached external microphone  
Tighten the screw.  
Place the microphone in  
the holder so that “UP” is  
at the top.  
LINE/MIC/+48 V ON  
switch:  
Set the LINE/MIC/+48 V  
ON switch to +48 V ON if  
you use an external  
power supply type  
microphone. Otherwise,  
set the switch to MIC.  
Close the microphone holder.  
External  
microphone  
AUDIO IN for  
CH-1 or CH-2  
3
Plug the microphone cable into the MIC IN connector,  
then set the AUDIO IN switch for the desired  
recording channel to FRONT.  
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches:  
When the audio cable is connected to either  
the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector with the  
XLR connection automatic detection function  
set to ON on the AUDIO-1 page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu, the signal input to the  
AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector is  
automatically selected as the signal to be  
recorded. This is true regardless of the  
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switch settings. (This  
is called XLR connection automatic detection  
function.)  
When the XLR connection automatic  
detection function is set to OFF (factory  
setting), set the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switch  
corresponding to the channel to which the  
microphone is connected to REAR.  
Connect to the MIC IN connector.  
Note  
In order for the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 connectors on  
the camcorder to be able to provide a phantom 48 V power  
supply, female XLR connectors (3-pin) are fitted. If the  
microphone cable has a female connector, use an adaptor.  
7-5-2 Using an External Microphone  
You can connect up to two external microphones using the  
AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 connectors.  
When using a condenser microphone that requires external  
power (phantom power), set the LINE/MIC/+48 V ON  
switch to +48 V ON.  
If the microphone being used does not require external  
power (dynamic microphone), set the LINE/MIC/+48 V  
ON switch to MIC.  
Using an external microphone attached to  
the camcorder  
You can attach an external microphone to the camcorder  
using the optional CAC-12 microphone holder.  
1
Remove the fixing screws for external microphone  
holder.  
2
Attach the CAC-12 Microphone Holder.  
Audio Input System  
116  
     
Note  
Screws removed  
When you detach the CAC-12 Microphone Holder once  
you have attached to the camcorder, be careful not to lose  
the two screws fixing the CAC-12. After detaching the  
CAC-12, be sure to put the two screws back into their  
original places (see the figure illustrating the step 1  
operation).  
in step 1  
CAC-12  
7-5-3 Attaching a UHF Portable  
Tuner (for a UHF Wireless  
Microphone System)  
3
Open the CAC-12 and remove the microphone  
adaptor.  
To use a Sony UHF wireless microphone system, fit one of  
the following UHF portable tuners.  
Open the CAC-12.  
• WRR-855A/855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit  
• WRR-860/862 UHF Portable Tuner.  
For each of these UHF portable tuners, use the following  
attachment procedure.  
Microphone  
adaptor  
1)  
For details, refer to the UHF portable turner manual.  
Loosen the screw.  
1) Attach the microphone adaptor when using a small-  
diameter external microphone.  
Fitting the WRR-855A/855B  
You can use the WRR-855A/855B UHF Synthesized  
Tuner Unit simply by inserting it into the slot in the  
camcorder, and fastening the fixing screws.  
4
Place an ECM-672 electret condenser microphone in  
the CAC-12.  
1
Undo the four fixing screws holding the cover of the  
slot, and remove the cover.  
Close the CAC-12.  
Tighten the screw.  
ECM-672 or similar  
microphone  
f
2
Insert the WRR-855A/855B, and fasten the four fixing  
screws.  
5
Connect the microphone cable to the AUDIO IN CH1  
or AUDIO IN CH2 connector.  
Set the LINE/MIC/+48 V ON switch to +48 V ON if  
you use an external power supply type microphone.  
Otherwise, set the switch to MIC.  
Audio Input System  
117  
       
Battery Pack  
WRR-855A/855B  
Adjustment screws  
Mountplate (supplied  
with WRR-862)  
Set the AUDIO IN switch to WIRELESS.  
Back of camcorder  
For the operation of the WRR-855A/855B, refer to the  
manual supplied with the WRR-855A/855B.  
Screwdriver  
Notes  
2
3
Mount the tuner on the WRR tuner fitting.  
• When the XLR connection automatic detection function  
is on, even if the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch is set  
to WIRELESS, the signal input to the AUDIO IN CH1  
or CH2 connector is automatically selected when an  
audio cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2  
connector. In such a case, set REAR XLR AUTO to OFF  
on the AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
• The audio signals to be recorded on audio channels 3 and  
4 depend on the settings of the AUDIO IN CH-3/CH-4  
switches without being affected by the XLR connection  
automatic detection function.  
WRR-862  
Fitting the WRR-862 (with a battery pack)  
Connect the tuner power cord to the DC OUT  
connector of the camcorder, and the audio output cable  
to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector.  
1
(1)Attach the WRR tuner fitting (not supplied, service  
part number: A-8278-057-A) to the back of the  
camcorder.  
LINE/MIC/+48 V ON  
switch:  
Set the LINE/MIC/  
+48 V ON switch for  
the channel to which  
the audio out cable is  
attached to MIC.  
1 Use a Phillips-type screwdriver to tighten the  
four screws placed in the tuner fitting. For three  
of these screws, insert the screwdriver through  
the corresponding hole and tighten the screw.  
2 Loosen the adjustment screws.  
3 Adjust the tuner fitting position for a battery  
pack to be attached, and tighten the adjustment  
screws to fix its position.  
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches:  
When the XLR connection  
automatic detection function is  
set to OFF on the AUDIO-1 page  
of the MAINTENANCE menu,  
set the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2  
switch for the channel to which  
the audio output cable is  
to AUDIO IN CH1 or  
CH2 connector  
4 Attach the mount plate supplied with the WRR-  
to DC OUT connector  
862.  
(2)Attach the battery pack.  
connected to REAR.  
For details about attaching the battery pack, see “7-1-  
1 Using a Battery Pack” on page 110.  
Audio Input System  
118  
7-5-4 Connecting Line Input Audio  
Equipment  
7-6 Tripod Mounting  
Connect the audio output connector of the audio  
equipment that supplies the line input signal to the AUDIO  
IN CH1 or CH2 connector.  
You can easily mount and dismount the camcorder on a  
tripod by using the VCT-14 tripod adaptor (not supplied).  
1
Attach the tripod adaptor to the tripod.  
LINE/MIC/+48 V ON  
switch:  
Set the LINE/MIC/+48 V  
ON switch for the  
channel to which the  
audio out cable is  
attached to LINE.  
Tripod adaptor  
Camera mount  
Audio equipment  
AUDIO IN for  
CH-1 or CH-2  
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches:  
2
Mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor.  
When the audio cable is connected to either  
the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector with  
REAR XLR AUTO set to ON on the AUDIO-1  
page of the MAINTENANCE menu, the signal  
input to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector  
is automatically selected as the signal to be  
recorded. This is true regardless of the  
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switch settings. (This is  
called XLR connection automatic detection  
function.)  
When the XLR connection automatic  
detection function is set to OFF (factory  
setting), set the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2  
switch corresponding to the channel to which  
the audio equipment is connected to REAR.  
Slide the camcorder  
forward along the groove in  
the adaptor until it clicks.  
Removing the camcorder from the tripod adaptor  
Lever  
Red button  
While pressing the red button against  
the lever, move the lever in the direction  
indicated by the arrow.  
Removing the camcorder from the tripod adapter  
Tripod Mounting  
119  
         
Note  
7-7 Attaching/Detaching  
the Shoulder Strap  
The tripod adaptor pin may remain in the engaged position  
even after the camcorder is removed. If this happens, press  
the red button against the lever a second time and move the  
lever as shown below until the pin returns to the stowed  
position. If the pin remains in the engaged position, you  
will not be able to mount the camcorder on the tripod  
adaptor.  
Attaching the shoulder strap  
Attach the supplied shoulder strap as shown below:  
Stowed position  
Shoulder strap post  
Pin  
If the pin remains in the engaged position  
Pull up the strap to lock  
the fitting.  
Clip  
Removing the shoulder strap  
Press here and pull in  
the direction shown by  
the arrow to release.  
Attaching/Detaching the Shoulder Strap  
120  
     
7-8 Adjusting the  
Shoulder Pad Position  
7-9 Putting on the Rain  
Cover (Not Supplied)  
You can shift the shoulder pad from its center position  
(factory setting) backward by up to 10 mm (3/8 inch) or  
forward by up to 25 mm (1 inch). This adjustment helps  
you get the best balance for shooting with the camcorder  
on your shoulder.  
Attach the rain cover (part number 3-191-064-02) as  
illustrated below. You can insert and remove cassette tapes,  
operate various switches and controls, and mount the  
camcorder on the tripod adaptor with the rain cover  
attached.  
Proceed as follows:  
Whenashoulder  
belt is not used,  
cover the holes  
on the rain cover  
with caps.  
When you use a  
shoulder strap,  
use these holes.  
For details, see  
the following  
1,3  
diagram.  
Bottom  
Rear  
Front  
Shoulder pad  
2
Velcro tape  
Drawstring  
Adjusting the shoulder pad position  
1
2
3
Raise the lever in the center of the shoulder pad to  
unlock the shoulder pad.  
Pass the shoulder strap post clearly through this hole  
on the rain cover.  
Slide the shoulder pad backward or forward until it is  
in the most convenient position.  
Bring down the lever to lock the shoulder pad in the  
selected position.  
Insert the viewfinder barrel here with the  
eyecup out and fasten the drawstring around  
the eyecup.  
Drawstring  
Velcro tape  
Velcro tape  
Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position / Putting on the Rain Cover (Not Supplied)  
121  
         
Function of the VTR START button when  
the remote control unit is connected  
You can select the function of the VTR START button on  
the camcorder when the remote control unit is connected,  
using the RM REC START item on the FUNCTION 3  
page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
7-10 Connecting the  
Remote Control Unit  
Connecting the RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit  
(optional) enables remote control of the principal camera  
functions.  
To disable the camcorder VTR START button and  
the lens VTR button  
Connecting the remote control unit to the REMOTE  
connector (8-pin) automatically puts the camcorder into  
remote control mode. If you disconnect the remote control  
unit, the remote control mode is cancelled.  
On the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu,  
set RM REC START to “RM.”  
If the same function as that of the VTR START button is  
assigned to the ASSIGN 1 switch or the TURBO GAIN  
button, this setting also disables these controls.  
To enable the camcorder VTR START button and  
the lens VTR button  
RM-B150/B750  
On the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu,  
set RM REC START to “CAM” or “PARA.”  
If the same function as that of the VTR START button is  
assigned to the ASSIGN 1 switch or the TURBO GAIN  
button, this setting also enables these controls.  
REMOTE  
connector  
When the monitor is connected to the  
remote control unit  
Remote control cable  
The MONITOR connector (BNC type) of the RM-B150/  
B750 outputs the same signal as that from the TEST OUT  
connector on the camcorder.  
Camcorder switch functions when the  
remote control unit is connected  
Use the black cable supplied with the RM-B150/B750 to  
connect the monitor to the MONITOR connector on the  
RM-B150/B750.  
The following switches on the camcorder do not function.  
• GAIN selector  
• OUTPUT/DCC switch  
• WHITE BAL switch  
• AUTO W/B BAL switch  
• SHUTTER selector  
When the remote control unit is  
disconnected from the camcorder  
• TURBO GAIN button (ASSIGN 1 switch to which the  
TURBO GAIN function is assigned)  
• VTR START button (VTR button on the lens and the  
ASSIGN 1 or the TURBO GAIN switch to which the  
VTR START/STOP function is assigned) (When the RM  
REC START item on the FUNCTION 3 page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu is set to RM.)  
The camcorder settings return to the settings in effect  
before the remote control unit was connected.  
By making a menu setting, the setting of the paint  
adjustment made with the remote control unit can be  
retained even after the remote control unit is removed from  
the camcorder.  
For details, see “Structure of the paint adjustment data”  
below.  
For details of the function of the VTR START button, see  
the item “Function of the VTR START button when the  
remote control unit is connected” on this page.  
Structure of the paint adjustment data  
Paint adjustment when the remote control  
unit is connected  
If RM COMMON MEMORY is set to OFF on the  
FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
The settings of the paint adjustment that were in effect the  
last time the remote control unit was used are recalled.  
The non-volatile memory of the camcorder used for  
storing paint adjustment data consists of two regions as  
shown below: one is the “independent data region” that is  
used when a remote control unit is not connected, and the  
other is the “remote control data region” that is used when  
a remote control unit is connected. Paint adjustment data is  
automatically selected and output to the hardware of the  
camcorder depending on whether or not a remote control  
unit, such as the RM-B150, is connected.  
Connecting the Remote Control Unit  
122  
 
For details on menu operations, see “5-1-2 Basic Menu  
Operations” on page 71.  
Non-volatile memory  
Independent data  
To keep the video quality before a remote control  
unit is connected  
region  
Set RM COMMON MEMORY to ON on the FUNCTION  
3 menu of the MAINTENANCE menu, and set all the  
volume on the remote control unit to the relative value  
mode. After making these settings, connect the remote  
control unit.  
MASTER BLACK  
MASTER GAMMA  
KNEE POINT  
DETAIL LEVEL  
R/B GAIN  
Setup  
menuofthe  
camcorder  
R/B BLACK  
Hardwareof  
the camera  
For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with the  
remote control unit.  
Remote control data  
region  
RM-B150  
MASTER BLACK  
MASTER GAMMA  
KNEE POINT  
DETAIL LEVEL  
R/B GAIN  
RM-B150  
connected  
R/B BLACK  
RM-B150 not  
connected  
Thus, when a remote control unit is connected to the  
camcorder, the effective data region is switched to the  
“remote control data region” and the settings of the paint  
adjustment that were in effect last time the remote control  
unit was used are recalled.  
1)  
Settings of the absolute value volume and absolute value  
2)  
switches are overwritten by those on the remote control  
unit after the remote control unit is connected.  
When the remote control unit is removed from the  
camcorder, the “independent data region” becomes  
effective. Thus the camcorder will return to the settings  
that were in effect before the remote control unit was  
connected.  
1) Absolute value volume  
The data corresponding to the rotation degree (position) of the volume  
knob is output. The data corresponding to the rotation amount (change) is  
called the relative value volume.  
2) Absolute value switch  
Toggle switches or slide switches (except the temporary switches) (or  
controls) whose positions must coincide with their functions are called  
absolute value switches.  
To use settings of the paint adjustment data  
stored in the “independent data region” even  
when you disconnect a remote control unit  
Set RM COMMON MEMORY to ON on the FUNCTION  
3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
In this case, the settings stored in the “independent data  
region” will be renewed according to the change of settings  
in the “remote control data region.” Thus, the settings of  
the paint data made with the remote control unit can be  
retained even if the remote control unit is removed.  
However, if the switch position on the remote control unit  
differs from the one on the camcorder, the switch position  
on the camcorder takes precedence over that on the remote  
control unit.  
Connecting the Remote Control Unit  
123  
8
Maintenance  
Chapter  
Condensation  
If you move the camcorder from a very cold place to a  
warm place, or use it in a damp location, condensation may  
form on the head drum. Then, if the camcorder is operated  
in this state, the tape may adhere to the drum and cause a  
failure or even permanent damage. Do the following to  
prevent this from happening.  
• When moving the camcorder from a cold place to a  
warm place, be sure no cassette is loaded in the  
camcorder.  
8-1 Testing the  
Camcorder Before  
Shooting  
Check the functions of the camcorder before setting out for  
a shooting session, preferably by operating the camcorder  
together with a color video monitor.  
• Whenever you turn on the power, check that the HUMID  
indicator does not appear. If it appears, wait until it  
disappears before loading a cassette.  
8-1-1 Preparations for Testing  
For more information, see “3-1-1 Loading and Unloading  
a Cassette” on page 35 and “8-3 Operation Warnings” on  
page 129.  
3
4
1
8-1-2 Testing the Camera  
Set the switches and selectors as follows:  
Iris: Automatic  
2
1
2
Attach a fully charged battery pack.  
Set the POWER switch to ON and check that the  
HUMID indicator does not appear and that the battery  
power level is sufficient.  
WHITE BAL: A or B  
Zoom: SERVO/MAN  
If the HUMID indicator appears, wait until it  
disappears.  
VTR SAVE/STBY: SAVE  
OUTPUT/DCC: BARS  
3
4
Check that there are no obstructions near the cassette  
lid, and then press the EJECT button to open the  
cassette lid.  
GAIN: Set as low as possible.  
Testing the viewfinder  
Proceed as follows:  
After checking the points below, load the cassette and  
close the cassette lid.  
1
Adjust the position of the viewfinder.  
• The cassette is not write-protected.  
• There is no slack in the tape.  
• Condensation does not form in the tape.  
Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting  
124  
           
2
3
Check that the color bars are displayed on the  
viewfinder screen, and adjust the BRIGHT,  
CONTRAST, and PEAKING controls to give the best  
color bar display.  
9
Check that setting the ZEBRA switch to ON and OFF  
makes the zebra pattern appear and disappear on the  
viewfinder screen.  
Note  
Check each of the following operations.  
The results of checking in steps 3 to 9 may not be as  
expected, depending on the settings relating to the  
viewfinder display function. In this case, set the desired  
items on the VF DISP 1 and VF DISP 2 pages of the USER  
menu.  
• The menu is displayed on the viewfinder screen.  
• Turn the MENU knob and check that the menu page  
changes to the next page.  
• Press the MENU knob and check that settings of  
each item of the selected page are displayed.  
• Turn the MENU knob and check that the b mark  
moves within the page.  
For details, see “5-2-2 Selecting the Display Items” on  
page 79.  
• Press the MENU knob and check that the b mark  
placed before the item changes to a z mark and the  
zmark placed before the setting of the item changes  
to a ? mark.  
• Turn the MENU knob and check that the setting of  
the selected item changes.  
Testing the iris and zoom functions  
1
2
3
Set the zoom to automatic zoom mode and check that  
the power zoom operates correctly.  
Set the zoom to manual zoom mode and check the  
zoom functions manually.  
4
5
Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM, and change  
the inner FILTER (ND filter) selector position in the  
sequence of 1, 2, 3 and 4, and the outer FILTER (CC  
filter) selector position in the sequence B, C, D, A and  
B.  
Set the iris switch on the lens to AUTO and point the  
camera at objects of different brightness. Check that  
the automatic iris adjustment operates correctly.  
Check that the FILTER indicator on the viewfinder  
screen displays the correct numbers.  
4
5
Set the iris switch on the lens to MANUAL and check  
that turning the iris ring manually adjusts the iris  
correctly.  
Carry out of the following operations, and check that  
that the  
indicator lights if the corresponding item  
Set the iris switch on the lens back to AUTO and check  
the following points when the GAIN selector is moved  
from L to M to H.  
has been turned on on the '!' LED page of the USER  
menu.  
• Set the gain to anything but 0 dB by using the GAIN  
selector and the GAIN SW page of the OPERATION  
menu.  
• Set the SHUTTER selector to ON.  
• Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.  
• Use the lens extender.  
• For objects of the same brightness, the iris is  
adjusted to correspond to the change in setting.  
• The gain indicator on the viewfinder screen changes  
to correspond to the change in setting.  
6
If an extender mechanism is incorporated in your lens,  
put the extender lever of the lens into the 2x position  
and check the following points.  
• Set the inner FILTER (ND filter) selector to anything  
but 1.  
• Set the outer FILTER (CC filter) selector to anything  
but B.  
• The indication “EX” appears at the top left on the  
viewfinder screen.  
• Set the iris override to a value other than 0.  
• The auto iris functions correctly.  
6
Move the SHUTTER selector from ON to SEL  
repeatedly, and check that the shutter setting changes  
on the viewfinder screen.  
7
8
Pointing the camera at a suitable subject, focus the  
camera and check the picture on the viewfinder screen.  
Set both of the AUDIO IN switches to FRONT, and  
check that when sound is input to a microphone  
connected to the MIC IN connector on the front of the  
camcorder, the audio level indicators appear on the  
viewfinder screen.  
Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting  
125  
3
4
Set the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch to CH-1/2.  
8-1-3 Testing the VTR  
Aim the microphone connected to the MIC IN  
connector at a suitable sound source. Check that the  
level indications for channels 1 and 2 correspond to the  
sound level, respectively.  
Perform tests (1) to (7) consecutively.  
(1) Testing the tape transport functions  
5
6
7
Set the AUDIO IN CH-3 and CH-4 switches to F.  
Set the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch to CH-3/4.  
1
Set the VTR SAVE/STBY switch to VTR SAVE and  
check that the SAVE indicator in the viewfinder goes  
on.  
Aim the microphone connected to the MIC IN  
connector at a suitable sound source. Check that the  
level indications for both channels 3 and 4 correspond  
to the sound level.  
2
Set the VTR SAVE/STBY switch to STBY and check  
that the VTR SAVE indicator in the viewfinder goes  
off.  
3
4
5
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN to R-RUN.  
Set the DISPLAY switch to CTL.  
8
Be sure to reset the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch to CH-1/2  
after checking the channels 3 and 4.  
Press the VTR START button and check the following  
points.  
(3) Testing the manual audio level  
adjusting functions  
• The tape reels are turning.  
1
2
3
Set the AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 switches to  
FRONT.  
• The counter indication is changing.  
• The REC indicator in the viewfinder is on.  
• The RF and SERVO indicators on the display panel  
are off.  
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH-1 and CH-2 switches to  
MANUAL.  
6
Press the VTR START button again and check that the  
tape stops and that the REC indicator in the viewfinder  
goes off.  
Turn the MIC LEVEL control. Check that the channel-  
1 and -2 audio level meter in the display panel show  
more and more segments as you turn the control  
counterclockwise as seen from the front of the  
camcorder.  
7
8
9
Repeat the checks of steps 5 and 6, this time using the  
VTR button on the lens.  
Press the RESET button and check that the indication  
in the counter display is “00:00:00:00.”  
(4) Testing the earphone and speaker  
1
2
Turn the MONITOR volume control and check that the  
speaker volume changes accordingly.  
Turn on the LIGHT switch and check that the display  
panel is illuminated.  
Connect an earphone to the front or rear EARPHONE  
jack.  
Check that the speaker sound is cut off and that you  
can hear the sound from the microphone in the  
earphone.  
10Hold down the REW button to rewind the tape for a  
while, then press the PLAY button. Check that the  
rewind and playback functions operate normally.  
11Press the STOP button and press the F FWD button.  
Check that the fast forward function operates  
normally.  
3
4
Turn the MONITOR volume control and check that the  
earphone volume changes accordingly.  
(2) Testing the automatic audio level  
adjusting functions  
Connect the earphone to the other EARPHONE jack.  
Check the earphone as in step 3.  
1
2
Set the AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 switches to  
FRONT.  
(5) Testing external microphones.  
1
Connect external microphones to the AUDIO IN CH1/  
CH2 connectors.  
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 switches to  
AUTO.  
Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting  
126  
 
2
Set the LINE/MIC/+48V ON switches as follows:  
4
5
6
7
Press the VTR START button, and check that  
recording starts and that the counter indication  
changes.  
• If the connected microphone is of the internal power  
supply type, set the switch to MIC.  
• If the connected microphone is of the external power  
supply type, set the switch to +48V ON.  
Press the VTR START button again, and check that the  
tape stops and that the counter indication also stops  
changing.  
3
4
5
Set the AUDIO IN switches to REAR.  
Aim the microphones at a sound source.  
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN, and  
check that the counter indication changes regardless of  
whether the tape is running.  
Check that the audio level meter in the display panel  
and the audio level indicators in the viewfinder reflect  
the changing sound level.  
Set the DISPLAY switch to DATA and the DATA  
switch to U-BIT, and check that the user bit data that  
was set is displayed.  
(6) Checking the XLR connection  
automatic detection function  
Before starting to check, remove the front microphone  
connected to the MIC IN connector if it is connected.  
1
Perform the operations of steps 1 and 2 explained in  
(5) “Testing external microphones.”  
2
3
Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to FRONT.  
Perform the operations of steps 4 and 5 explained in  
(5) “Testing external microphones.”  
When performing the operation of step 5 in (5) Testing  
external microphones, if the audio level meters in the  
display panel and audio level indicators in the  
viewfinder reflect the changing sound level, the  
function of the XLR connection automatic detection  
works correctly.  
If it does not reflect the changing sound level, the  
function of the XLR connection automatic detection  
function is off. Set REAR XLR AUTO to “ON” on the  
AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
If it does not reflect even after making this setting, the  
XLR connection automatic detection function does not  
work correctly.  
(7) Checking the user bit and time code  
functions  
1
2
3
Set the user bits as required.  
For the operation, see “4-5-3 Setting the User Bits” on  
page 68.  
Set the time code.  
For the operation, see “4-5-1 Setting the Time Code”  
on page 67.  
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN.  
Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting  
127  
2
3
Remove the eyecup from the eyecup holder.  
8-2 Maintenance  
Remove the protecting filter, together with the packing  
ring, from inside the eyecup holder.  
4
Detach the protecting filter from the packing ring.  
8-2-1 Cleaning the Video Heads  
To clean the video heads, use a Sony BCT-HD12CL  
Cleaning Cassette. Follow the instructions given with the  
cleaning cassette, as incorrect or excessive use could  
damage the video heads.  
Fog-proof filter  
Depending on the temperature and humidity, the protecting  
filter may mist because of vapor or your breath. To ensure  
that the viewfinder is always clear, replace the protecting  
filter with a fog-proof filter (Part No. 1-547-341-11, not  
supplied).  
To clean the heads, perform the following:  
Load the cleaning cassette according to the procedure  
described in “Loading a cassette” (page 35).  
Fitting the fog-proof filter  
The tape runs automatically in PLAY mode for about 5  
seconds to clean the head.  
After the tape runs, the cleaning cassette is automatically  
ejected.  
Replace the protecting filter on the packing ring with the  
fog-proof filter.  
Be sure to correctly assemble the fog-proof filter, the  
packing ring, and the eyecup so that the reassembled  
eyepiece is waterproof.  
Note  
Note  
Do not run the cleaning cassette 5 or more times  
consecutively.  
When cleaning the fog-proof filter, wipe it very gently with  
a soft cloth to avoid damaging the anti-fogging coating.  
8-2-2 Cleaning the Viewfinder  
Use a dust blower to clean the CRT screen and mirror  
inside the viewfinder barrel.  
Clean the lens and protecting filter with a commercially  
available lens cleaner.  
Caution  
Never use organic solvents such as thinner.  
Disassembling the eyepiece for cleaning  
1
4
2
Eyecup  
holder  
Eyecup  
Viewfinder  
barrel  
Protecting  
filter  
Packing  
ring  
3
1
Detach the eyepiece from the viewfinder barrel.  
For the detaching procedure, see “7-2-4 Detaching the  
Eyepiece” on page 113.  
Maintenance  
128  
             
8-3 Operation Warnings  
When a problem occurs at power on or during operation, a  
warning is given by the relevant indicators in the display  
panel, in the viewfinder and on the camcorder body. The  
speaker and earphone also give audible warnings.  
Operation warnings  
Display panel  
Indicators in viewfinder  
Warning  
sounds  
Problem  
VTR operation  
Action to take  
Warning/ Status  
:
: Lit  
: 1 flash/s  
: 4 flashes/s  
Battery  
status  
(Flashing/  
Lit)  
4 beeps/s  
:
indication  
1 beep/s  
:
WARNING REC/tally BATT  
Continuous  
beep  
1)  
1)  
RF  
–
Video  
After clogged head Clean the head. If  
recording is still  
clogged or recordingcontinues substandard, turn off the  
Lit  
Lit  
head gap is detected,  
problem in but may be  
recording  
circuit  
power, and consult your  
Sony service  
substandard.  
representative  
SERVO  
–
Servo lock Recording  
lost  
Turn off the power and  
continuous but may contact your Sony  
be substandard.  
service representative.  
(This indication may be  
given momentarily when  
the tape starts moving,  
but this does not indicate  
a problem.)  
1)  
HUMID!  
SLACK  
Lit  
Lit  
–
–
Condensa- Recording  
tion on the continues but stops until the HUMID indicator  
Stop the tape, and wait  
2)  
optical  
pickup.  
if the tape sticks to disappears.  
the head drum.  
Playback, fast  
forward, and rewind  
do not operate.  
The tape  
VTR stops. An error Remove the cassette by  
cannot be code appears in the the method described in  
wound  
properly.  
time code display  
section of the  
the Maintenance Manual.  
Close the cassette lid  
display panel. Look without loading a  
up the error code in cassette, turn off the  
the Maintenance  
Manual.  
power, and consult your  
Sony service  
representative.  
4)  
1)  
TAPE  
Near the  
end of  
tape  
Operation  
continues.  
Be prepared to change  
the cassette.  
Flashing  
TAPE and Flashing  
E
End of  
tape  
Recording stops.  
Operation  
Change the cassette.  
Change the battery.  
4)  
BATT  
Flashing  
Battery  
almost  
exhausted.  
5)  
continues.  
BATT and Flashing  
E
Battery  
exhausted.  
Operation stops.  
Change the battery.  
1) During recording  
5) The VTR once stops recording in auto interval recording mode.  
2) During playback, fast forward, or stop  
3) Additionally “5-0” appears for the tape remaining indication.  
4) During recording or in stop mode  
Operation Warnings  
129  
   
Operation/error messages  
Notes on CCD image sensors  
An operation or error message is displayed in the  
operation/error message display area (see page 78) in the  
viewfinder.  
Vertical smear  
Smear tends to be produced when an extremely bright  
object is being shot; it is more likely to occur with a faster  
electronic shutter speed.  
Operation/error  
message  
Meaning  
AUTO INTERVAL  
**M**S  
Indicates the camera is in the Auto  
Interval Rec mode. **M**S indicates  
the shooting interval.  
Vertical tails show on the  
image.  
MANU INTERVAL Indicates the camera is in the single  
*FRAME  
shot mode of the Manual Interval Rec  
mode. *FRAME indicates the number  
of frames.  
Bright object (mercury lamp,  
the sun, reflections, etc.)  
INTERVAL **S(M/ Indicates the camera is in the  
H)*FRAME  
consecutive mode of the Manual  
Interval Rec mode. **S(M/H) indicates  
the trigger interval and *FRAME  
indicates the number of frames.  
Monitor screen  
Vertical smear  
LOW LIGHT  
Appears, if set to ON on the menu, to  
indicate the subject illumination is  
inadequate.  
Aliasing  
When patterns of stripes or lines are shot, they may appear  
jagged.  
TAPE REC INH.  
Appears when recording on a write-  
protected cassette.  
Retake Search  
Failed  
Appears when the camcorder fails to  
position the tape at recording starting  
point when recording using the RE-  
1)  
TAKE function.  
Humid Disturbed  
INT REC  
Appears when there are portions  
where recording has failed due to  
condensation while shooting pictures  
at intervals (using the interval rec  
function).  
INVALID  
OPERATION  
Appears when:  
• there is only one recorded cut when  
recording using the RE-TAKE  
function.  
• the recorded cuts are less than 3  
sec. when recording using the RE-  
TAKE function.  
• the RE-TAKE function was denied  
for some reason, e.g. as Picture  
Cache was on.  
• when you execute the RE-TAKE  
operation before the recording  
pause operation has completed.  
ON-BOARD  
BATTERY EMPTY  
Appears when the backup battery for  
the internal clock has been used up.  
2)  
1) In this case, position the tape at the point where you want to start the  
recording manually.  
2) To replace the backup battery, contact your nearest Sony dealer.  
Operation Warnings  
130  
           
Appendixes  
Video Camera Section  
Specifications  
General  
Imager  
2
/ -inch type CCD with 1,000,000  
3
General  
pixels  
Effective picture elements  
980 (H) × 988 (V) with DVW-970  
980 (H) × 1164 (V) with DVW-970P  
Imager Configuration  
Power voltage  
Power consumption  
Approx. 29 W (with 12 V DC supply,  
when recording)  
Operating temperature  
0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)  
Operating humidity  
25% to 85% (relative humidity)  
Storage temperature  
12 V DC +5.0/–1.0 V  
RGB 3 CCDs  
Spectral system F1.4 prism system (with quartz filter)  
Built-in filters  
CC filter  
A: Cross filter  
B: 3200K  
C: 4300K  
D: 6300K  
ND filter  
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)  
Approx. 5.4 kg (12 lb 2 oz) (with  
microphone, viewfinder, BCT-D40  
cassette and BP-GL95 Battery Pack)  
Mass  
1: Clear  
1
2: / ND  
4
1
3: / ND  
16  
Dimensions in mm (inches)  
1
4: / ND  
64  
Lens mount  
Sensitivity  
Special bayonet mount  
F11 standard (89.9% reflection chart,  
2000 lx)  
Minimum illumination  
0.008 1x (at F1.4, +48 dB gain, 16-  
37 (11/2)  
frame slow shutter)  
Video S/N ratio 65 dB (Y typical) (for the DVW-970)  
63 dB (Y typical) (for the DVW-970P)  
Modulation (at screen center)  
4:3 mode: 55%  
308 (121/4)  
345 (135/8)  
16:9 mode: 70%  
Registration  
0.05% or less for entire screen area  
(excluding distortion due to lens)  
Geometric distortion  
None identified (excluding distortion  
Supplied accessories  
Shoulder strap (1)  
due to lens)  
Microphone (super cardioid directional,  
external power supply type) (1)  
Lens mount securing rubber (1)  
Operation guide  
Smear  
–145 dB (Y-typical)  
Japanese version (1) (DVW-970 only)  
Operation manual  
English version (1)  
CD-ROM manual (1)  
Specifications  
131  
           
Viewfinder  
Input/output connectors  
CRT  
2-inch monochrome, quick start type  
Signal inputs  
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2  
Horizontal resolution  
4:3 mode: 600 TV lines (at screen  
XLR type, 3-pin, female  
center)  
–60 dBu/–50 dBu/–40 dBu/+4 dBu  
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms.)  
XLR type, 3-pin, female –60 dBu/–50  
dBu/–40 dBu  
16:9 mode: 450 TV lines (at screen  
center)  
MIC IN  
GENLOCK IN BNC type  
VTR Section  
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, unbalanced  
TC IN  
BNC type  
0.5 V to 18 Vp-p, 10 k Ω  
General  
Usable cassette tapes  
Signal outputs  
TEST OUT  
BCT-D6/D12/D22/D32/D40 1/2-inch  
BNC type  
Digital BETACAM cassette tapes  
Approx. 96.7 mm/s (at 30 frames) (for  
the DVW-970)  
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, unbalanced  
BNC type, 75 Ω, unbalanced  
VBS OUT: 1.0 Vp-p  
SDI OUT: 0.8 Vp-p (only when the  
CBK-SD01 is installed)  
XLR type, 5-pin, male, 0 dBm  
BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω  
minijack  
Tape speed  
VIDEO OUT  
Approx. 80.6 mm/s (at 25 frames) (for  
the DVW-970P)  
Record/playback time  
40 minutes (using BCT-D40 video  
AUDIO OUT  
TC OUT  
EARPHONE  
cassette) (DVW-970)  
48 minutes (using BCT-D40 video  
cassette) (DVW-970P)  
8 Ω, –∞ to –18 dBs variable  
Fast forward time  
Rewind time  
Others  
DC IN  
DC OUT  
Approx. 5 minutes (using BCT-D40  
video cassette)  
Approx. 5 minutes (using BCT-D40  
video cassette)  
XLR type, 4-pin, male, 11 to 17 V DC  
4-pin, 11 to 17 V DC, maximum rated  
current 0.1 A  
12-pin  
8-pin  
LENS  
REMOTE  
Continuous recording time  
Approx. 170 minutes (using BP-GL95  
Battery Pack)  
Approx. 110 minutes (using BP-GL65  
Battery Pack)  
Recommended Additional  
Equipment  
Digital video  
Sampling frequency  
Y: 13.5 MHz  
Power supply and related equipment  
BP-GL65/GL95/L60S Battery Pack  
BC-M50/M150 Battery Charger  
AC-550/550CE AC Adaptor  
AC-DN10 AC Adaptor  
R–Y/B–Y: 6.75 MHz  
10 bits/sample  
Coefficient recording system  
Quantization  
Compression  
Channel coding S-NRZI PR-IV  
Error correction Reed-Solomon code  
MPEG IMX cassette tapes  
BCT-D6/D12/D22/D32/D40  
Audio (with standard playback machine)  
Frequency response  
20 Hz to 20 kHz +0.5/–0.8 dB  
Dynamic range 85 dB min. (emphasis ON)  
Distortion (THD) 0.08% max.  
Viewfinder and related equipment  
BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket  
Fog-proof filter (Part No. 1-547-341-11)  
Lens assembly (farsighted) (Part No. A-8262-537-A)  
Lens assembly (low magnification) (Part No. A-8262-538-  
A)  
Cross talk  
–70 dB max.  
Wow and flutter Below measurable limit  
Lens assembly (standard magnification with special  
compensation for aberrations) (Part No. A-8267-737-A)  
Specifications  
132  
     
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
Optical attachments  
1
ND filter ( / ND) (Part No. 3-174-685-01)  
8
1
ND filter ( / ND) (Part No. 3-174-683-01)  
32  
Consult your Sony representative for more information  
about these filters.  
Equipment for remote control  
RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit  
Wireless video/audio transmission  
WLL-CA50 Wireless Camera Transmitter  
“Memory Stick”  
MSH-32 (32 MB)  
MSH-64 (64 MB)  
MSH-128 (128 MB)  
Audio equipment  
ECM-672 Microphone  
CAC-12 Microphone Holder  
CCXA-53 Audio Cable (for converting 5-pin connector to  
two 3-pin connectors)  
WRR-855A/855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit  
WRR-860/862 UHF Portable Tuner  
WRT-850/860 UHF Transmitter  
WRR Tuner Fitting (service part number: A-8278-057-A)  
For Audio equipment described above, confirm whether  
the connector is male or female and the number of pins on  
the connector.  
The audio input connectors of the camcorder are female  
and 3-pin and the audio output connectors are male and 5-  
pin. A converting adaptor may be required depending on  
the audio equipment to be connected to the camcorder.  
Extension boards  
CBK-FC01 Pull Down (24P) Board (for the DVW-970  
only)  
CBK-SD01 SDI Output Board  
CBK-MB01 Picture Cache Board  
Equipment for maintenance and easier  
handling  
BCT-HD12CL Cleaning Cassette  
LC-DN7 Hard Carrying Case  
LC-DS300SFT Soft Carrying Case  
Tripod Adaptor VCT-14  
Rain cover (Part No. 3-191-064-02)  
Maintenance Manual  
Specifications  
133  
 
Menu List  
This section briefly explains menus that the camcorder  
provides for adjustments and settings using tables.  
For the menu organization and the USER menu, see  
Chapter 5.  
OPERATION Menu  
The following table lists and describes the items in the  
OPERATION menu. Some pages of the OPERATION  
menu have been registered in the USER menu at the  
factory. These pages are indicated by a circle (a) in the  
USER menu column. The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE  
menu allows you to add and delete pages in the USER  
menu to suit your requirements.  
When the setting range in the Settings column is  
surrounded by parentheses ( ), the setup value is a relative  
value. The setting range shown on the menu screen may  
differ from what is shown in the manual.  
USER  
menu  
No.  
01  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
VBS/SDI  
OFF/ON  
Default  
VBS  
Description  
a
OUTPUT  
TEST OUT  
REAR BNC OUT SEL  
TEST OUT MARKER  
See “5-3-2 Selecting the  
Output Signals” on page 88.  
a
02  
OFF  
Selects whether or not the  
marker signal is mixed to the  
output signal from the TEST  
OUT connector.  
TEST OUT VFDISP  
TEST OUT MENU  
TEST OUT ZEBRA  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
Selects whether or not the VF  
DISP display signal is mixed  
to the output signal from the  
TEST OUT connector.  
Selects whether or not the  
MENU display signal is mixed  
to the output signal from the  
TEST OUT connector.  
Selects whether or not the  
ZEBRA display signal is  
mixed to the output signal  
from the TEST OUT  
connector.  
TEST OUT TC  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
ENC  
Selects whether or not a time  
code signal is mixed to the  
output signal from the TEST  
OUT connector.  
TEST OUT SELECT  
ENC/R/G/B  
Selects the output signal of  
TEST OUT.  
Menu List  
134  
       
USER  
menu  
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
Description  
a
03  
FUNCTION 1 ASSIGN SW <1>  
OFF/CACHE/  
ATW  
See “5-3-5 Assigning  
Functions to Assignable  
Switches” on page 90.  
CHARA/MARKR/  
RTAKE/ATW/RET.V/  
RET/REC/TURBO/  
D5600/ZEBRA etc.  
ASSIGN SW <2>  
TURBO SW  
OFF/CACHE/  
CHARA/MARKR/  
EXT. V/ZEBRA/5600  
etc.  
OFF  
OFF/CACHE/  
TURBO  
CHARA/MARKR/  
RTAKE/ATW/RET.V/  
RET/REC/TURBO/  
D5600/ZEBRA etc.  
DF/NDF  
(DVW-970 only)  
DF/NDF  
DF  
Switches between drop frame  
(DF) mode and non-drop  
frame (NDF) mode.  
END SEARCH  
ON/OFF  
OFF  
Turns the END SEARCH  
function on/off.  
CACHE/INTVAL REC  
OFF/CACHE/A.INT/ OFF  
M.INT  
See “3-2-4 Starting a Shoot  
with a Few Seconds of Pre-  
Stored Picture Data (Picture  
Cache Function: with CBK-  
MB01)” on page 42.  
(CACHE)  
CACHE REC TIME  
0/1/2/3/4/5/6/8 SEC 0 SEC  
(A.INT)  
TAKE TOTAL TIME  
5/10/15/20/30/40/50 5 MIN  
MIN,  
1/2/3/4/5/7/10/15/20/  
30/40/50/70/100 H  
See “3-2-5 Shooting Picture  
at Intervals (Interval Rec  
Function: with CBK-MB01)”  
on page 44.  
(A.INT)  
REC TIME  
5/10/15/20/30/40/50 5 SEC  
SEC, 1 to 40 MIN  
(M.INT except TRIGGER OFF/2SEC/5SEC/  
OFF  
INTERVAL=M)  
PRE-LIGHTING  
10SEC  
(M.INT)  
1/2/4/8  
1
NUMBER OF FRAME  
(M.INT)  
TRIGGER INTERVAL  
M, 1 to 10/15/20/30/  
40/50 SEC,  
M
1 to 10/15/20/30/40/  
50 MIN,  
1/2/3/4/6/12/24 H  
Menu List  
135  
 
USER  
menu  
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
Description  
04  
FUNCTION 2 D5600  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
Turns on and off the function  
which electrically applies a  
5600K color temperature  
filter.  
WIDE AWB  
OFF/ON  
ON  
Turns on and off the function  
which widens the range  
adjustable by Auto White  
Balance.  
WHITE SWITCH <B>  
SHOCKLESS WHITE  
MEM/ATW  
OFF/1/2/3  
MEM  
1
Sets the function of the  
WHITE BAL B switch.  
Changes the white gain  
smoothly when operating the  
WHITE BAL switch.  
ATW SPEED  
LOW LIGHT  
1 to 5  
4
Changes the speed of the  
Auto Tracing White operation.  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
Turns the warning display on/  
off when the video average  
level is less than the preset  
value.  
LOW LIGHT LEVEL  
VF BATT WARNING  
(–99 to +99)  
10/20%  
0
Sets the level at which the  
LOW LIGHT function  
becomes effective.  
10%  
Sets the threshold value of  
remaining battery capacity to  
make the remaining capacity  
indication flash.  
a
05  
VF DISP 1  
VF DISP  
OFF/ON  
1/2/3  
OFF  
3
See “5-2-2 Selecting the  
Display Items” on page 79.  
VF DISP MODE  
DISP EXTENDER  
DISP FILTER  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
INT/VOLT/AUTO  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
DISP WHITE  
DISP GAIN  
ON  
DISP SHUTTER  
DISP AUDIO  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
DISP TAPE  
DISP IRIS  
a
06  
VF DISP 2  
DISP ZOOM  
ON  
OFF  
INT  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
See “5-2-2 Selecting the  
Display Items” on page 79.  
DISP COLOR TEMP  
DISP BATT REMAIN  
DISP DC IN  
DISP 16:9/4:3 ID  
DISP WRR RF LVL  
DISP E. MARK IND  
DISP TIME CODE  
Menu List  
136  
         
USER  
menu  
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
Description  
a
07  
'!'LED  
GAIN  
<!>  
<!>  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
80/90/92/95%  
OFF/ON  
14:9/13:9/4:3  
OFF/ON  
1/2, 1/4, 1/8  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
1 to 465  
ON  
See “2-9 Indicators in the  
Viewfinder” on page 34.  
SHUTTER  
ON  
WHT PRESET<!>  
ATW RUN <!>  
EXTENDER <!>  
FILTER <!>  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OVERRIDE <!>  
MARKER  
a
08  
MARKER 1  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
90%  
OFF  
4:3  
See “5-2-4 Setting the Marker  
Display” on page 81.  
CENTER  
SAFETY ZONE  
SAFETY AREA  
ASPECT  
ASPECT SELECT  
ASPECT MASK (4:3)  
ASPECT MASK LVL  
100% MARKER  
USER BOX  
OFF  
1/4  
OFF  
OFF  
245  
09  
MARKER 2  
Turns the box cursor on/off.  
USER BOX WIDTH  
Adjusts the width (from the  
center to right or left side) of  
the box cursor.  
USER BOX HEIGHT  
1 to 120 (DVW-970) 72  
1 to 142 (DVW-970P) 85  
Adjusts the height (from the  
center to top or bottom) of the  
box cursor.  
USER BOX H POS.  
USER BOX V POS.  
–461 to +461  
0
0
Adjusts the H position of the  
center.  
–118 to +118  
(DVW-970)  
Adjusts the V position of the  
center.  
–141 to +140  
(DVW-970P)  
CENTER H POS.  
CENTER V POS.  
–48 to +47  
0
0
Adjusts the H position of the  
center marker.  
–15 to +14  
Adjusts the V position of the  
center marker.  
a
a
10  
11  
GAIN SW  
GAIN LOW  
–3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/  
30/36/42/48  
0
See “5-3-1 Setting Gain  
Values for the GAIN Selector  
Positions” on page 87.  
GAIN MID  
9
GAIN HIGH  
GAIN TURBO  
TURBO SW IND  
18  
42  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
OFF  
1
VF SETTING ZEBRA  
ZEBRA SELECT  
OFF/ON  
See “5-2-5 Setting the  
Viewfinder” on page 81.  
1/2/BOTH  
20 to 107  
1 to 20  
ZEBRA1 DET.LEVEL  
ZEBRA1 APT.LEVEL  
ZEBRA2 DET.LEVEL  
VF DTL LEVEL  
70%  
10%  
100%  
0
52 to 109  
(–99 to +99)  
AUTO/16:9  
VF ASPECT  
AUTO  
Menu List  
137  
         
USER  
menu  
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
Description  
a
12  
AUTO IRIS  
IRIS OVERRIDE  
IRIS SPEED  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
0
See “4-3 Changing the  
Reference Value for  
Automatic Iris Adjustment” on  
page 62.  
(–99 to +99)  
OFF/ON  
CLIP HIGH LIGHT  
IRIS WINDOW  
OFF  
1
1/2/3/4/5/6/VAR  
OFF/ON  
IRIS WINDOW IND.  
IRIS VAR WIDTH  
IRIS VAR HEIGHT  
OFF  
245  
20 to 465  
17 to 120 (DVW-970) 72  
20 to 142  
85  
(DVW-970P)  
IRIS VAR H POS.  
IRIS VAR V POS.  
–447 to +446  
0
0
–104 to +104  
(DVW-970)  
–124 to +123  
(DVW-970P)  
a
a
13  
14  
SHOT ID  
ID-1  
12 characters  
—
See “5-2-7 Setting the Shot  
ID” on page 83.  
ID-2  
ID-3  
ID-4  
SHOT DISP  
SHOT DATE  
SHOT TIME  
SHOT MODEL NAME  
SHOT SERIAL NO  
SHOT ID SEL  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
See “5-2-6 Recording Shot  
Data Superimposed on the  
Color Bars” on page 82.  
OFF/ID-1/ID-2/ID-3/ OFF  
ID-4  
SHOT 16:9 ID  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
SHOT BLINK CHARA  
a
15  
16  
SET STATUS STATUS ABNORMAL  
STATUS FUNCTION  
See “5-2-8 Displaying the  
Status Confirmation  
Windows” on page 84.  
ON  
STATUS AUDIO  
ON  
OFFSET  
WHT  
OFFSET WHITE <A>  
WARM COOL <A>  
OFF  
3200  
See “5-3-4 Specifying an  
Offset for the Auto White  
Balance Setting” on page 89.  
Display color  
temperature  
COLOR FINE <A>  
OFFSET WHITE <B>  
WARM COOL <B>  
(–99 to +99)  
OFF/ON  
0
OFF  
3200  
Display color  
temperature  
COLOR FINE <B>  
(–99 to +99)  
0
Menu List  
138  
         
USER  
menu  
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
Description  
17  
SHT ENABLE SHUTTER SLS  
SHUTTER ECS  
SHUTTER 1/32  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
1 to 17*  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
1
See “4-2 Setting the  
Electronic Shutter” on page  
59.  
The items which can be set  
differ depending on the CCD  
scan mode setting (see page  
94).  
SHUTTER 1/33  
SHUTTER 1/40  
SHUTTER 1/48  
SHUTTER 1/50  
SHUTTER 1/60  
SHUTTER 1/96  
SHUTTER 1/100  
SHUTTER 1/120  
SHUTTER 1/125  
SHUTTER 1/250  
SHUTTER 1/500  
SHUTTER 1/1000  
SHUTTER 1/2000  
a
18  
19  
LENS FILE  
FORMAT  
LENS FILE SELECT  
F.ID  
See “5-3-7 Selecting the Lens  
File” on page 93.  
(Display only)  
—
*: “17” can be selected only  
when a lens having serial  
transmission ability is  
mounted.  
16:9/4:3 SELECT  
SCAN MODE  
16:9/4:3  
I/PsF/24P  
UC/J  
16:9  
I
See “5-3-8 Selecting the  
Aspect Ratio” on page 93.  
See “5-3-9 Setting the CCD  
Scan Mode” on page 94.  
UC/J SELECT  
(DVW-970 only)  
UC  
Selects the signal format.  
20  
UMID SET  
EX-OWNERSHIP REC  
COUNTRY CODE  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
—
See “5-3-1 Setting Gain  
Values for the GAIN Selector  
Positions” on page 87.  
4-byte alphanumeric  
strings  
ORGANIZATION  
USER CODE  
4-byte alphanumeric  
strings  
—
4-byte alphanumeric  
strings  
—
INSTANCE NO  
RND/GEN  
RND  
TIME ZONE : 00  
00 to 25,1A to 1F, 2A 00  
to 2F, 32, 3A to 3F  
MACHINE  
n
—
Menu List  
139  
       
PAINT Menu  
The following table lists and describes the items in the  
PAINT menu.  
value. The setting range shown on the menu screen may  
differ from what is shown in the manual.  
When the setting range in the Settings column is  
surrounded by parentheses ( ), the setup value is a relative  
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
Default Description  
P01  
SW STATUS  
GAMMA  
CHROMA  
ON  
ON  
Turns the gamma correction on/off.  
Turns the chroma of the composite signal on/  
off.  
MATRIX  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
ON/OFF  
OFF/ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
Turns the linear matrix correction on/off.  
Turns the knee correction on/off.  
Turns the white clipping correction on/off.  
Turns the detail signal on/off.  
KNEE  
WHITE CLIP  
DETAIL  
APERTURE  
FLARE  
Turns the aperture function on/off.  
Turns the flare function on/off.  
EVS  
Turns the EVS shutter on/off.  
TEST SAW  
COLOR TEMP <A>  
OFF/REC/SAW OFF  
Selects the test signal.  
P02  
WHITE  
Display color  
temperature  
3200  
Sets the color temperature of WHITE A.  
COLOR FINE <A>  
(–99 to +99)  
0
Adjusts the value more precisely when the  
color temperature adjustment through  
COLOR TEMP is not satisfactory.  
R GAIN <A>  
B GAIN <A>  
D5600K <A>  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
OFF/ON  
0
Only the value of R GAIN is changed.  
Only the value of B GAIN is changed.  
0
OFF  
Turns the WHITE A electronic 5600K filter on/  
off.  
COLOR TEMP <B>  
COLOR FINE <B>  
Display color  
temperature  
3200  
0
Sets the color temperature of WHITE B.  
(–99 to +99)  
Adjusts the value more precisely when the  
color temperature adjustment through  
COLOR TEMP is not satisfactory.  
R GAIN <B>  
B GAIN <B>  
D5600K <B>  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
OFF/ON  
0
Only the value of R GAIN is changed.  
Only the value of B GAIN is changed.  
0
OFF  
Turns the WHITE B electronic 5600K filter on/  
off.  
P03  
BLACK/FLARE MASTER BLACK  
R BLACK  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
OFF/ON  
0
Adjusts the master black level.  
Adjusts the R black level.  
0
B BLACK  
0
Adjusts the B black level.  
MASTER FLARE  
R FLARE  
0
Adjusts the flare level of the master.  
Adjusts the R flare level.  
0
G FLARE  
0
Adjusts the G flare level.  
B FLARE  
0
Adjusts the B flare level.  
FLARE  
ON  
ENC  
Turns the flare correction circuit on/off.  
TEST OUT SELECT  
ENC/R/G/B  
Selects the output signal of TEST OUT  
connector.  
Menu List  
140  
       
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
OFF/ON  
Default Description  
P04  
GAMMA  
GAMMA  
ON  
Turns the gamma correction function on/off.  
STEP GAMMA  
0.35 to 0.90  
0.45  
Sets the master gamma correction curve in  
steps.  
MASTER GAMMA  
R GAMMA  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
ENC/R/G/B  
0
Sets the master gamma correction curve.  
Sets the R gamma correction curve.  
Sets the G gamma correction curve.  
Sets the B gamma correction curve.  
0
G GAMMA  
0
B GAMMA  
0
TEST OUT SELECT  
ENC  
Selects the output signal of TEST OUT  
connector.  
GAMMA SELECT  
GAM SEL (STD)  
GAM SEL (FILM)  
STD/FILM  
1 to 6  
STD  
3
Selects the gamma table.  
Selects the gamma table of STD.  
Selects the gamma table of FILM.  
Turns the black gamma correction on/off.  
Sets the range affected by black gamma.  
1 to 5  
1
P05  
BLACK GAMMA BLACK GAMMA  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
HIGH  
BLACK GAM RANGE LOW/L.MID/  
H.MID/HIGH  
MASTER BLK  
GAMMA  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
ENC/R/G/B  
0
Adjusts the master black gamma.  
R BLACK GAMMA  
G BLACK GAMMA  
B BLACK GAMMA  
TEST OUT SELECT  
0
Sets the correction curve of the R black  
gamma.  
0
Sets the correction curve of the G black  
gamma.  
0
Sets the correction curve of the B black  
gamma.  
ENC  
Selects the output signal of TEST OUT  
connector.  
P06  
KNEE  
KNEE  
OFF/ON  
ON  
85.0  
0
Turns the knee correction circuit on/off.  
Sets the knee point level.  
KNEE POINT  
50 to 109%  
(–99 to +99)  
OFF/ON  
KNEE SLOPE  
KNEE SATURATION  
KNEE SAT LEVEL  
WHITE CLIP  
Set the knee slope level.  
ON  
0
Turns the knee saturation function on/off.  
Sets the knee saturation level.  
Turns the white clipping function on/off.  
Adjusts the white clipping level.  
(–99 to +99)  
OFF/ON  
ON  
WHITE CLIP LEVEL  
100.0 to 109.5% 109.0  
(DVW-  
970)/  
105.0  
(DVW-  
970P)  
P07  
DETAIL 1  
DETAIL  
OFF/ON  
ON  
ON  
0
Sets the detail correction function on/off.  
Turns the aperture correction function on/off.  
Sets the general level of the detail signal.  
Sets the aperture level.  
APERTURE  
OFF/ON  
DETAIL LEVEL  
APERTURE LVL  
DTL H/V RATIO  
CRISPENING  
LEVEL DEPEND  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
OFF/ON  
0
0
Sets the level of the V detail signal.  
Sets the crispening level.  
0
ON  
0
Turns the level depend function on/off.  
Sets the level of the level depend.  
Sets the frequency of the H detail signal.  
LEVEL DEPEND LVL (–99 to +99)  
DETAIL FREQUENCY (–99 to +99)  
0
Menu List  
141  
       
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
OFF/ON  
Default Description  
P08  
DETAIL 2  
KNEE APERTURE  
KNEE APT LVL  
DETAIL COMB  
OFF  
Turns the knee aperture function on/off.  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to 0)  
0
0
Sets the knee aperture level.  
Sets the level at which the comb filter  
becomes effective.  
CROSS COLOR  
CROSS COLOR LVL  
DETAIL LIMIT  
ON/OFF  
OFF  
43  
0
Turns the cross color component on/off.  
Sets the suppression level of the cross color.  
Sets the both detail black and white limiters.  
Sets the detail white limiter.  
0
to 99  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
OFF/ON  
DTL WHT LIMIT  
DTL BLK LIMIT  
DTL V-BLK LMT  
FINE DTL  
0
0
Sets the detail black limiter.  
0
Sets the V detail black limiter.  
P09  
P10  
DETAIL 3  
OFF  
0
Turns the fine detail function on/off.  
FINE DTL LVL  
(–99 to +99)  
Sets the level at which the fine detail function  
becomes effective.  
V DTL CREATION  
NAM/G/R+G/Y  
R+G  
V
Selects the source signal of the V DTL signal.  
H/V CONTROL MODE H/V / V  
Select the operation mode of DETAIL H/V  
RATIO on the DETAIL 1 page. (H/V: H and V  
both enabled, V: V DTL only enabled)  
SKIN DETAIL  
SKIN DETAIL ALL  
SKIN DETECT  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
Turns on all of 1, 2 and 3 of the color detail  
function.  
Moves to color  
detection page.  
EXEC  
OFF  
Executes the color detail function.  
SKIN AREA IND  
OFF/ON  
Turns the zebra indication on/off in the area of  
the currently selected type of the color detail  
function.  
SKIN DTL SELECT  
SKIN DETAIL  
1/2/3  
1
Selects the channels to be displayed on the  
menu.  
OFF/ON  
ON  
Turns the color detail function on/off for the  
selected channels.  
SKIN DETAIL LVL  
SKIN DTL SAT  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
0
0
Sets the level of the color detail signal.  
Adjusts the saturation level of the hue  
possessed by the color detail function.  
SKIN DTL HUE  
(0 to 359)  
(0 to 359)  
0
Adjusts the center phase of the hue  
possessed by the color detail function.  
SKIN DTL WIDTH  
40  
Adjusts the width of the hue possessed by the  
color detail function.  
Menu List  
142  
     
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default Description  
P11  
MTX LINEAR  
MATRIX  
OFF/ON  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
0
Turns the linear matrix correction and user-  
set matrix correction functions on/off.  
MATRIX (USER)  
MATRIX (PRESET)  
MATRIX R-G  
OFF/ON  
Turns the user-set matrix correction function  
on/off.  
OFF/ON  
Turns the preset matrix correction function  
on/off.  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
OFF/ON  
Sets the arbitrary R-G user-set matrix  
coefficients.  
MATRIX R-B  
0
Sets the arbitrary R-B user-set matrix  
coefficients.  
MATRIX G-R  
0
Sets the arbitrary G-R user-set matrix  
coefficients.  
MATRIX G-B  
0
Sets the arbitrary G-B user-set matrix  
coefficients.  
MATRIX B-R  
0
Sets the arbitrary B-R user-set matrix  
coefficients.  
MATRIX B-G  
0
Sets the arbitrary B-G user-set matrix  
coefficients.  
P12  
MTX MULTI  
MATRIX  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
Turns the linear matrix correction and multi  
matrix correction functions on/off.  
MATRIX (MULTI)  
MATRIX AREA IND  
OFF/ON  
Turns the multi matrix correction function on/  
off.  
OFF/ON  
Turns the zebra indication on/off in the area  
corresponding to the currently selected  
setting.  
MATRIX COLOR DET Moves to color  
detection page.  
EXEC  
B
Detects color.  
MTX (MULTI) AXIS  
B/B+/MG–/MG/  
MG+/R/R+/YL–/  
YL/YL+/G–/G/  
G+/CY/CY+/B–  
Selects the axis for which the multi matrix  
correction function can be changed.  
MTX (MULTI) HUE  
MTX (MULTI) SAT  
(–99 to +99)  
0
0
Adjusts the color phase affected by the multi  
matrix correction function in every sixteen-  
axis mode.  
(–99 to +99)  
Adjusts the saturation level affected by the  
multi matrix correction function in every  
sixteen-axis mode.  
P13  
V MODULATION V MOD  
MASTER VMOD  
OFF/ON  
ON  
0
Turns the V modulation function on/off.  
(–99 to +99)  
Turns the master V modulation function on/  
off.  
R VMOD  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
ENC/R/G/B  
0
Turns the R V modulation function on/off.  
Turns the G V modulation function on/off.  
Turns the B V modulation function on/off.  
Selects the output signal of TEST OUT.  
G VMOD  
0
B VMOD  
0
TEST OUT SELECT  
ENC  
Menu List  
143  
     
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default Description  
P14  
LOW KEY SAT. LOW KEY SAT  
L.KEY SAT LEVEL  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
0
Turns the low key saturation function on/off.  
(–99 to +99)  
Sets the saturation level of the low luminance  
part.  
L.KEY SAT RANGE  
LOW/L.MID/  
H.MID/HIGH  
HIGH  
Sets the luminance level at which the low key  
saturation function becomes effective.  
Y BLACK GAMMA  
Y BLK GAM LEVEL  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
0
Turns the Y black gamma function on/off.  
(–99 to +99)  
Sets the gamma curve in the low luminance  
part.  
Y BLK GAM RANGE  
LOW/L.MID/  
H.MID/HIGH  
HIGH  
Sets the luminance level at which the Y black  
gamma becomes effective.  
P15  
SCENE FILE  
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Recalls the scene file saved in the memory of  
the camcorder.  
2
3
4
5
STANDARD  
Clears all current detail-adjusted settings and  
switch settings and returns the settings to the  
standard settings saved in the reference file.  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F.ID  
—
—
—
—
Recalls the scene file from the memory of the  
camcorder or the “Memory Stick.”  
—
Stores the scene file in the memory of the  
camcorder or the “Memory Stick.”  
16 characters  
Sets the File ID.  
Menu List  
144  
   
MAINTENANCE Menu  
The following table lists and describes the items in the  
MAINTENANCE menu.  
When the setting range in the Settings column is  
surrounded by parentheses ( ), the setup value is a relative  
value. The setting range shown on the menu screen may  
differ from what is shown in the manual.  
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
Description  
M01 WHT SHADING WHT SHAD CH  
SEL  
R/G/B/TEST  
R
Selects the channel adjusted by this menu. If  
TEST is selected, the setting is the same as  
the setting of TEST OUT SELECT.  
TEST OUT SELECT ENC/R/G/B  
R/G/B WHT H SAW (–99 to +99)  
ENC  
0
Selects the signal output to the TEST OUT  
connector.  
Adjusts the H Saw white shading  
compensation.  
R/G/B WHT H PARA (–99 to +99)  
0
Adjusts the H Parabola white shading  
compensation.  
R/G/B WHT V SAW (–99 to +99)  
0
Adjusts the V Saw white shading  
compensation.  
R/G/B WHT V PARA (–99 to +99)  
0
Adjusts the V Parabola white shading  
compensation.  
WHITE SAW/PARA OFF/ON  
ON  
R
Turns white shading Saw and Parabola  
compensation on and off.  
M02 BLK SHADING BLK SHAD CH SEL R/G/B/TEST  
Selects the channel adjusted by this menu. If  
TEST is selected, the setting is the same as  
the setting of TEST OUT SELECT.  
TEST OUT SELECT ENC/R/G/B  
ENC  
Selects the signal output to the TEST OUT  
connector.  
R/G/B BLK H SAW (–99 to +99)  
R/G/B BLK H PARA (–99 to +99)  
0
0
For the H Saw black shading compensation  
For the H Parabola black shading  
compensation  
R/G/B BLK V SAW (–99 to +99)  
R/G/B BLK V PARA (–99 to +99)  
0
0
For the V Saw black shading compensation  
For the V Parabola black shading  
compensation  
BLACK SAW/PARA OFF/ON  
ON  
Turns black shading Saw and Parabola  
compensation on and off.  
MASTER BLACK  
(–99 to +99)  
0
Adjusts the master black level.  
MASTER  
GAIN(TMP)  
–3/0/3/6/9/12/18/  
24/30/36/42/48 dB  
0 dB  
Temporarily adjusts the master gain value.  
M03 LEVEL ADJ  
ENC VIDEO LEVEL (–99 to +99)  
RGB LEVEL (–99 to +99)  
TEST OUT SELECT ENC/R/G/B  
0
Adjusts the encoder video level.  
Adjusts the R/G/B video level.  
0
ENC  
Selects the signal output to the TEST OUT  
connector.  
H BLANKING  
WIDTH  
(–99 to +99)  
0
Adjusts the H blanking width.  
Menu List  
145  
       
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
Description  
M04 BATTERY  
BEFORE END 1  
5/10/15 to 95/100% 5%  
(in 5% steps)  
Used when a Sony-made battery pack, such  
as BP-GL65/GL95, is used. Set the voltage  
warning level just before the battery ends.  
END 1  
0/1/2/3/4/5%  
0%  
Used when a Sony-made battery pack, such  
as BP-GL65/GL95, is used. Set the voltage  
level at which the battery ends and the  
camcorder stops operation, just before the  
battery ends.  
BEFORE END 2  
END 2  
11.0 to 17.0 V  
(in 0.1 V steps)  
11.3  
11.0  
Used when a Sony-made battery pack, such  
as BP-L60S, is used. Set the voltage warning  
level just before the battery ends.  
10.5 to 11.5 V  
(in 0.1 V steps)  
Used when a Sony-made battery pack, such  
as BP-L60S, is used. Set the voltage level at  
which the battery ends and the camcorder  
stops operation, just before the battery ends.  
BEFORE END 3  
END 3  
11.0 to 17.0 V  
(in 0.1 V steps)  
11.8  
11.0  
Used when a battery pack other than a Sony-  
made one or an external power connected to  
the DC IN connector is used. Set the voltage  
warning level just before the battery ends.  
10.5 to 14.0 V  
(in 0.1 V steps)  
Used when a battery pack other than a Sony-  
made one or an external power connected to  
the DC IN connector is used. Set the voltage  
level at which the battery ends and the  
camcorder stops operation, just before the  
battery ends.  
BATT REMAIN  
DISP  
1/2/3  
1
1: Standard mode  
2: LCD remaining indication mode: One x on  
the LCD indicates 10% for a battery  
classified in <Others..., EXT DC> type.  
3: ANTON mode: Remaining detection of the  
ANTON type is made even for a battery  
classified in <SONY> type.  
M05 AUDIO-1  
AUDIO OUT (F/R)  
REC AUDIO OUT  
CA-701 AUDIO IN  
CUE/EE  
EE  
Selects the audio output signal during FF/  
REW.  
CUE: cue audio signal  
EE: Input signal  
EE/SAVE  
EE  
Selects the audio output signal during  
recording.  
EE: Input signal  
SAVE: Not to outputl  
ENABL/DSABL  
ENABL  
When a CA-701 camera adaptor is  
connected, select whether or not to enable  
input of audio channels 3 and 4 from the  
camera adaptor.  
ENABL: Camera adaptor can be used.  
DSABL: Camera adaptor cannot be used.  
AUDIO CH3/4  
MODE  
CH1/2/SW  
OFF/ON  
SW  
Selects the sources to be recorded to  
channels CH-3/4.  
CH1/2: Same sources as CH-1/2.  
SW: Signals selected by the AUDIO IN CH-3/  
CH-4 switches.  
REAR XLR AUTO  
FRONT MIC REF  
REAR MIC REF  
OFF  
Turns the XLR connection automatic  
detection on/off .  
–60 dB/–50 dB/–40 –60 dB  
dB  
Sets the reference level of the front  
microphone.  
–60 dB/–50 dB/–40 –60 dB  
dB  
Sets the reference level when the AUDIO IN  
CH1 or CH2 connector is set to MIC.  
Menu List  
146  
   
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
OFF  
Description  
M06 AUDIO-2  
AU REC EMPHASIS OFF/ON  
Turns the emphasis function on/off.  
Turns cue audio recording on/off.  
Sets the output level of the 1 kHz test signal.  
CUE REC  
OFF/ON  
ON  
AU REF LEVEL  
–20 dB/–18 dB/–16 –20 dB  
dB  
AU REF OUT  
0 dB/+4 dB/–3 dB  
MONO/STREO  
0 dB  
Sets the output reference level.  
AU CH12 AGC  
MODE  
MONO  
Selects automatic adjustment mode of the  
input levels of analog audio signals to be  
recorded on channels 1 and 2; MONO (to  
independently adjust channel 1 and 2) or  
STREO (stereo mode).  
AU CH34 AGC  
MODE  
OFF/MONO/  
STREO  
MONO  
Selects automatic adjustment mode of the  
input levels of analog audio signals to be  
recorded on channels 1 and 2; MONO (to  
independently adjust channel 1 and 2),  
STREO (stereo mode), or OFF.  
AU AGC SPEC  
–6/–9/–12/–15/–17 –6 dB  
dB  
Sets the AGC characteristics (saturation  
level).  
AU LIMITER MODE OFF/–6/–9/–12/  
–15/–17 dB  
OFF  
Sets the limiter characteristics (saturation  
level) for high-level input signals in manual  
adjustment of the audio input level.  
AU OUT LIMITER  
OFF/ON  
ON  
Turns the audio output limiter on/off.  
Menu List  
147  
 
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
Description  
M07 AUDIO-3  
AU SG (1kHz)  
ON/OFF/AUTO  
OFF  
Sets whether to output a 1 kHz test tone  
during the Color Bar mode or not.  
ON: a 1 kHz test tone is output during the  
Color Bar mode.  
OFF: a 1 kHz test tone is not output during  
the Color Bar mode.  
AUTO: a 1 kHz test tone is output only when  
the CH 1 AUDIO SELECT switch on the  
inside panel is in the AUTO position.  
MIC CH1 LEVEL  
SIDE1/FRONT/  
F+S1  
FRONT  
FRONT  
SIDE 1  
When recording the front microphone sound  
on CH 1, select which control is to be used for  
the level adjustment.  
SIDE 1: Adjust it with the LEVEL control (left  
side) on the side panel.  
FRONT: Adjust it with the MIC LEVEL control  
on the front panel.  
F + S1: It can be adjusted using either the  
LEVEL control (left side) or the MIC  
LEVEL control. (The two controls are  
linked to each other.)  
MIC CH2 LEVEL  
SIDE2/FRONT/  
F+S2  
When recording the front microphone sound  
on CH 2, select which control is to be used for  
the level adjustment.  
SIDE 2: Adjust it with the LEVEL control (right  
side) on the side panel.  
FRONT: Adjust it with the MIC LEVEL control  
on the front panel.  
F + S2: It can be adjusted using either the  
LEVEL control (right side) or the MIC  
LEVEL control. (The two controls are  
linked to each other.)  
REAR1/WRR  
LEVEL  
SIDE1/FRONT/  
F+S1  
Selects any of these controls to adjust the  
audio level of the equipment that is connected  
to the wireless microphone and whatever is  
connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 connector  
on the rear panel.  
SIDE 1: Adjust it with the LEVEL control (left  
side) on the side panel.  
FRONT: Adjust it with the MIC LEVEL control  
on the front panel.  
F + S1: It can be adjusted using either the  
LEVEL control (left side) or the MIC  
LEVEL control. (The two controls are  
linked to each other.)  
REAR2/WRR  
LEVEL  
SIDE2/FRONT/  
F+S2  
SIDE 2  
Selects any of these controls to adjust the  
audio level of the equipment that is connected  
to the wireless microphone and whatever is  
connected to the AUDIO IN CH2 connector  
on the rear panel.  
SIDE 2: Adjust it with the LEVEL control (right  
side) on the side panel.  
FRONT: Adjust it with the MIC LEVEL control  
on the front panel.  
F + S2: It can be adjusted using either the  
LEVEL control (right side) or the MIC  
LEVEL control. (The two controls are  
linked to each other.)  
Menu List  
148  
 
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
Description  
M08 TIMECODE  
TC OUT  
AUTO/GENE  
AUTO  
Selects the time code signal output.  
AUTO: Outputs the time code generator  
output during recording and outputs the  
time code reader output during playback.  
GENE: Outputs the time code generator  
output during recording and playback.  
DF/NDF  
(DVW-970 only)  
DF/NDF  
INT/EXT  
DF  
Sets DF or NDF mode.  
DF: Drop frame mode  
NDF: Non-drop frame mode  
EXT-LK UBIT  
INT  
Sets whether the LTC UBIT setup value locks  
to an INT or an EXT source when the time  
code is locked to an external source.  
INT: Internal lock  
EXT: External lock  
LTC UBIT  
FIX/TIME  
FIX/TIME  
FIX  
FIX  
ON  
Sets the data to be recorded in UBIT of LTC.  
FIX: Records the data that is set by the user.  
TIME: Records the present time.  
VITC UBIT  
Sets the data to be recorded in UBIT of VITC.  
FIX: Records the data that is set by the user.  
TIME: Records the present time.  
WATCH AUTO ADJ OFF/ON  
Turns the automatic time correction function  
of the built-in clock on/off . With ON, the time  
of the built-in clock matches with the time  
data of the user bits of an external time code.  
UBIT GROUP ID  
VITC INS LINE 1  
000/101  
000  
16H  
Selects the UBIT GROUP ID.  
12 to 19 H  
(DVW-970)  
Selects the line into which VITC is to be  
inserted.  
9 to 22 H  
(DVW-970P)  
19H  
18H  
21H  
ON  
VITC INS LINE 2  
12 to 19 H  
(DVW-970)  
Selects the line into which VITC is to be  
inserted.  
9 to 22 H  
(DVW-970P)  
M09 VTR MODE  
REC TALLY BLINK OFF/ON  
Turns the tally illumination control on/off in the  
event of BATTERY BEFORE END/DISC  
BEFORE END.  
REC START BEEP OFF/ON  
OFF  
Turns on/off the alarm sound at REC START/  
STOP.  
LCD DISPLAY  
HOLD  
TIMER/OFF/CONT TIMER  
Sets the time code (TC) display after power-  
off as follows.  
TIMER: The TC display turns off after the  
elapse of the time set by the LCD HOLD  
TIMER below.  
OFF: Not displayed.  
CONT: Displayed.  
LCD HOLD TIMER 1H/3H/8H  
1H  
EE  
Sets the duration of time after which the TC  
display is to be turned off after power-off,  
when LCD DISPLAY HOLD is set to TIMER  
(H: hours).  
VIDEO OUT (F/R)  
STBY OFF TIMER  
EE/PB  
Selects the video output signal during FF/  
REW.  
EE: Input signal  
PB: Playback signal  
OFF/5MIN/10MIN/ 60MIN  
30MIN/60MIN  
Sets the length of time for the stand-by off  
timer.  
STOP KEY FREEZE OFF/FRAME/  
FIELD  
OFF  
Selects the freeze function.  
Menu List  
149  
   
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
Description  
M10 ESSENCE  
MARK  
LTC UB-MARKER  
SET/ALL/OFF  
SET  
Sets whether to write the markers in UBIT of  
LTC or not.  
SET: To independently select the ON/OFF  
setting of the following items, REC START  
MARK, SHOT MARK 1, and SHOT MARK  
2
ALL: To write REC START MARK, SHOT  
MARK 1, and SHOT MARK 2 all.  
OFF: None are written.  
REC START MARK OFF/ON  
OFF  
Turns REC START MARK on/off.  
Turns SHOT MARK 1 on/off.  
Turns SHOT MARK 2 on/off.  
SHOT MARK 1  
SHOT MARK 2  
SHOT TIME DISP  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
OFF  
MD:HM/DM:HM/  
D:HMS  
MD:HM  
Selects the format of the time to be displayed  
on the LCD.  
MD:HM: Month, day, hour, minute  
DM:HM: Day, month, hour, minute  
D:HMS: Day, hour, minute, second  
M11 ESSENCE  
MARK2  
OVER AUDIO LIMIT OFF/ON  
GAIN CHG MARK OFF/ON  
FILTER CHG MARK OFF/ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
Turns the function to write a mark when the  
audio level exceeds 0 dB in recording on/off.  
Turns the function to write a mark when the  
gain is changed in recording on/off.  
Turns the function to write a mark when the  
ND filter or CC filter is changed in recording  
on/off.  
SHUTTER CHG  
MARK  
OFF/ON  
ON  
Turns the function to write a mark when the  
shutter speed or shutter mode is changed in  
recording on/off.  
WHITE CHG MARK OFF/ON  
ON  
ON  
Turns the function to write a mark when the  
white balance is changed in recording on/off.  
FLASH MARK  
OFF/ON  
1 to 20  
Turns the function to write a mark when an  
extreme luminunce change occurs in  
recording on/off.  
FLASH MARK  
LEVEL  
10  
Sets the threshold of the lluminance change  
to permit a mark to be written for FLASH  
MARK.  
E. MARK SD LINE  
12/13/15/16/17/18/ 17  
19 (DVW-970)  
Specifies the essence mark output SDI VANC  
LINE number to be recorded on the tape.  
9/10/12/13/14/15/  
16/17/18 (DVW-  
970P)  
M12 PRESET WHT  
COLOR TEMP <P> Display color  
temperature.  
3200  
White balance preset value  
COLOR FINE <P> (–99 to +99)  
0
—
R GAIN  
B GAIN  
D5600K  
<P> (–99 to +99)  
<P> (–99 to +99)  
<P> OFF/ON  
0
R gain preset value  
B gain preset value  
Turns the electric 5600K filter on/off.  
0
OFF  
OFF  
AWB ENABLE <P> OFF/ON  
Turns the function which automatically  
acquires the preset value for automatic white  
balance adjustment on/off.  
Menu List  
150  
     
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
Description  
M13 DCC ADJUST  
DCC FUNCTION  
SEL  
DCC/ADP.K/FIX  
DCC  
Selects the function assigned to the DCC  
switch.  
ADP.K is Adaptive knee and FIX is fixed knee.  
DCC D RANGE  
400/450/500/550/  
600%  
600%  
Sets the timing range when the DCC switch is  
set to the ON position.  
DCC POINT  
DCC GAIN  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
0
0
For the DCC minimum knee point adjustment  
For the gain adjustment to DCC detected  
value  
DCC DELAY TIME  
IRIS WINDOW  
(–99 to +99)  
0
1
Adjusts the DCC reaction speed.  
M14 AUTO IRIS 2  
1/2/3/4/5/6/VAR  
Selects the auto iris detection window. VAR is  
variable.  
IRIS WINDOW IND OFF/ON  
OFF  
Turns on and off the function which displays a  
frame marker for the auto iris detection  
window.  
IRIS LEVEL  
(–99 to +99)  
0
0
Adjusts the level of the auto iris target value  
IRIS APL RATIO  
(–99 to +99)  
Adjusts the mix ratio of auto iris detection  
peak value and average value.  
IRIS VAR WIDTH  
IRIS VAR HEIGHT  
20 to 465  
245  
Sets the width and height of detection frame  
when the auto iris detection window is set to  
VAR.  
17 to 120  
(DVW-970)  
72  
85  
0
Sets the height of detection frame when the  
auto iris detection window is set to VAR.  
20 to 142  
(DVW-970P)  
IRIS VAR H POS.  
IRIS VAR V POS.  
–447 to +446  
Sets the horizontal position of detection frame  
when the auto iris detection window is set to  
VAR.  
–104 to +104  
(DVW-970)  
0
0
Sets the vertical position of detection frame  
when the auto iris detection window is set to  
VAR.  
–124 to +123  
(DVW-970P)  
IRIS SPEED  
(–99 to +99)  
OFF/ON  
0
Adjusts the auto iris operation speed.  
CLIP HIGH LIGHT  
OFF  
Turns on and off the function which, during  
auto iris adjustment, ignores very bright areas  
by dulling the reaction to high luminescence.  
Menu List  
151  
   
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
Description  
M15 FUNCTION 3  
WHT FILTER INH  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
Turns on and off the function which inhibits  
independent white memory for each filter  
position.  
COLOR BAR SEL  
REC TALLY  
SMPTE/EBU/SNG SMPTE  
Selects the color bar type.  
(DVW-  
970)  
EBU  
(DVW-  
970P)  
UPPER/BOTH  
UPPER  
Selects whether to light the upper tally  
indicator only, or both upper and lower tally  
indicators.  
COLOR VF INPUT COMP/VBS/BOTH COMP  
For video input selection when a color  
viewfinder is used  
USER & ALL ONLY OFF/ON  
OFF  
OFF  
RM  
Selects whether to show only USER, USER  
MENU CUSTOMIZE, and ALL menus in the  
top menu.  
RM COMMON  
MEMORY  
OFF/ON  
Selects whether or not to share settings for  
when an RM remote control unit is connected  
and when the unit is used alone.  
RM REC START  
RM/CAM/PARA  
Selects which VTR START/STOP buttons (on  
the RM, camera, or both) are enabled when  
an RM-series remote control unit is  
connected.  
REC INH. WITH  
CCU  
OFF/ON  
ON  
Selects whether to disable recording  
operations when a CCU is connected. A  
large viewfinder cannot be used with the OFF  
setting.  
EXT VTR REC CTL OFF/ON  
OFF  
Selects whether to synchronize recording  
with an external VTR via a CCZ cable when  
the CA-702 is connected.  
M16 GENLOCK  
GENLOCK  
OFF/ON  
ON  
OFF  
0
Turns genlock on and off.  
RETURN VIDEO  
GL H PHASE  
OFF/ON  
Turns return video on and off.  
Adjusts the genlock H phase.  
Adjusts the genlock subcarrier phase.  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
0/180  
GL SC PHASE  
GL SC 0/180 SEL  
0
180  
For coarse adjustment of the genlock  
subcarrier phase.  
M17 ND COMP  
ND OFFSET  
ADJUST  
OFF/ON  
—
Turns on and off the mode which sets ND  
(neutral density) filter color compensation  
values.  
CLEAR ND  
OFFSET  
—
EXEC  
EXEC  
Clears ND filter color compensation values.  
Executes the auto black shooting function.  
Clears black shooting compensation values.  
M18 AUTO SHADING AUTO BLK  
SHADING  
EXEC  
EXEC  
RESET BLK SHD  
EXEC  
ENC  
TEST OUT SELECT ENC/R/G/B  
Selects the signal output to the TEST OUT  
connector.  
MASTER GAIN  
(TMP)  
–3/0/3/6/9/12/18/  
24/30/36/42/48 dB  
0 dB  
0
Temporarily sets the master gain value.  
M19 VANC RX  
UMID LINE  
0/12/13/15/16/17/  
18/19 (DVW-970)  
Selects the line on which the UMID is to be  
recorded.  
0/9/10/12/13/15/16/  
17/18 (DVW-970P)  
Menu List  
152  
         
FILE Menu  
The following table lists and describes the items in the  
FILE menu.  
value. The setting range shown on the menu screen may  
differ from what is shown in the manual.  
When the setting range in the Settings column is  
surrounded by parentheses ( ), the setup value is a relative  
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
EXEC  
EXEC  
—
Description  
F01 USER FILE  
USER FILE LOAD  
USER FILE SAVE  
F. ID  
—
See “6-1 Saving and Loading User Files” on  
page 100.  
—
16 characters  
—
USER PRESET  
EXEC  
See “5-4 Resetting USER Menu Settings to the  
Standard Settings” on page 99.  
F02 USER FILE2 STORE USR PRESET  
CLEAR USR PRESET  
—
—
—
EXEC  
EXEC  
EXEC  
OFF  
Sets the pages registered in the USER menu  
to the standard setting.  
Clears the standard setting of pages registered  
in the USER menu.  
CUSTOMIZE RESET  
Returns the setting of the pages registered in  
the USER menu to the factory default state.  
LOAD CUSTOM DATA OFF/ON  
Selects whether to read the USER MENU  
CUSTOMIZE settings to be loaded by USER  
FILE LOAD.  
LOAD OUT OF USER  
BEFORE FILE PAGE  
USER LOAD WHITE  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
Selects whether to read pages not registered  
by USER FILE LOAD.  
Selects whether to read data after USER FILE  
pages by USER FILE LOAD.  
Selects whether to read white balance data by  
USER FILE LOAD.  
F03 ALL FILE  
ALL FILE LOAD  
ALL FILE SAVE  
F. ID  
—
EXEC  
EXEC  
—
Loads ALL file.  
—
Saves ALL file.  
16 characters  
To name ALL file.  
ALL PRESET  
—
—
—
EXEC  
EXEC  
EXEC  
Returns items in the ALL file to preset values.  
Sets the preset values of items in the ALL file.  
STORE ALL PRESET  
CLEAR ALL PRESET  
Clears the preset values of items in the ALL  
file.  
3SEC CLR PRESET  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
Turns on and off the function to clear the  
standard setting when the MENU knob is kept  
pressed for 3 seconds.  
F04 SCENE FILE  
1
—
—
See “6-2 Saving and Loading Scene Files” on  
page 104.  
2
—
—
3
—
—
4
—
—
5
—
—
STANDARD  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F. ID  
—
—
—
EXEC  
EXEC  
—
—
16 characters  
Menu List  
153  
         
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
EXEC  
EXEC  
EXEC  
EXEC  
—
Description  
F05 REFERENCE REFERENCE STORE  
REFERENCE CLEAR  
REFERENCE LOAD  
REFERENCE SAVE  
—
Saves the reference file in internal memory.  
Clears the reference file.  
—
—
Loads the reference file.  
—
Saves the reference file to “Memory Stick.”  
To name the reference file.  
F. ID  
16 characters  
OFF/ON  
SCENE WHITE DATA  
OFF  
See “White balance setting data to be saved in  
the scene file” on page 105.  
F06 LENS FILE 1 LENS FILE RECALL  
LENS FILE STORE  
F. ID  
—
EXEC  
EXEC  
—
Loads lens files.  
Saves lens files.  
To name lens files.  
To clear lens files.  
—
16 characters  
—
LENS NO OFFSET  
SOURCE MEMORY  
IRIS GAIN  
EXEC  
—
MEMORY1 Number of selected lens file  
(–99 to +99)  
OFF/ON  
0
Iris gain value of lens file  
LENS AUTO RECALL  
ON  
Turns the automatic recall function for serial  
lens.  
F07 LENS FILE 2 LENS M VMOD  
LENS CENTER H  
(–99 to +99)  
–48 to +47  
0
0
For the lens file V Saw shading  
For the horizontal position compensation of  
lens file center marker  
LENS CENTER V  
–15 to +14  
0
For the vertical position compensation of lens  
file center marker  
TEST OUT SELECT  
LENS R FLARE  
ENC/R/G/B  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
R/G/B/TEST  
ENC  
Selects signal output to TEST OUT connector.  
Adjusts the lens file flare (R).  
0
0
0
0
0
R
LENS G FLARE  
Adjusts the lens file flare (G).  
LENS B FLARE  
Adjusts the lens file flare (B).  
LENS W-R OFST  
Adjusts the R compensation value for white.  
Adjusts the B compensation value for white.  
LENS W-B OFST  
F08 LENS FILE 3 SHADING CH SEL  
Selects the channel adjusted by this menu. If  
TEST is selected, the setting is the same as  
the setting of TEST OUT SELECT.  
TEST OUT SELECT  
ENC/R/G/B  
ENC  
Selects the signal output to the TEST OUT  
connector.  
LENS R/G/B H SAW  
LENS R/G/B H PARA  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
0
0
For the H Saw white shading compensation  
For the H Parabola white shading  
compensation  
LENS R/G/B V SAW  
LENS R/G/B V PARA  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
0
0
For the V Saw white shading compensation  
For the V Parabola white shading  
compensation  
F09 MEMORY  
STICK  
M.S. FORMAT  
—
EXEC  
OFF  
Formats a “Memory Stick.”  
M.S. IN > JUMP TO  
OFF/USER/  
ALL/SCENE/  
LENS/REFER/  
USER1  
See “6-3 Jumping to a File-Related Menu Page  
When Inserting a “Memory Stick”” on page  
108.  
Menu List  
154  
         
DIAGNOSIS Menu  
The following table lists and describes the items in the  
DIAGNOSIS menu.  
No.  
Page  
Item  
Description  
D01  
HOURS METER RESET METER  
DRUM RUNNING  
TAPE RUNNING  
Resets the resettable meters (-2).  
Displays the total time the drum has rotated.  
Displays the accumlated time the tape has run.  
Display the time that the unit has been powered.  
Displays the number of time of tape threading.  
Displays the total time the drum has rotated (reset possible).  
Displays the accumlated time the tape has run (reset possible).  
Display the time that the unit has been powered (reset possible).  
Displays the number of time of tape threading (reset possible).  
OPERATION  
THREADING  
DRUM RUNNING-2  
TAPE RUNNING-2  
OPERATION-2  
THREADING-2  
D02  
TIME/DATE  
ADJUST  
See “5-3-6 Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock” on page  
92.  
HOUR  
MIN  
SEC  
YEAR  
MONTH  
DAY  
D03  
ROM VERSION  
DEV STATUS  
AT: Ver. X.XX  
SS: Ver. X.XX  
FP: Ver X.XX  
EQ: Ver X.XX  
AU DISP: Ver X.XX  
Displays ROM version.  
D04  
D05  
I/O EEPROM LSI FRAM SCI Displays the self diagnosis.  
Displays installed options.  
OPTION BOARD SDI OUTPUT  
COMPOSITE VIDEO INPUT  
1)  
PULL DOWN (24P)  
PICTURE CACHE  
1) DVW-970 only  
Menu List  
155  
           
What is MagicGate ?  
MagicGate is copyright protection technology that uses  
encryption technology.  
About a “Memory Stick”  
What is “Memory Stick”?  
Before using a “Memory Stick”  
“Memory Stick” is a new compact, portable and versatile  
IC (Integrated Circuit) recording medium with a data  
capacity that exceeds a floppy disk. “Memory Stick” is  
specially designed for exchanging and sharing digital data  
among “Memory Stick” compatible products. Because it is  
removable, “Memory Stick” can also be used for external  
data storage.  
Terminal  
Write-protect tab  
“Memory Stick” is available in two sizes: standard size and  
compact “Memory Stick Duo” size. Once attached to a  
“Memory Stick Duo” adapter, “Memory Stick Duo” turns  
to the same size as standard “Memory Stick” and thus can  
be used with products compliant with standard “Memory  
Stick”.”  
Labelling position  
• When you set the “Memory Stick” erasure prevention  
switch to “LOCK,” data cannot be recorded, edited, or  
erased.  
Types of “Memory Stick”  
“Memory Stick” is available in the following four types to  
meet various requirements in functions.  
• Data may be damaged if:  
—You remove the “Memory Stick” or turn off the unit  
while it is reading or writing data.  
—You use the “Memory Stick” in a location subject to  
the effects of static electricity or electric noise.  
• We recommend that you make a backup copy of  
important data that you record on the “Memory Stick”.  
“Memory Stick-R”  
Stored data are not overwritten. You can write data to  
“Memory Stick-R” with “Memory Stick-R” compatible  
products only. Copyright protected data that requires  
MagicGate copyright protection technology cannot be  
written to “Memory Stick-R.”  
Notes  
• Do not attach anything other than the supplied label to  
the “Memory Stick” labeling position.  
• Attach the label so that it does not stick out beyond the  
labeling position.  
“Memory Stick”  
Stores any type of data except copyright-protected data  
that requires the MagicGate copyright protection  
technology.  
• Carry and store the “Memory Stick” in its case.  
• Do not touch the connector of the “Memory Stick” with  
anything, including your finger or metallic objects.  
• Do not strike, bend, or drop the “Memory Stick”.  
• Do not disassemble or modify the “Memory Stick”.  
• Do not allow the “Memory Stick” to get wet.  
• Do not use or store the “Memory Stick” in a location that  
is:  
“MagicGate Memory Stick”  
Equipped with the MagicGate copyright protection  
technology.  
“Memory Stick-ROM”  
Stores pre-recorded, read-only data. You cannot record on  
“Memory Stick-ROM” or erase the pre-recorded data.  
—Extremely hot, such as in a car parked in the sun  
—Under direct sunlight  
—Very humid or subject to corrosive substances  
Available types of “Memory Stick”  
ACCESS Indicator  
You can use a “Memory Stick” or a “MagicGate Memory  
Stick” with your product.  
If the access indicator is turned on or is flashing, data is  
being read from or written to the “Memory Stick”. At this  
time, do not shake the computer or product or subject them  
to shock. Do not turn off the power of the computer and  
product or remove the “Memory Stick”. This may damage  
the data.  
Note  
You can not use a “Memory Stick Duo” with your product.  
Note on data read/write speed  
Data read/write speed may vary depending on the  
combination of the “Memory Stick” and “Memory Stick”  
compliant product you use.  
About a “Memory Stick”  
156  
   
Precautions  
• To prevent data loss, make backups of data frequently. In  
no event will Sony be liable for any loss of data.  
• Unauthorized recording may be contrary to the  
provisions of copyright law. When you use a “Memory  
Stick” that has been pre-recorded, be sure that the  
material has been recorded in accordance with copyright  
and other applicable laws.  
• The “Memory Stick” application software may be  
modified or changed by Sony without prior notice.  
• Note that there are certain restrictions on recording stage  
performances and other entertainment events, even if  
they are recorded for personal use only.  
• “Memory Stick”,  
and “MagicGate Memory  
Stick” are trademarks of Sony Corporation.  
• “Memory Stick Duo” and  
are  
are  
are trademarks  
trademarks of Sony Corporation.  
• “Memory Stick PRO” and  
trademarks of Sony Corporation.  
• “MagicGate” and  
of Sony Corporation.  
About a “Memory Stick”  
157  
B
E
Index  
BACK TALLY indicator 31  
BACK TALLY switch 31  
BATT indicator 34  
EARPHONE jacks 19  
ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode 59  
EJECT button 26  
BATTERY 146  
Battery attachment 17  
battery pack 110  
Eject button 27  
End Search function 52  
error messages 130  
Symbols  
'!'LED 137  
Battery status indicator 32  
BKW-401 113  
black balance 56  
BLACK GAMMA 141  
BLACK/FLARE 140  
BLK SHADING 145  
BP-GL65/GL95/L60S 110  
BRIGHT control 22  
Built-in speaker 20  
ESSENCE MARK 150  
ESSENCE MARK page 40, 41  
ESSENCE MARK2 150  
ESSENCE MARK2 page 40  
essence marks 39  
EVS (Enhanced Vertical definition  
System) mode 60  
external microphone 116  
Eyepiece 113  
Numerics  
24P mode 95  
A
ABNORMAL window 84  
AC adaptor 111  
AC-550/550CE 111  
ACCESS indicator 27  
Accessory Attachments 18  
accidental erasure 36  
AC-DN10 111  
actual time in the time code 67  
ADVANCE button 30  
ALARM volume control 20  
Aliasing 130  
disassembling 128  
C
F
Camera operator tally indicator 23  
CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch 28  
cassette  
F FWD button and indicator 26  
FILE menu 71  
FILTER selector 23  
flange focal length 115  
Fog-proof filter 128  
FORMAT 139  
loading 35  
unloading 36  
CBK-MB01 44  
CBK-SD01 53  
ALL FILE 153  
ALL menu 70  
CC filter 57  
FORMAT page 93  
Anton Bauer Ultralight System 111  
aspect ratio 93  
ASSIGN 1/2 switches 24  
ASSIGN SEL window 90  
Assignable Switches 90  
ATW 59, 136  
CCD image sensors 130  
CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch 19  
Cleaning  
freeze-frame mode 54  
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch 30  
FUNCTION 1 135  
FUNCTION 1 page 90  
FUNCTION 2 136  
video heads 128  
viewfinder 128  
color temperature 88  
Condensation 124  
continues recording 38  
Continuous Trigger mode 48  
CONTRAST control 22  
CUE IN switch 21  
FUNCTION 3 152  
FUNCTION window 85  
Audio channel level meter 32  
Audio Functions 19  
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors 21  
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4  
switches 21  
G
Gain 87  
GAIN selector 24  
GAIN SW 137  
GAIN SW page 87  
GAMMA 141  
audio level 64  
AUDIO OUT connector 21  
AUDIOSELECTCH-1/CH-2switches  
20  
AUDIO STATUS window 85  
AUDIO-1 146  
AUDIO-2 147  
AUDIO-3 148  
Auto Interval Rec mode 45  
AUTO IRIS 138  
AUTO IRIS 2 151  
AUTO IRIS page 62  
AUTO SHADING 152  
Auto Tracing White 59, 136  
AUTO W/B BAL switch 24  
automatic black balance adjustment 56  
automatic iris adjustment 62  
automatic iris window 63  
automatic white balance adjustment  
57  
D
DATA DISPLAY switch 30  
Date/Time of the Internal Clock 92  
DC IN connector 17  
DC OUT 12 V connector 21  
DCC ADJUST 151  
GENLOCK 152  
GENLOCK IN connector 29  
GENLOCK page 86  
good shot marks 39, 42  
DETAIL 1 141  
DETAIL 2 142  
DETAIL 3 142  
DEV STATUS 155  
DIAGNOSIS menu 71  
diopter adjustment 112  
Diopter adjustment ring 23  
display mode 80  
Display panel 32  
DISPLAY switch 30, 31  
drop frame mode 67  
H
HOLD button 30  
HOURS METER 155  
I
I mode 94  
Interlace scan mode 94  
Interval Rec Function 44  
Index  
158  
 
OFFSET WHT page 89  
OPERATION menu 70  
operation messages 130  
Operation warnings 129  
OPTION BOARD 155  
OUTPUT 134  
OUTPUT page 88  
Output Signals 88  
OUTPUT/DCC selector 24  
shot marks 39  
Shoulder pad 18  
shoulder pad 121  
shoulder strap 120  
Shoulder strap posts 18  
SHT ENABLE 139  
SHT ENABLE page 62  
SHUTTER selector 24  
Single Trigger mode 48  
SKIN DETAIL 142  
K
KNEE 141  
L
Lens  
mounting 114  
LENS connector 18  
LENS FILE 139  
lens file 93  
SLS (slow speed shutter) mode 59  
Spare indicator 34  
Stand-by off Timer 55  
Status Confirmation Windows 84  
STATUS ON/SEL / OFF switch 27  
STOP button 26  
Supplied accessories 131  
supplied microphone 115  
SW STATUS 140  
LENS FILE 1 154  
LENS FILE 2 154  
LENS FILE 3 154  
LENS FILE page 93  
Lens locking lever 18  
Lens mount 18  
Lens mount cap 18  
LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls 20  
LEVEL ADJ 145  
LIGHT connector 18  
Light shoe 18  
LIGHT switch 17, 31  
LINE/MIC/+48 V ON switches 21  
LOCK knob 23  
P
PAINT menu 71  
PEAKING control 22  
Picture Cache Function 42  
Picture Cache mode 42  
Picture Cache time 42  
PLAY button and indicator 26  
Playback in Color 53  
Power Supply 17  
POWER switch 17  
PRESET WHT 150  
PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch 30  
Progressive scan mode 94  
PsF mode 94  
System configuration 14  
T
TALLY indicator 22, 31, 34  
TALLY switch 22, 31  
Tape status indicator 32  
TC IN connector 29  
TC OUT connector 29  
TEST OUT 134  
LOW KEY SAT. 144  
Pull down mode 95  
M
R
MAINTENANCE menu 71  
Manual Interval Rec mode 48  
MARKER 1 137  
Rain Cover 121  
TEST OUT connector 25  
Time code display 33  
time code setting 67  
time code synchronization 68  
TIME/DATE 155  
TIME/DATE page 92  
TIMECODE 149  
TOP menu 70  
tripod 119  
tripod adaptor 119  
Tripod mount 18  
TURBO GAIN button 25  
TURBO SW SEL window 91  
REAR TALLY indicator 32  
REC indicator 34  
Recording Review 53  
recording start mark 39, 42  
REFERENCE 154  
reference file 108  
REMOTE connector 25  
RESET button 30  
RE-TAKE function 51  
return video signal 86  
REW button and indicator 26  
ROM VERSION 155  
MARKER 1 page 81  
MARKER 2 137  
Marker Display 81  
MEMORY STICK 154  
Memory Stick compartment 27  
MEMORY STICK OPEN button 27  
MEMORY STICK page 108  
MENU knob 27  
MENU ON/OFF switch 27  
Menu Organization 70  
MIC IN connector 19  
MIC LEVEL control 19  
Microphone 19  
S
U
MONITOR switch 19  
MONITOR volume control 20  
MTX LINEAR 143  
SAVE indicator 34  
SCENE FILE 144, 153  
scene file 104  
UHF portable tuners 117  
UMID SET 139  
UMID SET page 97  
user bits 68  
USER FILE 153  
MTX MULTI 143  
loading 106  
saving 104  
SCENE FILE page 104  
SET STATUS 138  
SET STATUS page 85  
SHIFT button 30  
SHOT DISP 138  
SHOT DISP page 82  
SHOT ID 138  
N
User File 101  
USER FILE2 153  
USER menu 70  
ND COMP 152  
ND filter 57  
non-drop frame mode 67  
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu 70  
V
O
shot ID 83  
SHOT ID page 83  
V MODULATION 143  
VANC RX 152  
OFFSET WHT 138  
Index  
159  
Vertical smear 130  
VF DISP 1 136  
VF DISP 1 page 79  
VF DISP 2 136  
VF DISP 2 page 79  
VF SETTING 137  
VF SETTING page 82  
VIDEO OUT connector 25  
Viewfinder 23  
detaching 113  
Viewfinderfront-rearpositioninglever  
23  
Viewfinder left-right positioning ring  
23  
viewfinder position 112  
Viewfinder Rotation Bracket 113  
Viewfinder stopper 23  
VTR MODE 149  
VTR operation status and status  
indicators 33  
VTR SAVE/STBY switch 26  
VTR START button 26  
W
Warning (!) indicator 34  
WARNING indicator 32  
WHITE 140  
WHITE BAL switch 24  
white balance 57  
WHITE page 89  
WHT SHADING 145  
WRR-855A/855B 117  
WRR-860/862 117  
X
XLR connection automatic detection  
116, 119  
Z
ZEBRA switch 22  
Index  
160  
The material contained in this manual consists of information  
that is the property of Sony Corporation and is intended solely  
for use by the purchasers of the equipment described in this  
manual.  
Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any  
portion of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose other  
than the operation or maintenance of the equipment described  
in this manual without the express written permission of Sony  
Corporation.  
Sony Corporation  
DVW-970/970P  
(SY)  
3-869-913-01 (1)  
Printed in Japan  
2005.06.13  
© 2005  

West Bend Back to Basics 4000 User Manual
ViewSonic VS12910 User Manual
Technicolor Thomson RP5430 User Manual
Sony DCR SR42E User Manual
Sony CDX L490B User Manual
Sony CCD TRV 10 E User Manual
Sony 6027PW User Manual
Silvercrest CDV 710 User Manual
Sharp Scientific Calculator EL520XBWH User Manual
Rotel RX 950AX User Manual